ANRITSU/ANRITSU 37XXXD Operation ANRITSU
User Manual: ANRITSU/ANRITSU 37XXXD Operation
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 630
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
SERIES 37XXXD VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 490 JARVIS DRIVE · MORGAN HILL, CA 95037-2809 P/N: 10410-00261 REVISION: A PRINTED: SEPTEMBER 2004 COPYRIGHT 2004 ANRITSU CO. WARRANTY The ANRITSU product(s) listed on the title page is (are) warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for three years from the date of shipment. ANRITSU’s obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the warranty period. Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to ANRITSU for warranty repairs. Obligation is limited to the original purchaser. ANRITSU is not liable for consequential damages. LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty does not apply to ANRITSU connectors that have failed due to normal wear. Also, the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer, unauthorized modification or misuse, or operation outside of the environmental specifications of the product. No other warranty is expressed or implied, and the remedies provided herein are the Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies. TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS V Connector and K Connector are registered trademarks of ANRITSU Company. GPC-7 is a registered trademark of Amphenol Corporation. ANACAT is a registered trademark of EEsof, Inc. QuietJet and ThinkJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Co. Microsoft, Excel, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Corporation. Iomega and Zip are registered trademarks of Iomega Company. NOTICE ANRITSU Company has prepared this manual for use by ANRITSU Company personnel and customers as a guide for the proper installation, operation and maintenance of ANRITSU Company equipment and computer programs. The drawings, specifications, and information contained herein are the property of ANRITSU Company, and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings, specifications, and information is prohibited; they shall not be reproduced, copied, or used in whole or in part as the basis for manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior written consent of ANRITSU Company. UPDATES Updates to this manual, if any, may be downloaded from the Anritsu Internet site at: http://www.us.anritsu.com. Will have a new doc end of August Will have a new doc end of August Safety Symbols To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Company uses the following symbols to indicate safety-related information. For your own safety, please read the information carefully BEFORE operating the equipment. Symbols used in manuals DANGER This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly. WARNING This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly. CAUTION This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken. Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manuals Some or all of the following five symbols may or may not be used on all Anritsu equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual. The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE operating the equipment. This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically in or near the barred circle. his indicates a compulsory safety precaution. The required operation is indicated symbolically in or near the circle. This indicates warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or near the triangle. This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box. These indicate that the marked part should be recycled. 37XXXD OM Safety-1 For Safety WARNING Always refer to the operation manual when working near locations at which the alert mark, shown on the left, is attached. If the operation, etc., is performed without heeding the advice in the operation manual, there is a risk of personal injury. In addition, the equipment performance may be reduced. Moreover, this alert mark is sometimes used with other marks and descriptions indicating other dangers. WARNING When supplying power to this equipment, connect the accessory 3-pin power cord to a 3-pin grounded power outlet. If a grounded 3-pin outlet is not available, use a conversion adapter and ground the green wire, or connect the frame ground on the rear panel of the equipment to ground. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock. WARNING Repair This equipment can not be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to remove the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components. Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire and shock hazards should service this equipment. There are high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk of damage to precision components. WARNING Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or use an equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this equipment is lifted by one person. Safety-2 37XXXD OM Narrative Table Of Contents Chapter 1—General Information This chapter provides a general description of the Anritsu Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer System and its major units: network analyzer, test set, and frequency source. It also provides descriptions for the precision component kits, and equipment options. Additionally, it contains the listing of recommended test equipment. Chapter 2—Installation This chapter provides instructions for performing an initial inspection, preparing the equipment for use, setting up for operation over the IEEE-488.2 (GPIB) Bus, using a printer, and preparing the units for storage and/or shipment. It also provides a listing of Anritsu Customer Service Centers. Chapter 3—Network Analyzers, A Primer This chapter provides an introduction to network analysis and the types of measurements that can be made using them. It provides general and introductory description. Chapter 4—Front Panel Operation This chapter describes the front panel controls and provides flow diagrams for the menus called up using the front panel controls. It contains the following sub-chapters: · Front Panel Control-Group Descriptions · Calibration Keys and Indicators, Detailed Description · Save/Recall Menu Key and Menus, Key Description and Menu Flow · Measurement Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · Channel Keys and Menu, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · Display Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · Enhancement Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · Hard Copy Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · System State Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · Markers/limits Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow · Disk Storage Interface, Detailed Description Chapter 5—Error And Status Messages This chapter describes the type of error messages you may encounter during operation and provides a tabular listing. This listing describes and defines the error types. Chapter 6—Data Displays This chapter provides a detailed description of the various data displays. It describes the graph types, frequency markers, measurement limit lines, status displays, and data display controls. 37XXXD OM i Narrative Table of Contents (Continued) Chapter 7—Measurement Calibration This chapter provides a discussion and tutorial on measurement calibration. It contains step-by-step calibration procedures for the Standard (OSL), Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM methods. It also has a procedure for calibrating using a sliding termination. Chapter 8—Measurements This chapter discusses measurements with the 37XXXD VNA. It contains sub-chapters that provide a detailed descriptions for Transmission and Reflection, Low Level and Gain, Group Delay, Active Device, Multiple Source Control, Adapter Removal, Gain Compression, and Receiver Mode measurements Chapter 9—Time Domain This chapter describes the Option 2, Time Domain feature. It provides an operational procedure and a flowchart of the time domain menus. Chapter 10—AutoCal This chapter describes the Automatic Calibrator (AutoCal) feature and provides operational information and procedures. Chapter 11—Operational Checkout Procedures This chapter provides a procedure for operational checkout Chapter 12—Calibration Kits This chapter provides a description and listing of components for the calibration kits. Chapter 13—Millimeter Wave System This chapter contains description, operation, and checkout procedures for the millimeter wave measurement capability that can be added to the 371XXC Vector Network Analyzer. Chapter 14—ME7808A Broadband Measurement System This chapter contains description, operation, and checkout procedures for the optional broadband measurement capability that can be added to the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer. Appendix A—Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing This appendix shows all of the menus that are called up using the front panel controls. It provides a replica of the menu and descriptive text for all of the various menu choices. The listing is alphabetical by the menu call letters mentioned and/or illustrated in Chapter 4. Appendix B—Model 37XXXD VNA Rear Panel Connectors This appendix describes the rear panel connectors. It also provides pinout listing. Appendix C—Performance Specifications This appendix contains the Technical Data Sheet, part number 11410-00350, which provides performance specifications. Subject Index ii 37XXXD OM Table of Contents Chapter 1 General Information 1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-3 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-4 ONLINE MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 372XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 373XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-6 MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-7 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Model 3650 SMA/3.5 mm Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Model 3651 GPC–7 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Model 3652 K Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Model 3653 Type N Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Model 3654B V Connector® Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Model 3656 W1 Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Model 3666 3.5 mm Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Model 3667 GPC–7 Verification Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Model 3668 K Connector® Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Model 3669/3669B V Connector® Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1-8 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1-9 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1-10 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Chapter 2 Installation 2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Option 4, External SCSI Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 37XXXD OM iii Table of Contents (Continued) 2-4 GPIB SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-5 SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 GPIB Interface to an External Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-6 ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-7 EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-8 RACK MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-10 SERVICE CENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Chapter 3 Network Analyzers, A Primer 3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Source Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Test Set Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3-3 NETWORK ANALYZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation iv 4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-2 KEY-GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-3 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4-4 SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4-5 MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP 4-6 CHANNELS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4-7 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4-8 ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 4-9 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 4-10 SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 4-11 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 37XXXD OM Table of Contents (Continued) 4-12 DISK STORAGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Disk Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Disk File Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Formatting a Data File Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Copying Data Files From Disk to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Recovering From Disk Write/Read Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4-13 COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Create Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 List Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Delete Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Remove Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Chapter 5 Error and Status Messages 5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-2 ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Chapter 6 Data Displays 6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6-2 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Graph Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 6-3 FREQUENCY MARKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-4 37XXXD OM LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 v Table of Contents (Continued) 6-5 STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Analog Instrument Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Sweep Indicator Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6-6 DATA DISPLAY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Data Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Display of Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6-7 HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Chapter 7 Measurement Calibration 7-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-2 DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Establishing the Test Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Understanding the Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 vi 7-3 SLIDING TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 7-4 SOLT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 7-5 OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 7-6 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 7-7 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 7-8 TRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 7-9 MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 37XXXD OM Table of Contents (Continued) Chapter 8 Measurements 8-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-2 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-3 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 8-4 GROUP DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 8-5 ACTIVE DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 8-6 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 8-7 ADAPTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 8-8 GAIN COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Power and VNAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Swept Power Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 8-9 RECEIVER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Set-on Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Receiver Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Receiver Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 8-10 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 Embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 De-embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 8-11 OPTICAL APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68 Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements . . . 8-74 Chapter 9 Time Domain 9-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9-2 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9-3 OPERATING TIME DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9-4 WINDOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 37XXXD OM vii Table of Contents (Continued) 9-5 GATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 9-6 ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 9-7 EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 9-8 TIME DOMAIN MENUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Chapter 10 AutoCal 10-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-3 CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 10-4 DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 10-6 CHARACTERIZATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 10-7 USING AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 10-8 PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 10-9 AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Chapter 11 Operational Checkout Procedures 11-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-2 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-3 INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-4 SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-5 NON-RATIO POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 11-6 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Chapter 12 Calibration Kits 12-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12-2 PURPOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12-3 KIT CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Model 3650 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Model 3651 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Model 3652 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Model 3653 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Model 3654/ 3654B Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Model 3656 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 viii 37XXXD OM Table of Contents (Continued) 12-4 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Pin Depth Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Over Torquing Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Teflon Tuning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Mechanical Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 12-5 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Chapter 13 Millimeter Wave System 13-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13-3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Test Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Measurement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 13-4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 13-5 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 13-6 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Entering/ Leaving Millimeter Wave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Changing Bands/Modules While in Millimeter Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Allowable Millimeter Wave Module Configurations, Measurements and Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Effect of Default Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Redefinition of Band Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Use of Normal Multiple Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Stored Setups and Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 External Source and Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 13-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 13-8 REMOTE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 13-9 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 13-10 OPERATION CHECKOUT—IF POWER LEVEL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 37XXXD OM ix Table of Contents (Continued) 13-11 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— TRANSMISSION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 13-12 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— REFLECTION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30 Chapter 14 ME7808B Broadband Measurement System 14-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14-2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Measurement Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Console and Associated Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 14-3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 14-4 INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Millimeter Module Checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 14-5 WAFER PROBE STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 14-6 BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 14-7 BROADBAND CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Merging Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Appendix A Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing Appendix B Rear Panel Connectors Appendix C Performance Specifications Subject Index x 37XXXD OM Chapter 1 General Information Table of Contents 1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-3 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-4 ONLINE MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 372XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 373XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-6 MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-7 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Model 3650 SMA/3.5 mm Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Model 3651 GPC–7 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Model 3652 K Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Model 3653 Type N Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Model 3654B V Connector® Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Model 3656 W1 Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Model 3666 3.5 mm Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Model 3667 GPC–7 Verification Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Model 3668 K Connector® Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Model 3669/3669B V Connector® Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1-8 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1-9 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1-10 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Figure 1-1. Model 37397D Vector Network Analyzer System Chapter 1 General Information 1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL This manual provides general information, installation, and operating information for the Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer (VNA) system. (Throughout this manual, the terms VNA, 37XXXD VNA, and 37XXXD will be used interchangeably to refer to the system.) 1-2 INTRODUCTION This section provides general information about the 37XXXD VNA system and one or more precision-component calibration or performance verification kits. The section also provides a listing of recommended test equipment. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER All Anritsu instruments are assigned a unique six-digit ID number, such as “940101.” This number is affixed to a decal on the rear panel of each unit. In any correspondence with Anritsu Customer Service, please use this number. 1-4 ONLINE MANUALS Manual updates, if any, are available on Anritsu's Internet download page (http://www.us.anritsu.com/downloads/). 1-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The 37XXXD Network Analyzer (Figure 1-1) is a single-instrument system that contains a built-in source, test set, and analyzer. It is produced in two series— 372XXD and 373XXD—described below. All models provide up to 1601 measurement data points, a built-in hard-disk drive for storing and recalling front panel setups and measurement and calibration data. They also provide an on-screen display of total operational time and dates of system calibrations. They support operation over the IEEE 488.2 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). 1-3 37XXXD OM 1-3 MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS 372XXD 373XXD 1-6 1-7 1-4 GENERAL INFORMATION The 372XXD is a fully functioning VNA for making passive-device measurements. The series offers five models that cover a range from 22.5 MHz to 65 GHz. The models are shown below: Model Frequency Range 37247D 40.0 MHz to 20.0 GHz 37269D 40.0 MHz to 40.0 GHz 37277D 40.0 MHz to 50.0 GHz 37297D 40.0 MHz to 65.0 GHz The 373XXD is a fully functioning VNA for making passive- and active-device measurements. The series offers five models that cover a range from 22.5 MHz to 65 GHz. The models are shown below. Model Frequency Range 37347D 40.0 MHz to 20.0 GHz 37369D 40.0 MHz to 40.0 GHz 37377D 40.0 MHz to 50.0 GHz 37397D 40.0 MHz to 65.0 GHz MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS Any 37XXXD VNA can be used for making millimeter-wave measurements using the rear panel IF inputs. A description of this measurement mode is described in Chapter 13. PRECISION COMPONENT KITS Two types of precision-component kits are available: calibration and verification. Calibration kits contain components used to identify and separate error sources inherent in microwave test setups. Verification kits consist of components with characteristics traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). This type of kit is usually kept in the metrology laboratory where it provides the most dependable means of checking system accuracy. Each of these kits contains a micro-floppy disk providing coefficient or measurement data for each component. Details of these kits are described in the following paragraphs. 37XXXD OM GENERAL INFORMATION Model 3650 SMA/3.5 mm Calibration Kit PRECISION COMPONENT KITS The 3650 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-2) contains all the precision components and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD VNA for 12-term error-corrected measurements of test devices with SMA or 3.5 mm connectors. Components are included for calibrating both male and female test ports. The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. The kit consists of the following components: q 23S50 Short, SMA/3.5 mm Male q 23SF50 Short, SMA/3.5 mm Female q 24S50 Open, SMA/3.5 mm Male q 24SF50 Open, SMA/3.5 mm Female q 28S50–2 Termination, SMA/3.5 mm Male, 2 ea. (dc–26.5 GHz) Figure 1-2. Typical Model 365X Calibration Kit q 28SF50–2 Termination, SMA/3.5 mm Female, 2 ea.(dc–26.5 GHz) q 33SFSF50 Insertable, SMA/3.5 mm Female/Female, 2 ea. q 33SS50 Insertable, SMA/3.5 mm Male/Male q 33SSF50 Insertable, SMA/3.5 mm Male/Female, 2 ea. q 34AS50–2 Adapter, GPC–7 to SMA/3.5 mm Male, 2 ea. q 34ASF50-2 Adapter, GPC–7 to SMA/3.5 mm Female, 2 ea. q 01–201 Torque Wrench q 01–210 Reference Flat q 01–222 Connector Gauge q 01–223 Gauge Kit Adapter q Data Disk Option 1: Adds 17S50 Sliding Load, SMA/3.5 mm Male; 17SF50 Sliding Load, SMA/3.5 mm Female; 01–211 Female Flush Short; and 01–212 Male Flush Short. 37XXXD OM 1-5 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS Model 3651 GPC–7 Calibration Kit GENERAL INFORMATION The 3651 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-3) contains all the precision components and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD for 12-term error-corrected measurements of test devices with GPC–7 connectors. The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. Option 1 adds a sliding load and a pin depth gauge. The kit consists of the following components: q 23A50 Short, GPC–7 q 24A50 Open, GPC–7 q 28A50–2 Termination, GPC–7, 2 ea. (dc–18 GHz) q 01–200 Torque Wrench Figure 1-3. Typical Model 365X Calibration Kit q 01–221 Collet Extractor Tool and Vial of Four Collets q Data Disk Option 1 Adds: q 17A50 Sliding Load, GPC–7 q 01–220 GPCP–7 Connector Gauge q 01–210 Reference Flat Model 3652 K Connector® Calibration Kit 1-6 37XXXD OM GENERAL INFORMATION Model 3652 K Connector Calibration Kit PRECISION COMPONENT KITS The 3652 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-4) contains all the precision components and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD for 12-term error-corrected measurements of test devices with K Connectors. Components are included for calibrating both male and female test ports. The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. Option 1 adds sliding loads. The kit consists of the following components: q 23K50 Short, K Male q 23KF50 Short, K Female q 24K50 Open, K Male Figure 1-4. Typical Model 365X Calibration Kit q 24KF50 Open, K Female q 28K50 Termination, K Male, 2 ea. (dc–40 GHz) q 28KF50 Termination, K Female, 2 ea. (dc–40 GHz) q 33KK50 Insertable, K Male/Male q 33KFKF50 Insertable K Female/Female, 2 ea q 33KKF50 Insertable, K Male/Female, 2 ea q 34AK50 Adapter, GPC–7/K Male, 2 ea q 34AKF50 Adapter, GPC–7/K Female, 2 ea q 01–201 Torque Wrench q 01–210 Reference Flat q 01–222 Connector Gauge q 01–223 Gauge Kit Adapter q Data Disk Option 1 Adds: q 17K50 Sliding Load, K Male q 17KF50 Sliding Load, K Female q 01–211 Female Flush Short q 01–212 Male Flush Short. 37XXXD OM 1-7 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS Model 3653 Type N Calibration Kit GENERAL INFORMATION The 3653 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-5) contains all the precision components and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD for 12-term error-corrected measurements of test devices with Type N connectors. Components are included for calibrating both male and female test ports. The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. Option 1 for sliding loads is not available in this calibration kit. The kit consists of the following components: q 23N50 Short, N Male q 23NF50 Short, N Female q 24N50 Open, N Male q 24NF50 Open, N Female Figure 1-5. Typical Model 365X Calibration Kit q 28N50–2 Termination, N Male, 2 ea. (dc–18 GHz) q 28NF50–2 Termination, N Female, 2 ea. (dc–18 GHz) q 34AN50–2 Adapter, GPC–7/N Male, 2 ea. q 34ANF50–2 Adapter, GPC–7/N Female, 2 ea. q 01–213 Type N Reference Gauge q 01–224 Type N Connector Gauge q Data Disk Model 3654B 1-8 37XXXD OM GENERAL INFORMATION Model 3654B V Connector® Calibration Kit PRECISION COMPONENT KITS The 3654B Calibration Kit (Figure 1-6) contains all the precision components and tools required to calibrate the 372XXD for 12-term error-corrected measurements of test devices with V Connectors. Components are included for calibrating both male and female test ports. The kit consists of the following components: q 17VF50B Female Sliding Termination q 17V50B Male Sliding Termination q 33VVF50 Male-Female Adapter (2) q Calibration Software, 2360-54B q 28V50B Male and 28VF50B Female Broadband Terminations (2 ea.) Figure 1-6. Typical Model 365X Calibration Kit q 24V50B Male and 24VF50B Female Opens q 23V50B-5.1 Male and 23VF50B-5.1 Female Shorts 5.1mm q 33VV50 Male-Male Adapter q 33VFVF50 Female-Female Adapter (2) q Connector Thumb Wheel (4) q 01-201 Torque Wrench q 01-323 Female Adapter for Pin Gauge q 01-322 Pin Depth Gauge q 01-210 Reference Flat, 01-204 Adapter Wrench q 01-312 Male Flush Short q 01-311 Female Flush Short 37XXXD OM 1-9 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS Model 3656 W1 Connector Calibration Kit GENERAL INFORMATION The 3656 W1 (1.0 mm) Connector Calibration Kit (Figure 1-7) consists of precision components to calibrate the VNA to 110 GHz. The kit supports SOLT calibrations with opens, shorts, and loads to 65 GHz, and Triple Offset short calibrations from 65 GHz to 110 GHz. The kit also includes verification devices for determining system accuracy of the VNA. A diskette containing factory measured test data is supplied for comparison with customer measured data. q 23W50-1, Male Offset Short 2.02 mm q 23WF50-1, Female Offset Short 2.02 mm q 23W50-2, Male Offset Short 2.65 mm q 23WF50-2, Female Offset Short 2.65 mm Figure 1-7. 3656 (W1) Calibration Kit q 23W50-3, Male Offset Short 3.180 mm q 23WF50-3, Female Offset Short 3.180 mm q 24W50, Male Open 1.510 mm q 24WF50, Female Open 1.930 mm q 28W50, Male Broadband Termination q 28WF50, Female Broadband Termination q 33WW50, Male-Male Adapter (1) q 33WWF50, Male-Female Adapter (1) q 33WFWF50, Female-Female Adapter (1) q 01-401, Interchangeable Adapter Fixed Female q 01-402, Interchangeable Adapter Fixed Male q 18WWF50-1, 50 Matched Thruline (Verification Device) q 18WWF50-1B, Stepped Impedance Thruline (Verification Device) q 01-504, Torque Wrench q 01-505, End Wrench q Calibration coefficients diskette q Verification kit diskette 1-10 37XXXD OM GENERAL INFORMATION Model 3666 3.5 mm Verification Kit PRECISION COMPONENT KITS The 3666 Verification Kit (Figure 1-8) contains precision 3.5 mm components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk containing factory-measured test data for all components is supplied for comparison with customer-measured data. The 3666 consists of the following components: q 19S50–7 7.5 cm Air Line q 19S50–7B 7.5 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Standard) q 42S–20 20 dB Attenuator Figure 1-8. 37XXXD OM Typical Model 366X Verification Kit q 42S–50 50 dB Attenuator 1-11 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS Model 3667 GPC–7 Verification Kit GENERAL INFORMATION The 3667 Verification Kit (Figure 1-9) contains precision GPC–7 components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk containing factory-measured test data for each component is supplied for comparison with customer-measured data. The kit consists of the following components: q 18A50–10B 10 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Standard) q 18A50–10 10 cm Air Line Figure 1-9. 1-12 Typical Model 366X Verification Kit q 42A–20 20 dB Attenuator q 42A–50 50 dB Attenuator 37XXXD OM GENERAL INFORMATION Model 3668 K Connector® Verification Kit PRECISION COMPONENT KITS The 3668 Verification Kit (Figure 1-10) contains precision K Connector components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk containing factory-measured test data for each component is supplied for comparison with customer-measured data. The kit consists of the following components: q 19K50–7 7.5 cm Air Line q 19K50–7B 7.5 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Standard) q 42K–20 20 dB Attenuator Figure 1-10. 37XXXC OM Typical Model 366X Verification Kit q 42K–50 50 dB Attenuator 1-13 OPTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION Model 3669/3669B V Connector® Verification Kits The 3669 and 3669B Verification Kits (Figure 1-11) contain precision V Connector components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk containing factory-measured test data for each component is supplied for comparison with customer-measured data. The kit consists of the following components: q 19-V50-5 5 cm Air Line q 19V50-5B 5 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Standard) q 42V-20 20 dB Attenuator q 42V-40 40 dB Attenuator Figure 1-11. 1-8 Typical Model 366X Verification Kit OPTIONS The following options are available: q Option 1: Rack Mount Kit q Option 2: Time (Distance) Domain Measurement Capability q Option 4: External SCSI Hard Drive Interface q Option 15: Flexible test set (provides access to all four samplers and Source loops for each port) 1-9 1-10 1-14 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE System performance specifications are provided in Appendix C. The 37XXXD VNA system does not require any preventive maintenance. 37XXXD OM Chapter 2 Installation Table of Contents 2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Option 4, External SCSI Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-4 GPIB SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-5 SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 GPIB Interface to an External Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-6 ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-7 EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-8 RACK MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-10 SERVICE CENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Chapter 2 Installation 2-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides information for the initial inspection and preparation for use of the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer. Information for interfacing the 37XXXD to the IEEE-488 General Purpose Interface Bus and reshipment and storage information is also included. 2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the container or cushioning material is damaged, retain until the contents of the shipment have been checked against the packing list and the instrument has been checked for mechanical and electrical operation. If the 37XXXD is damaged mechanically, notify your local sales representative or Anritsu Customer Service. If either the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress, notify the carrier as well as Anritsu. Keep the shipping materials for the carrier’s inspection. WARNING Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or use an equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this equipment is lifted by one person. 2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE Except for units with Option 4 (see following page), no initial setup is required. After unpacking, the 37XXXD is ready for use. The 37XXXD is equipped with automatic line-power sensing, and will operate with any of the following line voltages: 100V, 120V, 220V, 240V +5%, –10%, 48–63 Hz, 350 VA. The 37XXXD is intended for Installation Category (Overvoltage Category) II. WARNING When supplying power to this equipment, always use a three-wire power cable connected to a three-wire power line outlet. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock. 37XXXD OM 2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE Option 4, External SCSI Drive Setup INSTALLATION The 37XXXD is available with an external SCSI drive interface as Option 4. This option deletes the usual internal hard disk and provides support for the use of an external SCSI drive. An external SCSI drive and interface cable are not included with Option 4, but may be purchased from Anritsu. Contact your local sales representative for information on availability and price. Compatible drives may also be purchased from your local computer retailer. Requirements: q Interface: SCSI, SCSI-2 ® ® ® q Supported Drives: Iomega Zip 100MB SCSI, Zip 250MB SCSI, Jaz 1, Jaz 2 (other drives may operate, but are not guaranteed) q Connector: Centronics 50 Male Pro Series SCSI I (37XXXD is Female) q SCSI ID: 5 q Terminated: Yes System Boot: Depending on your system configuration at the time of shipment, a drive (and cartridge) may be included. If not, your external drive must be connected to the 37XXXD and initialized with the system files as described below before proceeding. Ensure that the drive is configured correctly and powered on. If the drive is a cartridge type, ensure that a cartridge with the system file on it is installed. Turn on the 37XXXD and the system should boot normally. Cartridges may then be exchanged if you wish to share files. Initializing the Drive: A set of 37000 Basic Measurement Software floppy disks, Anritsu part number 2300-212, is required. This 4-disk set is supplied with your shipment. Anritsu recommends BMS version 4.01 or above when using an external SCSI drive. NOTE This operation will erase all of the files on the SCSI drive. Copy any important files before proceeding. 2-4 Step 1. Connect the external drive to the 37XXXD’s rear panel SCSI port with the interface cable (refer to Appendix B for information on the rear panel connectors). Ensure that the external SCSI drive is powered on with a cartridge installed (if applicable). Step 2. With the 37XXXD powered off, insert Disk 1 of the 37000 BMS into the 37XXXD floppy drive. Step 3. Power up the 37XXXD and immediately press any key to view the “Format Hard Drive” menu. 37XXXD OM INSTALLATION GPIB SETUP Step 4. Press 1 to format the drive. Disk 1 will load automatically. Step 5. Follow the instructions on the 37XXXD display to load the next three disks. During this step, the system files are transferred to the SCSI drive. The SCSI drive initialization is now complete. The 37XXXD should sweep with no displayed errors and is now ready to boot-up from the external drive at power-on. 2-4 GPIB SETUP All functions of the 37XXXD (except power on/off and initialization of the hard disk) can be controlled remotely by an external computer/controller via the IEEE-488.2 GPIB. The information in this section pertains to interface connections and cable requirements for the rear panel GPIB connector. Refer to the Model 37XXXD Programming Manual, Anritsu Part Number 10410-00262, for information about remote operation of the 37XXXD using the GPIB. The 37XXXD GPIB operates with any IBM XT, AT, or PS/2 compatible computer/controller equipped with a National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA interface card and software. Interface Connector Cable Length Restrictions Interface between the 37XXXD and other devices on the GPIB is via a standard 24-wire GPIB interface cable. For proper operation, order Anritsu part number 2100-1, -2, -4, or -5 (1, 2, 4, or 0.5 meter length) cables through your local sales representative. This cable uses a double-sided connector; one connector face is a plug, the other a receptacle. These double-function connectors allow parallel connection of two or more cables to a single instrument connector. The pin assignments for the rear panel GPIB connector are shown in Figure B-2, located in Appendix B. The GPIB system can accommodate up to 15 instruments at any one time. To achieve design performance on the bus, proper timing and voltage level relationships must be maintained. If either the cable length between separate instruments or the accumulated cable length between all instruments is too long, the data and control lines cannot be driven properly and the system may fail to perform. Cable length restrictions are as follows: q No more than 15 instruments may be installed on the bus. q Total accumulative cable length in meters may not exceed two times the number of bus instruments or 20 meters—whichever is less. NOTE For low EMI applications, the GPIB cable should be a fully shielded type, with well-grounded metal-shell connectors. (Use Anritsu 2100-series cables.) 37XXXD OM 2-5 SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION INSTALLATION 2-5 SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION GPIB Interface to an External Plotter GPIB Addresses 2-6 ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION There are two rear panel GPIB IEEE-488 connectors. The IEEE 488.2 connector used to interface the 37XXXD to an external computer/ controller via a standard GPIB cable. The Dedicated GPIB connector is used to interface to plotters and a second source for multiple source operation via a standard GPIB cable. The 37XXXD GPIB interface can be configured to control a suitable external plotter (refer to Chapter 6, Data Displays). In this mode of operation, the GPIB is dedicated to this application and only the 37XXXD and the plotter are connected to the GPIB. Standard GPIB cables are used to interconnect to the plotter. The 37XXXD leaves the factory with the default GPIB address set to six. This address may be changed using the GP7 menu (see Appendix A). The 37XXXD can be remotely controlled via a network server and an Ethernet connection via the standard RJ45 connector on the rear panel. The 37XXXD software supports the TCP/IP network protocol. The TCP/IP protocol setup requires the following: q IP Address: Every computer/electronic device in a TCP/IP network requires an IP address. An IP address has four numbers (each between 0 and 255) separated by periods. For example: 128.111.122.42 is a valid IP address q Subnet Mask: The subnet mask distinguishes the portion of the IP address that is the network ID from the portion that is the station ID. The subnet mask 255.255.0.0, when applied to the IP address given above, would identify the network ID as 128.111 and the station ID as 122.42. All stations in the same Local Area Network (LAN) should have the same network ID but different station IDs q Default Gateway: A TCP/IP network can have a gateway to communicate beyond the LAN identified by the network ID. A gateway is a computer or electronic device that is connected to two different networks and can move TCP/IP data from one network to the other. A single LAN that is not connected to other LANs requires a default gateway setting of 0.0.0.0. This (0.0.0.0) is Lightning’s default gateway setting. If you have a gateway, then the default gateway would be set to the appropriate value of your gateway. NOTE The default gateway setting is only activated after the system power is recycled. 2-6 37XXXD OM INSTALLATION EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR q Ethernet Address: An Ethernet address is a unique 48-bit value that identifies a network interface card to the rest of the network. Every network card has a unique ethernet address permanently stored into its memory Inappropriate setting of the Default Gateway IP Address will cause the Lightning system to appear to be locked up at start up. The instrument will appear to stop working at the following message: Application loaded successfully, starting system… 2-7 2-8 EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR The rear panel External Monitor connector allows the internal display information of the 37XXXD to be connected to an external VGA monitor (either color or monochrome). The pinout of this 15-pin Type D connector is shown in Figure B-5, located in Appendix B. RACK MOUNT To install the Option 1 Rack Mount rails, refer to the below-listed procedure. 37XXXD OM Step 1. Disconnect the line cord and any other attachments from the instrument. Step 2. Carefully place the instrument on its top (bottom-side up) on a secure and stable work surface. 2-7 RACK MOUNT INSTALLATION Step 3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two handles or four bumper assemblies (and tilt bail, if installed) from the front of the unit, and the four feet at the rear (Figure 2-1). Save the screws for later use. Figure 2-1. Removing Cover NOTES q The green-headed screws are metric threads and must be used only in the appropriately tapped holes q The feet, handles, and bumpers are not reused in this application Step 4. Remove the center screws from the rear of the left and right side covers. Step 5. Remove the two side carrying handle screws (if so equipped) located under the plastic handle ends. Step 6. Remove the left and right side covers. These side covers are not reused in this application. Step 7. Install the two Rack Mount Handles using the green-headed screws removed earlier. Refer to Figure 2-2, on the following page, for the remainder of the assembly procedure. 2-8 37XXXD OM INSTALLATION RACK MOUNT Step 8. Secure the new left cover (2) from this retrofit kit to the left side chassis of the instrument by installing the two center screws (6) to the top and bottom and the previously removed center screw at the rear of the left cover. Step 9. Secure the slide assembly (4) to the left cover by installing the four mounting screws (5) to the left chassis. Figure 2-2. Mounting Rails Step 10. Secure the new right cover (3) from this retrofit kit to the right side chassis of the instrument by installing the center screw (6) through the center of the right side cover and the previously removed center screw at the rear of the right side cover. Step 11. Secure the slide assembly (4) to the right cover by installing the four mounting screws (5) to the right chassis. This completes the installation of the slide assembly. 37XXXD OM 2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT 2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT INSTALLATION The following paragraphs describe the procedure for preparing the 37XXXD for storage or shipment. Preparation for Storage Preparing the 37XXXD for storage consists of cleaning the unit, packing the inside with moisture-absorbing desiccant crystals, and storing the unit in a temperature environment that is maintained between –40 and +70 degrees centigrade (–40 to 156 degrees Fahrenheit). Preparation for Shipment To provide maximum protection against damage in transit, the 37XXXD should be repackaged in the original shipping container. If this container is no longer available and the 37XXXD is being returned to Anritsu for repair, advise Anritsu Customer Service; they will send a new shipping container free of charge. In the event neither of these two options is possible, instructions for packaging and shipment are given below. Use a Suitable Container Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 275-pound test strength. This carton should have inside dimensions of no less than six inches larger than the instrument dimensions to allow for cushioning. Protect the Instrument Surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish. Cushion the Instrument Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam between the carton and the instrument. Provide at least three inches of dunnage on all sides. Seal the Container Seal the carton by using either shipping tape or an industrial stapler. Address the Container If the instrument is being returned to Anritsu for service, mark the Anritsu address and your return address on the carton in one or more prominent locations. Refer to the address of your local representative listed in Table 2-1 on the following page. 2-10 37XXXD OM INSTALLATION 2-10 SERVICE CENTERS Table 2-1. SERVICE CENTERS Table 2-1 provides a list of international service centers. Anritsu Service Centers UNITED STATES FRANCE JAPAN ANRITSU COMPANY 490 Jarvis Drive Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809 Telephone: (408) 776-8300 1-800-ANRITSU FAX: 408-776-1744 ANRITSU S.A 9 Avenue du Quebec Zone de Courtaboeuf 91951 Les Ulis Cedex Telephone: 016-09-21-550 FAX: 016-44-61-065 ANRITSU CUSTOMER SERVICES LTD. 1800 Onna Atsugi-shi Kanagawa-Prf. 243 Japan Telephone: 0462-96-6688 FAX: 0462-25-8379 GERMANY SINGAPORE ANRITSU GmbH Grafenberger Allee 54-56 D-40237 Dusseldorf, Germany Telephone: 0211-968550 FAX: 0211-9685555 ANRITSU (SINGAPORE) PTE LTD. 10, Hoe Chiang Road #07-01/02 Keppel Towers Singapore 089315 Telephone: 6-282-2400 FAX: 6-282-2533 ANRITSU COMPANY 10 New Maple Ave., Unit 305 Pine Brook, NJ 07058 Telephone: (973) 227-8999 1-800-ANRITSU FAX: 973-575-0092 INDIA SOUTH AFRICA ANRITSU COMPANY 1155 E. Collins Blvd Richardson, TX 75081 Telephone: 1-800-ANRITSU FAX: 972-671-1877 MEERA AGENCIES PVT. LTD. 23 Community Centre Zamroodpur, Kailash Colony Extension, New Delhi, India 110 048 Phone: 011-2-6442700/6442800 FAX : 011-2-644250023 ETECSA 12 Surrey Square Office Park 330 Surrey Avenue Ferndale, Randburt, 2194 South Africa Telephone: 011-27-11-787-7200 FAX: 011-27-11-787-0446 AUSTRALIA ISRAEL SWEDEN ANRITSU PTY. LTD. Unit 3, 170 Foster Road Mt Waverley, VIC 3149 Australia Telephone: 03-9558-8177 FAX: 03-9558-8255 TECH-CENT, LTD. 4 Raul Valenberg St Tel-Aviv 69719 Telephone: (03) 64-78-563 FAX: (03) 64-78-334 ANRITSU AB Borgafjordsgatan 13 164 40 KISTA, Sweden Telephone: +46-8-53470700 FAX: +46-8-53470730 BRAZIL ITALY TAIWAN ANRITSU ELECTRONICA LTDA. Praia de Botafogo, 440, Sala 2401 CEP22250-040, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brazil Telephone: 021-527-6922 FAX: 021-53-71-456 ANRITSU Sp.A Roma Office Via E. Vittorini, 129 00144 Roma EUR Telephone: (06) 50-99-711 FAX: (06) 50-22-425 ANRITSU CO., INC. 7F, No. 316, Section 1 NeiHu Road Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Telephone: 886-2-8751-1816 FAX: 886-2-8751-2126 CANADA KOREA UNITED KINGDOM ANRITSU INSTRUMENTS LTD. 700 Silver Seven Road, Suite 120 Kanata, Ontario K2V 1C3 Telephone: (613) 591-2003 FAX: (613) 591-1006 ANRITSU CORPORATION LTD. Head Office: 8F, Hyunjuk Building, 832-41 Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Ku Seoul 135-080, South Korea Telephone: 02-553-6603 FAX: 02-553-6605 ANRITSU LTD. 200 Capability Green Luton, Bedfordshire LU1 3LU, England Telephone: 015-82-433200 FAX: 015-82-731303 CHINA ANRITSU ELECTRONICS (SHANGHAI) CO. LTD. 2F, Rm B, 52 Section Factory Building No. 516 Fu Te Rd (N) Shanghai 200131 P.R. China Telephone:21-58680226, 58680227, 58680228 FAX: 21-58680588 37XXXD OM 2-11/2-12 Chapter 3 Network Analyzers, A Primer Table of Contents 3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Source Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Test Set Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3-3 NETWORK ANALYZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Chapter 3 Network Analyzers, A Primer 3-1 INTRODUCTION This section provides front panel operating and measurement application information and data. It includes discussions on the following topics: q System description q General discussion about network analyzers q Basic measurements and how to make them q Error correction q General discussion on test sets 3-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer System measures the magnitude and phase characteristics of networks, amplifiers, attenuators, and antennas. It compares the incident signal that leaves the analyzer with either the signal that is transmitted through the test device or the signal that is reflected from its input. Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 illustrate the types of measurements that the 37XXXD can make. INCIDENT TEST DEVICE TRANSMITTED Gain (dB) Insertion Loss (dB) Insertion Phase (degrees) Transmission Coefficients (S12, S21) Separation of Transmission Components (Real and Imaginary) Electrical Length (m) Electrical Delay (s) Deviation from Linear Phase (degrees) Group Delay (s) Figure 3-1. 37XXXD OM Transmission Measurements 3-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER INCIDENT TEST DEVICE TERMINATION REFLECTED Return Loss (dB) Reflection Coefficients (S11, S22) Reflection Coefficients vs Distance (Fourier Transform) Impedance (R + j X) SWR Figure 3-2. Reflection Measurements The 37XXXD is a self-contained, fully integrated measurement system that includes an optional time domain capability. The system hardware consists of the following: q Analyzer q Precision components required for calibration and performance verification q Optional use of Anritsu 67XXB, 68XXXA/B/C, or 69XXXA/B as a second source The 37XXXD internal system modules perform the following functions: 3-4 Source Module This module provides the stimulus to the device under test (DUT). The frequency range of the source and test set modules establish the frequency range of the system. The frequency stability of the source is an important factor in the accuracy (especially phase accuracy) of the network analyzer. Hence, the 37XXXD always phase locks the source to an internal 10 MHz crystal reference. Test Set Module The test set module routes the stimulus signal to the DUT and samples the reflected and transmitted signals. The type of connector used is important, as is the “Auto Reversing” feature. Auto Reversing means that it applies the stimulus signal in both the forward and reverse direction. The direction is reversed automatically. This saves you from having to reverse the test device physically to measure all four scattering parameters (S-parameters). Frequency conversion (1st and 2nd IFs) occurs in the test set module. Analyzer Module The analyzer module down-converts, receives, and interprets the 3rd IF signal for phase and magnitude data. It then displays the results of this analysis on a large, 190 mm (7-1/2 inch) diagonal color display. This display can show all four S-parameters simultaneously. In addition to the installed display, you can also view the measurement results on an external color monitor. 37XXXD OM NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER 3-3 NETWORK ANALYZERS NETWORK ANALYZERS We will begin this discussion with a subject familiar to most Anritsu customers: scalar network analysis. After showing comparisons, we will proceed to the fundamentals of network analyzer terminology and techniques. This discussion serves as an introduction to topics presented in greater detail later in this section. This discussion will touch on new concepts that include the following: q Reference Delay q S-parameters: what they are and how they are displayed q Complex Impedance and Smith Charts Scalar Analyzer Comparison Network Analyzers do everything that scalar analyzers do except display absolute power. In addition, they add the ability to measure the phase characteristics of microwave devices and allow greater dynamic range. SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZERS MICROWAVE SIGNAL MICROWAVE DETECTOR DETECTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE DETECTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE IS PROPORTIONAL TO SIGNAL AMPLITUDE. Figure 3-3. 37XXXD OM Scalar Analyzer Detection If all a Network Analyzer added was the capability for measuring phase characteristics, its usefulness would be limited. While phase measurements are important in themselves, it is the availability of this phase information that unlocks many new features for complex measurements. These features include Smith Charts, Time Domain, and Group Delay. Phase information also allows greater accuracy through vector error correction of the measured signal. First, let us look at scalar network analyzers (SNAs). SNAs measure microwave signals by converting them to a DC voltage using a diode detector (Figure 3-3). This DC voltage is proportional to the magnitude of the incoming signal. The detection process, however, ignores any information regarding the phase of the microwave signal. In a network analyzer, access is needed to both the magnitude and phase of a microwave signal. There are several different ways to perform the measurement. The method Anritsu employs (called Harmonic Sampling or Harmonic Mixing) is to down-convert the signal to a lower intermediate frequency (IF). This signal can then be measured directly by a tuned receiver. The tuned receiver approach gives the system greater dynamic range. The system is also much less sensitive to interfering signals, including harmonics. 3-5 NETWORK ANALYZERS A NETWORK ANALYZER IS A TUNED RECEIVER INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY (IF) MICROWAVE SIGNAL TUNABLE LOCAL OSCILLATOR • GREATER DYNAMIC RANGE • LESS SENSIVITY TO INTERFERING SIGNALS Figure 3-4. NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER Vector Network Analyzer Basics The network analyzer is a tuned receiver (Figure 3-4, left). The microwave signal is down converted into the passband of the IF. To measure the phase of this signal, we must have a reference to compare it with. If the phase of a signal is 90 degrees, it is 90 degrees different from the reference signal (Figure 3-5, left). The network analyzer would read this as –90 degrees, since the test signal is delayed by 90 degrees with respect to the reference signal. This phase reference can be obtained by splitting off some of the microwave signal before the measurement (Figure 3-7, below). REFERENCE SIGNAL Network Analyzer is a Tuned Receiver PHASE DETECTOR TEST SIGNAL MICROWAVE SOURCE PHASE MEASUREMENT 90 SPLITTER REFERENCE SIGNAL DUT TEST SIGNAL TIME Figure 3-5. Signals with a 90 Degree Phase Difference REFERENCE SIGNAL PHASE DETECTOR TEST SIGNAL Figure 3-7. Splitting the Microwave Signal The phase of the microwave signal after it has passed through the device under test (DUT) is then compared with the reference signal. A network analyzer test set automatically samples the reference signal, so no external hardware is needed. Let us consider for a moment that you remove the DUT and substitute a length of transmission line (Figure 3-6, left). Note that the path length of the test signal is longer than that of the reference signal. Now let us see how this affects our measurement. MICROWAVE SOURCE SPLITTER LONGER PATH LENGTH Figure 3-6. 3-6 Split Signal where a Length of Line Replaces the DUT 37XXXD OM NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER REFERENCE SIGNAL TEST SIGNAL PHASE DETECTOR MICROWAVE SOURCE SPLITTER LONGER BY ONE WAVELENGTH LENGTH (360 degrees) Assume that we are making a measurement at 1 GHz and that the difference in path-length between the two signals is exactly 1 wavelength. This means that test signal is lagging the reference signal by 360 degrees (Figure 3-8). We cannot really tell the difference between one sine wave maxima and the next (they are all identical), so the network analyzer would measure a phase difference of 0 degrees. Now consider that we make this same measurement at 1.1 GHz. The frequency is higher by 10 percent so therefore the wavelength is shorter by 10 percent. The test signal path length is now 0.1 wavelength longer than that of the reference signal (Figure 3-9). This test signal is: 1.1 X 360 = 396 degrees Figure 3-8. Split Signal where Path Length Differs by Exactly One Wavelength REFERENCE SIGNAL TEST SIGNAL PHASE DETECTOR MICROWAVE SOURCE SPLITTER SAME PATH LENGTH -BUTWAVELENGTH IS NOW SHORTER 1.1 WAVELENGTHS = 396 degrees Figure 3-9. MEASURED PHASE NETWORK ANALYZERS Split Signal where Path Length is Longer than One This is 36 degrees different from the phase measurement at 1 GHz. The network analyzer will display this phase difference as –36 degrees. The test signal at 1.1 GHz is delayed by 36 degrees more than the test signal at 1 GHz. You can see that if the measurement frequency is 1.2 GHz, we will get a reading of –72 degrees, –108 degrees for 1.3 GHz, etc. (Figure 3-10). There is an electrical delay between the reference and test signals. For this delay we will use the common industry term of reference delay. You also may hear it called phase delay. In older network analyzers you had to equalize the length of the reference arm with that of the test arm to make an appropriate measurement of phase vs. frequency. To measure phase on a DUT, we want to remove this phase-change-vs.-frequency due to changes in the electrical length. This will allow us to view the actual phase characteristics. These characteristics may be much smaller than the phase change due to electrical length difference. +180 +90 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 0 FREQUENCY, GHz -90 -180 Figure 3-10. 37XXXD OM Electrical Delay 3-7 NETWORK ANALYZERS NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER MEASURED PHASE There are two ways of accomplishing this. The most obvious way is to insert a length of line into the reference signal path to make both paths of equal length (Figure 3-11, below). With perfect transmission lines and a perfect splitter, we would then measure a constant phase as we change the frequency. The problem using this approach is that we must change the line length with each measurement setup. +180 REFERENCE SIGNAL +90 0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 FREQUENCY, GHz PHASE DETECTOR TEST SIGNAL -90 SUBTRACT LINEAR PHASE FROM MEASURED PHASE -180 MICROWAVE SOURCE SPLITTER Figure 3-12. BOTH LINE LENGTHS NOW EQUAL Phase Difference Increases Linearly with Frequency RESULTANT PHASE Figure 3-11. +2 +1 1.3 1.4 1.1 0 -1 1.2 FREQUENCY, GHz Split Signal where Paths are of Equal Length Another approach is to handle the path length difference in software. Figure 3-12 (left) displays the phase-vs.-frequency of a device. This device has different effects on the output phase at different frequencies. Because of these differences, we do not have a perfectly linear phase response. We can easily detect this phase deviation by compensating for the linear phase. The size of the phase difference increases linearly with frequency so we can modify the phase display to eliminate this delay. -2 Figure 3-13. 3-8 Resultant Phase with Path Length The 37XXXD offers automatic reference delay compensation with the push of a button. Figure 3-13 (left) shows the resultant measurement when we compensate path length. In a system application you can usually correct for length differences; however, the residual phase characteristics are critical. 37XXXD OM NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER NETWORK ANALYZERS Network Analyzer Measurements PORT 1 FORWARD REFLECTION PORT 2 DUT Figure 3-14. REVERSE REFLECTION Forward and Reverse Measurements S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION PORT 1 S11 FORWARD REFLECTION PORT 2 DUT S22 REVERSE REFLECTION Now let us consider measuring the DUT. Consider a two port device; that is, a device with a connector on each end. What measurements would be of interest? First, we could measure the reflection characteristics at either end with the other end terminated into 50 ohms. If we designate one end as the normal place for the input that gives a reference. We can then define the reflection characteristics from the reference end as forward reflection, and those from the other end as reverse reflection (Figure 3-14). Second, we can measure the forward and reverse transmission characteristics. However, instead of saying “forward,” “reverse,” “reflection,” and “transmission” all the time, we use a shorthand. That is all that S-parameters are, a shorthand! The “S” stands for scattering. The second number is the device port that the signal is being injected into, while the first is the device port that the signal is leaving. S11, therefore, is the signal being injected into port 1 relative to the signal leaving port 1. The four scattering parameters (Figure 3-15) are: q S11 Forward Reflection q S21 Forward Transmission q S22 Reverse Reflection S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION Figure 3-15. S-parameters PHASE 0 Figure 3-16. 37XXXD OM S-parameters can be displayed in many ways. An S-parameter consists of a magnitude and a phase. We can display the magnitude in dB, just like a scalar network analyzer. We often call this term log magnitude. We can display phase as “linear phase” (Figure 3-16). As discussed earlier, we can’t tell the difference between one cycle and the next. Therefore, after going through 360 degrees we are back to where we began. We can display the measurement from –180 to +180 degrees. The –180 to +180 approach is more common. It keeps the display discontinuity removed from the important 0 degree area used as the phase reference. +180 -180 q S12 Reverse Transmission FREQUENCY Linear Phase-with-frequen cy Waveform 3-9 NETWORK ANALYZERS There are several ways in which all the information can be displayed on one trace. One method is a polar display (Figure 3-17). The radial parameter (distance from the center) is magnitude. The rotation around the circle is phase. We sometimes use polar displays to view transmission measurements, especially on cascaded devices (devices in series). The transmission result is the addition of the phase and log magnitude (dB) information of each device’s polar display. POLAR DISPLAY 90 180 NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER 0 -90 Figure 3-17. Polar Display As we have discussed, the signal reflected from a DUT has both magnitude and phase. This is because the impedance of the device has both a resistive and a reactive term of the form r+jx. We refer to the r as the real or resistive term, while we call x the imaginary or reactive term. The j, which we sometimes denote as i, is an imaginary number. It is the square root of –1. If x is positive, the impedance is inductive; if x is negative, the impedance is capacitive. The size and polarity of the reactive component x is important in impedance matching. The best match to a complex impedance is the complex conjugate. This complex-sounding term simply means an impedance with the same value of r and x, but with x of opposite polarity. This term is best analyzed using a Smith Chart (Figure 3-18), which is a plot of r and x. SMITH CHART INDUCTIVE 50 CAPACITIVE Figure 3-18. 3-10 Smith Chart To display all the information on a single S-parameter requires one or two traces, depending upon the format we want. A very common requirement is to view forward reflection on a Smith Chart (one trace) while observing forward transmission in Log Magnitude and Phase (two traces). Let us see how to accomplish this in the 37XXXD. The 37XXXD has four channels. Each channel can display a complete S-parameter in any format on either one or two traces. All four S-parameters can be seen simultaneously in any desired format. A total of eight traces can be viewed at the same time. While this is a lot of information to digest, the 37XXXD’s large color display makes recognizing and analyzing the data surprisingly easy. 37XXXD OM NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER NETWORK ANALYZERS Another important parameter we can measure when phase information is available is group delay. In linear devices, the phase change through the DUT is linear-with-frequency. Thus, doubling the frequency also doubles the phase change. An important measurement, especially for communications system users, is the rate of change-of-phase-vs.-frequency (group delay). If the rate of phase-change-vs.-frequency is not constant, the DUT is nonlinear. This nonlinearity can create distortion in communications systems. Measurement Error Correction Since we can measure microwave signals in both magnitude and phase, it is possible to correct for six major error terms: q Source Test Port Match q Load Test Port Match q Directivity q Isolation q Transmission Frequency Response q Reflection Frequency Response We can correct for each of these six error terms in both the forward and reverse directions, hence the name 12-term error correction. Since 12-term error correction requires both forward and reverse measurement information, the test set must be reversing. “Reversing” means that it must be able to apply the measurement signal in either the forward or reverse direction. MAGNITUDE AND PHASE OF EACH ERROR SIGNAL IS MEASURED MAG PHASE THEN THE RESULTANT VECTOR IS APPLIED MATHEMATICALLY, HENCE VECTOR ERROR CORRECTION Figure 3-19. 37XXXD OM Magnitude and Phase To accomplish this error correction, we measure the magnitude and phase of each error signal (Figure 3-19). Magnitude and phase information appear as a vector that is mathematically applied to the measurement signal. This process is termed vector error correction. Summary A vector network analyzer is similar to a scalar network analyzer. The major difference is that it adds the capability for measuring phase as well as amplitude. With phase measurements comes scattering, or S-parameters, which are a shorthand method for identifying forward and reverse transmission and reflection characteristics. The ability to measure phase introduces two new displays, polar and Smith Chart. It also adds vector error correction to the measurement trace. With vector error correction, errors introduced by the measurement system are compensated for and measurement uncertainty is minimized. Phase measurements also add the capability for measuring group delay, which is the rate of change-of-phase vs. frequency (group delay). All in all, using a network analyzer provides for making a more complete analysis of your test device. 3-11/3-12 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Table of Contents 4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-2 KEY-GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-3 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4-4 SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4-5 MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP 4-6 CHANNELS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4-7 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4-8 ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 4-9 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 4-10 SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 4-11 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 4-12 DISK STORAGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Disk Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Disk File Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Formatting a Data File Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Copying Data Files From Disk to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Recovering From Disk Write/Read Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4-13 COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Create Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 List Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Delete Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Remove Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 25 Data Entry Menu 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 MHz X1 ns cm 3 GHz 10 us m 24 Enter -3 kHz 10 ps mm 0 . 1 - Channels Markers/Limits Channel Menu Limits Clear Ret Loc Measurement Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Setup Menu Data Points 23 Readout Marker Marker Menu Hold Display Menu System State Calibration Appl Enhancement Hard Copy GPIB Domain Graph Type Set Scale Auto Scale Option Menu S Params Ref Plane Trace Memory Avg/ Smooth Menu Video IF BW Remote Talk 2 3 4 Listen Default Program Begin Cal Utility Menu Save/ Recall Menu Apply Cal Start Print Stop Print Power Local Lockout Port 1 ! ! +24 dBm ! +27 dBm a 1 +27 dBm a ! 2 Port 2 +24 dBm CAUTION AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE ! 5 21 CAUTION 40 VDC MAX Port 1 Source ! ! +20 dBm b b1 +30 dBm MAX Port 2 Source +20 dBm 40 VDC MAX Bias Input AVOID STATIC Port 1 DISCHARGE 2 ! +30 dBm 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Keyboard Port 2 +30 dBm ! 6 Model 37XXXD Front Panel Average SRQ +30 dBm MAX Figure 4-1. Trace Smooth 22 14 15 16 17 0.5A MAX 18 19 20 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation 4-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the front panel keys, controls, and menus. The chapter is organized into an overall description of the front panel key-groups and detailed descriptions of individual keys within the key-groups. 4-2 KEY-GROUPS The following pages provide descriptions of the front panel key-groups illustrated in Figure 4-1 on the previous page. Index 1. LCD display: Displays any or all of the four measurement channels, plus menus. Index 2. Power: Turns the 37XXXD on and off. When on, the operating program runs a self test then recalls the parameters and functions in effect when previously powered down. Index 3. GPIB Indicators: Remote: Lights when the 37XXXD switches to remote (GPIB) control. It remains lit until the unit returns to local control. Talk: Lights when you address the 37XXXD to talk and remains lit until unaddressed. Listen: Lights when you address the 37XXXD to listen and remains lit until unaddressed. SRQ: Lights when the 37XXXD sends a Service Requests (SRQ) to the external controller. The LED remains lit until the 37XXXD receives a serial poll or until the controller resets the SRQ function. Local Lockout: Lights when a local lockout message is received. The LED remains lit until the message is rescinded. When lit, you cannot return the 37XXXD to local control via the front panel. 37XXXD OM 4-3 KEY-GROUPS FRONT PANEL OPERATION Index 4. System State Keys: (Refer to section 4-10, page 4-33, for details and menu flow diagrams.) Default Program: Resets the front panel to the factory-preset state and displays Menu SU1 or SU3 (Appendix A). Pressing this key in conjunction with the “0” or “1” key resets certain internal memories and front panel key states (refer to sections 4-5 and 4-10). NOTE Use of the Default Program key will destroy front panel and calibration setup data, unless they have been saved to disk. Utility Menu: Displays the first in a series of menus that let you perform diskette and other utility-type functions and operations. Index 5. Port 1 Test Connector: Provides an input test connection for the device-under-test (DUT). Index 6. Port 1 Source Loop: Provides for inserting additional amplification on Port 1 before the coupler. Index 7. Calibration Keys: (Refer to section 4-3, page 4-10, for details and menu flow diagrams.) Begin Cal: Calls up the first in a sequence of menus that guide you through a measurement calibration. Refer to section 4-3 for a detailed discussion of the calibration keys, indicators, and menus. Apply Cal: Turns on and off the applied error correction and tune mode. 4-4 Index 8. a1 Loop: Provides direct access to Reference A channel on Port 1 over the entire frequency range. Refer to the front panel for damage levels. Index 9. a2 Loop: Provides direct access to Reference B channel on Port 2 over the entire frequency range. Refer to the front panel for damage levels. Index 10. b1 Loop: Provides direct access to Test A channel on Port 1 over the entire frequency range. Refer to the front panel for damage levels. Index 11. b2 Loop: Provides direct access to Test B channel on Port 2 over the entire frequency range. Refer to the front panel for damage levels. 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION KEY-GROUPS Index 12. Save/Recall Menu Key: Displays the first of several menus that let you save the current calibration or front panel setup or recall a previously saved calibration or setup. Refer to section 4-4, page 4-20, for menu flow diagram. Index 13. Markers/Limits Keys: (Refer to section 4-11, page 4-36, for details and menu flow diagrams.) Marker Menu: Displays the first in a series of menus that let you set and manipulate marker frequencies, times, and distances. Readout Marker: Displays a menu that lists all of the active markers. If no markers are active, the marker menu is displayed. Limits: Displays one of the menus that let you manipulate the limit lines. Index 14. Port 2 Source: Provides for inserting additional amplification on Port 2 before the coupler. Index 15. Hard Copy Keys: (Refer to section 4-9, page 4-31, for details and menu flow diagrams.) Menu: Displays option menus that let you define what will happen each time you press the Start Print key. The displayed menu also selects disk I/O operations. Start Print: Tells the printer or plotter to start output based on the current selections. Stop Print: Immediately stops printing the data, clears the print buffer, and sends a form-feed command to the printer. Index 16. 37XXXD OM Port 2 Test Connector: Provides an input test connection for the device-under-test (DUT). 4-5 KEY-GROUPS FRONT PANEL OPERATION Index 17. Display Keys: (Refer to section 4-7, page 4-25, for details and menu flow diagrams.) Graph Type: Displays the two menus that let you choose the graph type for the active channel. Set Scale: Displays the appropriate scaling menu, based on the graph type for the active channel. Auto Scale: Automatically scales the active channel for optimum viewing. S Params: Displays Menu SP (Appendix A), which lets you choose between S11, S12, S21, or S22. You may display the same parameter on two or more channels. Ref Plane: Displays the first of two menus that let you set the reference plane for the active channel in time or distance. For a correct distance readout, you must set the dielectric constant to the correct value. Refer to the discussion in menu RD2 (Appendix A). Trace Memory: Displays the menus that let you do any of the following. (1) Store the measured data in memory. (2) View the stored data. (3) Add, subtract, multiply, or divide the measured data from the stored data (normalize to the stored memory). (4) View both the measured and the stored data simultaneously on the active channel. (5) Store/Recall saved data to disk. Four memories exist—one for each channel. This lets you normalize the data in each channel independently. The LED on this button lights when the active channel is displaying memory data or measurement data normalized to memory. Index 18. Bias Input Connectors: Port 1: Provides for supplying a bias voltage for the Port 1 input. Port 2: Provides for supplying a bias voltage for the Port 2 input. 4-6 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION Index 19. KEY-GROUPS Enhancement Keys: (Refer to section 4-8, page 4-29 for details and menu flow diagrams.) Option Menu: Displays a series of menus showing the choice of optional features. Video IF BW: Displays a menu that lets you chose between 10 kHz, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, or 10 Hz intermediate frequency (IF) bandwidth filters. Avg/Smooth Menu: Displays a menu that lets you enter values for Averaging and Smoothing. Trace Smooth: Turns the trace smoothing function on and off. Average: Turns the average function on and off. 37XXXD OM Index 20. Keyboard Connector: Provides for connecting any external keyboard with a standard PS2 connector. All alphanumeric field entries can be input from this keyboard. These inputs include Device ID, Model, Date, Operator Identification, frequencies, filenames, as well as comment-type entries. The analog knob and keypad input for these entries remains active. The F1 through F12 function keys can be used to access certain key and menu functions. A template is provided. Two versions of an actual-size template are provided in a foldout page at the end of this chapter in the event a replacement is needed. Index 21. Diskette Drive: Provides a drive for the 3.5-inch, high-density (1.44 MB) floppy diskette used to store selected front panel setups and calibrations. Refer to section 4-12, page 4-40, for disk storage information. 4-7 KEY-GROUPS FRONT PANEL OPERATION Index 22. Channels Keys: (Refer to section 4-6, page 4-24, for details and menu flow diagrams.) Channel Menu: Displays a menu that lets you select the format for the number of channels displayed. Ch 1: Makes Channel 1 the active channel. The active channel is the one acted on by the keys in the Display section. Only one channel can be active at any one time. Ch 2: Makes Channel 2 the active channel. Ch 3: Makes Channel 3 the active channel. Ch 4: Makes Channel 4 the active channel. Index 23. Measurement Keys: (Refer to section 4-5, page 4-21 for details and menu flow diagrams.) Setup Menu: Displays the first of several menus that let you select functions affecting measurements. Data Points: Displays a menu that lets you select between 1601, 801, 401, 201, 101, or 51 data points. Hold: Toggles the instrument in and out of the hold mode; or it triggers a sweep, depending on the function selected in menu SU4 (Appendix A). Domain: Displays the first in a series of menus that let you set the Time Domain display parameters. (This key is only active if your 37XXXD is equipped with the Time Domain option.) • If already in the Domain menus, pressing this key will return to the first menu in the sequence. • If in the Domain menus and another (non-time domain) menu is displayed by pushing a menu key, the last displayed domain menu redisplays when the Domain key is next pressed. Applications Menu: Displays the first in a series of menus that provide instructions for adapter removal and gain compression. 4-8 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION Index 24. KEY-GROUPS Data Entry Keys: Rotary Knob: Used to alter measurement values for the active parameter (Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, Offset, etc.). Keypad: Provides for entering values for the active parameter. The active parameter is the one to which the menu cursor is pointing. MHz/X1/ns/cm: Terminates a value entered on the keypad in the units shown—that is; megahertz for frequency, unity for dimensionless or angle entries, nanoseconds for time, or centimeters for length. GHz/103/ms/m: Terminates a value entered on the keypad in the units shown—that is; gigahertz for frequency, 1´103 power for dimensionless or angle entries, microseconds for time, or meters for length. kHz/10-3/ps/mm: Terminates a value entered on the keypad in the units shown—that is; kilohertz for frequency, 1´10-3 for dimensionless or angle entries, picoseconds for time, or millimeters for length. • Clear/Ret Loc: Local (Non-GPIB) Mode: (1) The key clears entries not yet terminated by one of the terminator keys above, which allows the previously displayed values to redisplay. Or (2) the key turns off the displayed menu and expands the data area to fill the entire screen, if you have not made any keypad entries needing termination. • GBIB Mode: The key returns the instrument to local (front panel) control, unless the controller has sent a local lockout message (LLO) over the bus. Index 25. Menu Keys: Arrow Keys: Moves the menu cursor up and down to select items appearing in the menu area of the LCD. Enter: Implements the menu selection chosen using the arrow keys. 37XXXD OM 4-9 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP 4-3 FRONT PANEL OPERATION The Calibration keys (Begin Cal and Apply Cal, below) are described below. The calibration menus are diagramed according to the method of calibration performed: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM or LRL/LRM. The menu sequencing is complex and looping and can be said to have two parts: setup and calibration. The setup flow for the four calibration methods is diagramed in Figures 4-3 through 4-6. Each setup flow chart leads to the main calibration sequence, which is diagramed in Figure 4-6. A full description of each menu is provided in Appendix A, where the menus are arranged in alphabetical order by call letter (C1, C2, C3, etc). CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP Begin Cal Key: This key displays a menu that lets you initiate the calibration sequence. That is, to begin a sequence of steps that corrects for errors inherent in a measurement setup. Apply Cal Key: This key displays a menu (below) that lets you turn on and off the error correction that may be applied to the displayed channel(s) using the currently valid error-correction indicator. Additionally, the menu lets you turn the tune mode on and off and change the number of forward sweeps between reverse sweeps (or reverse sweeps between forward sweeps). NOTE Pressing the Clear key while in a calibration setup or sequencing will let you abort the calibration and return to the first setup menu. Pressing the Setup Menu key will do the same, but without requesting confirmation. MENU CAL_APPLIED . Begin Cal Apply Cal - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement APPLY CALIBRATION FULL 12-TERM (S11, S21 X22, S12 APPLY ON (OFF) CALIBRATION TUNE MODE ON (OFF) NO. OF FWD (REV) SWEEPS BETWEEN REV (FWD) SWEEPS XXXXX SWEEPS (XXXXX (REMAINING) PRESSTO TURN ON/OFF PRESS TO TURN ON/OFF Figure 4-2. 4-10 Calibration Key Group Menu 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP Standard Calibration Setup Flow—Description 1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C11. 2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3 or C3D. 3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made. 4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3 and C3D are the initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM. 5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3 or C3D are, for the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3 or C3D depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL or MICROSTRIP. For the Standard Calibration, the WAVEGUIDE selection in Menu C11A is not used. 37XXXD OM 4-11 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION M E N U M E N U M E N U B e g in C a l C 1 1 B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N K E E P E X IS T IN G C A L D A T A R E P E A T P R E V IO U S C A L N E X T C A L S T E P T o M e n u S U 1 /S U 3 * T o C a l S e q ** C A L M E T H O D S T A N D A R D S O L T (S T A N D A R D ) S S S T (T R IP L E O F F S E T S H O R T ) T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E : X X X X X X X X M IC R O P < E T O M E N U C 5 A S E L E C T 1 P A T H 2 P O R T C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E F O R W A R D P A T H (S 1 1 , S 2 1 ) S E T R A N S F R E Q R C A L IB R A S E L E C T R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E P O R T 1 O N L Y (S 1 1 ) P O R T 2 O N L Y (S 2 2 ) C 5 B L E C M IS E S P T IO T S IO N O N S E N T Y P E 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X A X X X X X P P P T P T P T P T T S T S S S S S X X E N L A X X O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X A X X X X X P P P P P T P T S T S T S T S T S S N E X T C A L S T E P * Setup Menu SU1/SU3 – See Figure 4-6 ** Cal Seq (Calibration Sequence) – See Figure 4-5 *** Reflection Pairing Menu C13A or C13B – See Figure 4-4 C 3 W 1 -C O N N (M ) W 1 -C O N N (F ) Q S . D , E Q W A S X X X X X X G H z P O R T 1 C O N N X X X X X X X X A U T O IN C R O N (O F F ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P O R T 2 C O N N X X X X X X X X P R E V IO U S M E N U R E F L E C T IO N P A IR IN G X X X X X X S M A (M ) S M A (F ) L O A D T Y P E X X X X X X X X C C 5 D M E N U M E N U IN C L U D E IS O L A T IO N (S T A N D A R D ) C .W . (1 P O IN T ) C 2 C N F R (2 P O H A R M O N IC C A L F O R T IM E D O M A IN E S T O T IN O IN X X X F R E P T S Q N E X T C A L S T E P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C R E T E U E N C IE S 1 6 0 1 T S ) T IM E D O M A IN (H A R M O N IC ) S T A R T (S T E P ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z O V D U L P X X P D IS E Q T O IN G H z P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U C 2 D T S , P S R A T A O IN E L E N G T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * M O R E C 1 3 M E N U F IN IS H E D N E X T C A L S T E P M E N U C 1 2 A _ P 1 o r _ P 2 P O R T X S H O R T D E V IC E B R O A D B A N D F IX E D L O A D U S E R D E F IN E D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S L ID (M A Y R E Q B R O F IX E M E N U C 1 7 E N T E R R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E E N T E R T H E IN D U C T A N C E C O E F F IC IE N T S IN G L O A D A L S O U IR E A A D B A N D D L O A D ) T E R M 1 - L 0 -X X X X .X X e -1 2 T E R M 2 - L 1 -X X X X .X X e -2 4 T E R M 3 - L 2 -X X X X .X X e -3 3 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T E R M 4 - L 3 -X X X X .X X e -4 2 E N T E R T H E O F F S E T L E N G T H P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E M E N U T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * T o C a l S e q ** C 1 6 A O F F S E T L E N G T H X X .X X X X m m E N T E R M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S E N T E R T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S W ID T H O F S T R IP X X .X X X X m m O F F S E T L E N G T H X X X X X X m m T H IC K N E S S O F S U B S T R A T E X X X X .X X X X m m P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E A M E N U Z c X .X X X p 9 M E N U C 1 6 E F F E C T IV D IE L E C T R X .X X (R E C O M M 1 .0 2 5 M IL K IT U S E R D E F IN E D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E C 6 A B R O A D B A N D L O A D P A R A M E T E R S S U B S T R A T E D IE L E C T R IC X .X X S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP K IT T O U S E 1 5 M IL K IT S T A R T C A L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E C 6 S E L E C T T Y P E O F L O A D 1 0 M IL K IT T E S T S IG N A L S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U S P E C IA L (M ) S P E C IA L (F ) P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S X X X X X X X X X X X C L E A R A L L C 4 B S E L E C T P O R T X O P E N & S H O R T T H R O U G H L IN E IM P E D A N C E X .X X X X 9 T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S X X X X X X X X IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q IN S E R T P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E M E N U C 2 0 L O A D IM P E D A N C E X X X X X X F IL L R A N G E ( X X X E N T E R E D ) O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X .X X X X m m C P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T o M e n u C 1 3 A o r B *** R E F L E C T IO N P A R IN G S T O P F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T E R M 3 -C 2 + X X X .X X e - 3 6 R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E X X X .X X X 9 P O R T 2 O P E N /S H O R T N U M B E R O F P T S X X X P O IN T (S ) 2 .4 m m (M ) 2 .4 m m (F ) M O R E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P O R T 1 O P E N /S H O R T IN C R E M E N T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T E R M 2 -C 1 + X X X .X X e - 2 7 E N T E R T H E O F F S E T L E N G T H M IX E D (O P E N -S H O R T S H O R T -O P E N ) C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T R S S T A R T F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T N C (M ) T N C (F ) U S E R D E F IN E D M E N U C 3 D R T , T S , C T E " T E R M 1 -C 0 + X X .X X e - 1 5 U S E R D E F IN E D M IC R O S T R IP (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) D IS C R E T E F IL L IN P U IN C R T H E N "F IL L 7 /1 6 (M ) 7 /1 6 (F ) T E R M 4 -C 3 + X X X .X X e - 4 5 M A T C H E D (O P E N -O P E N S H O R T -S H O R T ) T o C a l S e q ** P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E N T E R T H E C A P A C IT A N C E C O E F F IC IE N T S S P E C IA L (M ) S P E C IA L (F ) S E L E C T R E F L E C T IO N P A IR IN G A N E X T C A L S T E P N O R M A L (1 6 0 1 P O IN T S M A X IM U M C A L IB R A T IO N R A N G E A B A N E S T A X X T O C .W . F R E Q X X .X X X X X X X X G H z S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N D A T A P O IN T S E X C L U D E IS O L A T IO N M E N U S IN G L E P O IN T C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N C 1 T Y P E N (M ) 7 5 W T Y P E N (F ) 7 5 W G P C -7 M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E C 2 B P O R T X O P E N D E V IC E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S M E N U C 1 2 _ P 1 o r _ P 2 T Y P E N (M ) T Y P E N (F ) G P C -3 .5 (M ) G P C -3 .5 (F ) S T A R T C A L U S IN G S T A R T W IL L R X X X D A X X X .X X T R U E S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E L E C T P O R T X C O N N E C T O R T Y P E V -C O N N (M ) V -C O N N (F ) T E S T S IG N A L S R E V E R S E P A T H (S 1 2 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R E R E F R X X S E L E C T P O R T X C O N N E C T O R T Y P E K -C O N N (M ) K -C O N N (F ) R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z B O T H P A T H S (S 2 1 , S 1 2 ) X F T E S T X .X M E N U C 4 A _ P 1 o r _ P 2 C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R IP S S E R > L E C T F O R W A R D P A T H (S 2 1 ) B O T H P O R T S (S 1 1 , S 2 2 ) 4-12 O F D A T A P O IN T S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R E V E R S E P A T H (S 2 2 , S 1 2 ) M E N U C 5 C S T R E N T S E N U M 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 M E N U C 4 _ P 1 o r _ P 2 C O A X (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) N E X T F R E Q . X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E L E C T U S E O F IS O L A T IO N IN C A L IB R A T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U X X X D A T A P O IN T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E N U M IN P U T A F R E Q , P R E S S < E N T E R > T O IN S E R T X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E S E T C E N T E R /S P A N M E N U F U L L 1 2 -T E R M P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E T S T A R T /S T O P N E X T C A L S T E P S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C O A X IA L C 5 T R A N S M IS S IO N F R E Q U E N C Y R E S P O N S E R A N G E C 2 A IN S E R T IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q U E N C IE S C E N T E R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S P A N X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z W A V E G U ID E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T 1 P A T H 2 P O R T C A L F R E Q M E N U R A N G E S T A R T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E T R M N E X T C A L S T E P M E N U C 2 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 L R L /L R M C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E M E N U C A L M E T H O D S S L T (D O U B L E O F F S E T S H O R T W IT H L O A D ) A U T O C A L C A L F R E Q C 1 1 A C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E C 2 _ C E N T E R IM P E D A N C E X X .X X X 9 IN D U C D A N C E X X .X X X p H IC P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E E N D E D 0 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E A o r B B Figure 4-3. Menu Sequencing, Standard Calibration 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP SSLT and SSST (Offset-Short) Calibration Setup Flow—Description 1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C13. 2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B. 3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made. 4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B are the initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM. 5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B are, for the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL, WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP. 37XXXD OM 4-13 FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP M E N U M E N U C 1 1 A M E N U T o M e n u S U 1 /S U 3 * C 1 1 B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N B e g in C a l T o C a l S e q ** C A L M E T H O D S T A N D A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E : X X X X X X X X L R L /L R M T R M P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T X X X D A T A P O IN T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E S T R E N T S E S T A R T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N U M W A V E G U ID E N E X T C A L S T E P M E N U S S S T (T R IP L E O F F S E T S H O R T ) M IC R O P < E T O O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X A X X X X X P P P T P T P T P T T S T S S S S S A S P A N X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E T S T A R T /S T O P N U M 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 A X X X X X P P P T P T P T P T T S 1 P A T H 2 P O R T S E L E C T U S E O F IS O L A T IO N IN C A L IB R A T IO N M E N U C 5 A IN C L U D E IS O L A T IO N (S T A N D A R D ) S E L E C T 1 P A T H 2 P O R T C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E T R A N S M IS S IO N F R E Q U E N C Y R E S P O N S E T S S S S S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U P O R T 1 O N L Y (S 1 1 ) P O R T 2 O N L Y (S 2 2 ) N O R M A L (1 6 0 1 P O IN T S M A X IM U M B O T H P O R T S (S 1 1 , S 2 2 ) M E N U C .W . (1 P O IN T ) C 2 C N F R (2 P O C A L IB R A T IO N R A N G E H A R M O N IC C A L F O R T IM E D O M A IN C 5 B L E C M IS E S P T IO C 1 T S IO N O N S E N T Y P E F O R W A R D P A T H (S 2 1 ) R E V E R S E P A T H (S 1 2 ) B O T H P A T H S (S 2 1 , S 1 2 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S T A R T (S T E P ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z U S IN G S T A R T W IL L R X X X D A X X X .X X T R U E S A B A N E S T A X X T O O V D U L P X X P E S T O T IN O IN X X X F R E D IS E Q T O IN C R E T E U E N C IE S 1 6 0 1 T S ) T IM E D O M A IN (H A R M O N IC ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U C 2 B S IN G L E P O IN T C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N P T S Q N E X T C A L S T E P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T G H z C .W . F R E Q X X .X X X X X X X X G H z N E X T C A L S T E P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E IN S E R T IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q U E N C IE S X X E N L A X X X F T E S T X .X R E R E F R X X Q S . D , E Q W A S X X X X X X G H z A U T O IN C R O N (O F F ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T U R N O N /O F F O R U S E R D E F IN E D L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3] + X X X X .X X X X L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3] + X X X X .X X X X L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3] + X X X X .X X X X E N T E R T H E O F F S E T L E N G T H E N T E R T H E O F F S E T L E N G T H E N T E R T H E O F F S E T L E N G T H P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E C W A V E G U ID E (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) M E N U C 1 6 S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP K IT T O U S E 1 0 M IL K IT 1 5 M IL K IT 2 5 M IL K IT U S E R D E F IN E D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * T o C a l S e q ** O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X X .X X X X m m F o r S S L T T 1 -S H O R T 2 , T 2 -S H O R T 1 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T F M E N U T H IC K N E S S O F S U B S T R A T E X X X X .X X X X m m R E M IX (S H S H O S H O Z c X .X X X p 9 S U B S T R A T E D IE L E C T R IC X .X X E M IX (S H S H O C 1 3 A L E C T E C T IO N IR IN G M A T C H E D (S H O R T 1 -S H O R T 1 , S H O R T 2 -S H O R T 2 ) C 1 6 A W ID T H O F S T R IP X X .X X X X m m E F F E C T IV D IE L E C T R X .X X (R E C O M M 1 .0 S E F L P A E D O R R R E P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E F o r S S S T IC M A (S H S H S H S E F L P A E D O R R R T C O O R O R C 1 3 B L E C T E C T IO N IR IN G T 1 -S H O R T 2 , T 2 -S H O R T 3 , T 3 -S H O R T 1 ) H E D R T 1 -S H O R T 1 , T 2 -S H O R T 2 , T 3 -S H O R T 3 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E N D E D 0 ) S E L E C T W A V E G U ID E K IT T O U S E K IT - C U T O F F F R E Q : X X .X X X X X X X X G H z F o r S S L T W A V E G U ID E P A R A M E T E R S X X X X X X R E F L E C T IO N P A IR IN G X X X X X X S H O R T 1 X X .X X X X m m S H O R T 2 X X .X X X X m m U S E IN S T A L L E D W A V E G U ID E K IT F U S E R D E F IN E D L O A D T Y P E X X X X X X X X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E D F o r S S S T T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * T o C a l S e q ** C 1 5 A C E N T E R W A V E G U ID E P A R A M E T E R S M E N U W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E W A V E K IT T -IN S T A L L E O F F S E T L E N G T H O F S H O R T 1 X .X X X X m m O F F S E T L E N G T H O F S H O R T 2 X .X X X X m m P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E L E G O D C T U ID E U S E K IT - ID E N T IF IE R : X X X X C U T O F F F R E Q : X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S H O R T 1 : + X X .X X X X m m E M E N U C 1 5 D S E L E C W A V E G U K IT T O U W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E X X X .X X X X X Q T ID E S E S H O R T 3 : + X X .X X X X m m U S E R D E F IN E D O F F S E T L E N G T H O F S H O R T 3 + X .X X X X m m P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C S L ID (M A Y R E Q B R O F IX E IN G L O A D A L S O U IR E A A D B A N D D L O A D ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T X X X X G H z O F F S E T L E N G T H O F S H O R T 1 + X .X X X X m m O F F S E T L E N G T H O F S H O R T 2 + X .X X X X m m S H O R T 2 : + X X .X X X X m m C B R O A D B A N D F IX E D L O A D C 1 5 C U S E IN S T A L L E D W A V E G U ID E K IT T E S T S IG N A L S S T A R T C A L M E N U C 6 S E L E C T T Y P E O F L O A D Figure 4-4. 4-14 M E N U C 1 5 -IN S T A L L E D C 3 B P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E M E N U M E N U C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S T H R O U G H L IN E IM P E D A N C E X .X X X X 9 P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E ID E N T IF IE R X X X X M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E O F F S E T L E N G T H X X X X X X m m E N T E R M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E D O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X X .X X X X m m M E N U U S E R D E F IN E D S T A R T C A L C 2 A N E X T F R E Q . X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2] + X X X X .X X X X S P E C IA L C (M ) S P E C IA L C (F ) T E S T S IG N A L S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T IN P U T A F R E Q , P R E S S < E N T E R > T O IN S E R T L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2] + X X X X .X X X X M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S X X X X X X X X X X X A L L M E N U L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2] + X X X X .X X X X S P E C IA L B (M ) S P E C IA L B (F ) E T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S F IN IS H E D N E X T C A L S T E P S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N D A T A P O IN T S S P E C IA L C (M ) S P E C IA L C (F ) S P E C IA L A (M ) S P E C IA L A (F ) L O A D T Y P E X X X X X X X X F IL L R A N G E ( X X X E N T E R E D ) S P E C IA L B (M ) S P E C IA L B (F ) L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ] + X X X X .X X X X O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X X .X X X X m m E N T E R T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S D L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ] + X X X X .X X X X M E N U C 1 4 A F F F S T E R U C E F F L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ] + X X X X .X X X X S E L E C T P O R T X O F F S E T S H O R T C O N N E C O T R T Y P E R E F L E C T IO N P A IR IN G X X X X X X O E N IN D C O P O R T X E T S H O R T 3 T H E T A N C E IC IE N T S L 0 [e -1 2 H ] + X X X X .X X X X C 3 C C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S F F S T E R U C E F F M E N U C 2 0 M E N U C 2 1 C L 0 [e -1 2 H ] + X X X X .X X X X P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E M E N U O E N IN D C O P O R T X E T S H O R T 2 T H E T A N C E IC IE N T S L 0 [e -1 2 H ] + X X X X .X X X X R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E X X X .X X X 9 T o C a l S e q ** P O R T 2 S H O R T S U S E R D E F IN E D S T O P F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z F F S T E R U C E F F P O R T X E T S H O R T 1 T H E T A N C E IC IE N T S S P E C IA L A (M ) S P E C IA L A (F ) E N T E R R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * P O R T 1 S H O R T S U S E R D E F IN E D S T A R T F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C L E A R S E L E C T R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T B M IC R O S T R IP (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) (M ) (F ) M E N U C 1 7 C 2 D R T , T S , C T E " O E N IN D C O P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E S T A R T C A L IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q IN S E R T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C 5 C T A O IN E L E N G D T E S T S IG N A L S N U M B E R O F P T S X X X P O IN T (S ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R E V E R S E P A T H (S 2 2 , S 1 2 ) E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E T S , P S R A F R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E N E X T C A L S T E P IN P U IN C R T H E N "F IL L W 1 -C O N N W 1 -C O N N M E N U C 2 1 B M E N U C 2 1 A M E N U C 1 4 S E L E C T P O R T X O F F S E T S H O R T C O N N E C O T R T Y P E T H R O U G H L IN E P A R A M E T E R S IN C R E M E N T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E X C L U D E IS O L A T IO N F O R W A R D P A T H (S 1 1 , S 2 1 ) R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y C 5 D C 3 A F IR M R A T IO N M E T R S C O N N N N (M ) L O A D T Y P E X X X X X X X X D IS C R E T E F IL L M E N U C O N C A L IB P A R A P O R T 1 W 1 -C O R E F L E C T IO N P A IR IN G X X X X X X X X O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X M E N U P O R T 2 C O N N W 1 -C O N N (M ) X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E M E N U F U L L 1 2 -T E R M M E N U C E N T E R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C 5 M E N U R A N G E N E X T C A L S T E P R IP S S E R > L E C T S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E S E T R A N S F R E Q R C A L IB R A R A N G E S E T C E N T E R /S P A N C O A X IA L C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E C A L F R E Q C 2 S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S S L T (D O U B L E O F F S E T S H O R T W IT H L O A D ) R E P E A T P R E V IO U S C A L A U T O C A L N E X T C A L S T E P C A L M E T H O D S O L T (S T A N D A R D ) K E E P E X IS T IN G C A L D A T A M E N U C O A X (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C 2 _ C E N T E R C A L F R E Q C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E M E N U C 6 A B R O A D B A N D L O A D P A R A M E T E R S IM P E D A N C E X X .X X X 9 IN D U C T A N C E X X .X X X p H P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E A Menu Sequencing, SSLT and SSST (Offset-Short) Calibration 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP LRL/LRM Calibration Setup Flow—Description 1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C15. 2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F. 3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made. 4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F are the initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM. 5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F are, for the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL, WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP. 37XXXD OM 4-15 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION M E N U M E N U C 1 1 M E N U K E E P E X IS T IN G C A L D A T A T o M e n u S U 1 /S U 3 * R E P E A T P R E V IO U S C A L T o C a l S e q ** A U T O C A L C A L M E T H O D S T A N D A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E : X X X X X X X X C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E C 1 1 A C A L F R E Q B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N B e g in C a l M E N U C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E C 2 S T A R T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N E X T C A L S T E P C A L M E T H O D S E T C E N T E R /S P A N S T A N D A R D (N O T U S E D F O R W A V E G U ID E ) X X X D A T A P O IN T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E O F F S E T S H O R T N U M L R L /L R M 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E C O A X IA L N E X T C A L S T E P W A V E G U ID E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP A X X X X X P P P P P T M E N U S E T S T A R T /S T O P 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 P T S T S T S T S T S S A O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X A X X X X X P P P T P T P T P T T S R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E T E S T S IG N A L S T S S S S S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E T o C a l S e q ** P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T N E X T C A L S T E P N U M B E R O F B A N D S U S E D C H A R A C T E R IZ E C A L D E V IC E S O N E B A N D D E V IC E 1 L IN E 1 (R E F ) X .X X X X m m R E F L E C T IO N T Y P E D E V IC E 2 L IN E /M A T C H X .X X X X m m /F U L L B A N D L E S S T H A N Z o B A N D S L O C A T IO N O F R E F E R E N C E P L A N E S T W O P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R S W IT C H E N D S O F L IN E 1 (R E F ) M E N U M E N U C 5 D S E L E C T U S E O F IS O L A T IO N IN C A L IB R A T IO N M E N U M E N U IN C L U D E IS O L A T IO N (S T A N D A R D ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U C 2 C C A L IB R A T IO N R A N G E C R E T E U E N C IE S 1 6 0 1 T S ) T IM E D O M A IN (H A R M O N IC ) H A R M O N IC C A L F O R T IM E D O M A IN P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C .W . (1 P O IN T ) D IS E Q T O IN P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U C 2 D D IS C R E T E F IL L IN P U IN C R T H E N "F IL L T S , P S R A T A O IN E L E N G R T , T S , C T E " M E N U C 2 A A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N U M B E R O F P T S X X X P O IN T (S ) X X E N L A X X U S IN G S T A R T W IL L R X X X D A X X X .X X T R U E S S T O P F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P T S Q N E X T C A L S T E P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T G H z F IL L R A N G E ( X X X E N T E R E D ) IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q IN S E R T C L E A R X F T E S T X .X R E R E F R X X Q S . D , E Q W A S X X X X X X G H z A U T O IN C R O N (O F F ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T U R N O N /O F F T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E X X X .X X X 9 P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E T o C a l S e q ** D E V IC E 3 L IN E /M A T C H X X .X X X X /H IG H B A N D F R E Q W H IC O F D A N D IS E X A F T E H T H E E V IC E D E V IC C H A N R U S E 2 E 3 G E D M E N U M E N U C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S C 1 5 B E N T E W A V E G C U T O F R E Q U E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S 1 5 M IL K IT 2 5 M IL K IT U S E R D E F IN E D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E W ID T H O F S T R IP X X .X X X X m m T H IC K N E S S O F S U B S T R A T E X X X X .X X X X m m Z c X .X X X p 9 S U B S T R A T E D IE L E C T R IC X .X X E F F E C T IV D IE L E C T R X .X X (R E C O M M 1 .0 P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E S T A R T C A L F IN IS H E D N E X T C A L S T E P M E N U C 1 6 1 0 M IL K IT R U ID E F F N C Y T o C a l S e q ** C 1 6 A E N T E R M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP K IT T O U S E C 3 F T E S T S IG N A L S M E N U B R E A K P O IN T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z W A V E G U ID E (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E Q O R A L L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E N T E R R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E D E V IC E 2 L IN E /M A T C H X X .X X X X /L O W B A N D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R S W IT C H IN P U T A F R E Q , P R E S S < E N T E R > T O IN S E R T IN C R E M E N T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T O T IN O IN X X X F R E M E N U C 1 7 L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E IN S E R T IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q U E N C IE S S T A R T (S T E P ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E D E V IC E 1 L IN E 1 (R E F ) X X .X X X X S T A R T C A L N E X T F R E Q . X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z O V D U L P X X P C 3 G T E S T S IG N A L S S T A R T F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z A B A N E S T A X X T O P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C H A R A C T E R IZ E C A L D E V IC E S M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S U S E R D E F IN E D N E X T C A L S T E P N O R M A L (1 6 0 1 P O IN T S M A X IM U M N F R (2 P O B C .W . F R E Q X X .X X X X X X X X G H z S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N D A T A P O IN T S E X C L U D E IS O L A T IO N M A T C H IN D U C T A N C E + X X X X .X X X X p H N E X T C A L S T E P C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S C 2 B S IN G L E P O IN T C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N C 1 M A T C H P A R A M E T E R S M A T C H IM P E D A N C E + X X X .X X X 9 M E N U C 1 8 B M IC R O S T R IP (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C G R E A T E R T H A N Z o C H A N G E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T B A N D S B R E F L E C T IO N O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X X .X X X m m P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T N E X T C A L S T E P A N E X T C A L S T E P N E X T C A L S T E P M ID D L E O F L IN E 1 (R E F ) S T A R T C A L C H A N G E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S C H A N G E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S O N E B A N D N E X T C A L S T E P T W O T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * M E N U C 1 9 M E N U C 1 8 A C H A N G E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S C 3 E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E N U M M E N U C 1 8 C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S S P A N X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X R A N G E C E N T E R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z R A N G E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C O A X (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C 2 _ C E N T E R C A L F R E Q E IC E N D E D 0 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E C B Figure 4-5. 4-16 Menu Sequencing, LRL/LRM Calibration 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP TRM Calibration Setup Flow—Description 1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C17. 2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I. 3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made. 4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I are the initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM. 5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I are, for the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3H, C3I, or C3J depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL, WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP. 37XXXD OM 4-17 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION M E N U M E N U C 1 1 M E N U C A L F R E Q B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N B e g in C a l K E E P E X IS T IN G C A L D A T A T o M e n u S U 1 /S U 3 * R E P E A T P R E V IO U S C A L T o C a l S e q ** A U T O C A L C A L M E T H O D S T A N D A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E : X X X X X X X X M E N U C 1 1 A C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E C 2 C A L F R E Q S T A R T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N E X T C A L S T E P C A L M E T H O D S E T C E N T E R /S P A N S T A N D A R D (N O T U S E D F O R W A V E G U ID E ) X X X D A T A P O IN T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E O F F S E T S H O R T N U M L R L /L R M 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 T R M C H A N G E C A L M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E T Y P E N E X T C A L S T E P C O A X IA L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T W A V E G U ID E A X X X X X P P P T P T P T P T T S M E N U C 3 H C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S T R M R E F L E C T O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X X .X X X X m m S P A N X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E T S T A R T /S T O P X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E N U M 1 6 8 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 5 1 O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X R A N G E C E N T E R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z R A N G E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C O A X (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C 2 _ C E N T E R T S S S S S T R M A O F D A T A P O IN T S 0 1 M 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A 1 M A M A X A X X X X X P P P T P T P T P T T S T R M M A T C H IM P E D A N C E D T E S T S IG N A L S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S T A R P R E T O P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T C S S O S R C A L < E N T E R > E L E C T H A N G E M IC R O S T R IP (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) M E N U M E N U C 5 D S E L E C T U S E O F IS O L A T IO N IN C A L IB R A T IO N M E N U M E N U IN C L U D E IS O L A T IO N (S T A N D A R D ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U C 1 C A L IB R A T IO N R A N G E C R E T E U E N C IE S 1 6 0 1 T S ) T IM E D O M A IN (H A R M O N IC ) H A R M O N IC C A L F O R T IM E D O M A IN P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C 2 D D IS C R E T E F IL L IN IN T H "F P U C R E N IL L T S , P S R A T A O IN E L E N G R T , T S , C T E " M E N U C 2 A IN P U T A F R E Q , P R E S S < E N T E R > T O IN S E R T T E S T S IG N A L S A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N U M B E R O F P T S X X X P O IN T (S ) X X E N L A X X U S IN G S T A R T W IL L R X X X D A X X X .X X T R U E S S T O P F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T S Q N E X T C A L S T E P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T G H z F IL L R A N G E ( X X X E N T E R E D ) IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q IN S E R T X F T E S T X .X R E R E F R X X Q S . D , E Q W A S X X X X X X G H z A U T O IN C R O N (O F F ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T A R P R E T O T C S S O S R C A L < E N T E R > E L E C T H A N G E W A V E G U ID E (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) M E N U D P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F T R M R E F L E C T O F F S E T L E N G T H + X X X .X X X X m m IN D U C T A N C E + X X X X .X X X X p H P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E M E N U M E N U C 1 6 S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP K IT T O U S E T o C a l S e q ** 1 0 M IL K IT 1 5 M IL K IT 2 5 M IL K IT U S E R D E F IN E D M E N U D T E S T S IG N A L S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C 1 5 B E N T E W A V E G C U T O F R E Q U E R U ID E F F N C Y T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * W ID T H O F S T R IP X X .X X X X m m T H IC K N E S S O F S U B S T R A T E X X X X .X X X X m m Z c X .X X X p 9 S U B S T R A T E D IE L E C T R IC X .X X E F F E C T IV D IE L E C T R X .X X (R E C O M M 1 .0 W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E Q C C 1 6 A E N T E R M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * T R M M A T C H IM P E D A N C E F IN IS H E D N E X T C A L S T E P IM P E D A N C E + X X X .X X X 9 C 3 I C O N F IR M C A L IB R A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S C L E A R A L L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T R M M A T C H P A R A M E T E R S D M IC R O S T R IP P A R A M E T E R S X X X X X X X X IN C R E M E N T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P M E N U C 6 B R E F L E C T T Y P E IN S E R T IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q U E N C IE S S T A R T (S T E P ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E S T O T IN O IN X X X F R E M IO N E R S T G T H m T R M M A T C H IM P E D A N C E N E X T F R E Q . X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z O V D U L P X X P P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E T o C a l S e q ** L E S S T H A N Z o S T A R T F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z A B A N E S T A X X T O R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E X X X .X X X 9 G R E A T E R T H A N Z o P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U T R M O F F + X X C T o M e n u C A L _ S U 2 * C 3 J C O N F IR A L IB R A T A R A M E T R E F L E C S E T L E N X .X X X X m T R M N E X T C A L S T E P C .W . (1 P O IN T ) D IS E Q T O IN B C .W . F R E Q X X .X X X X X X X X G H z N O R M A L (1 6 0 1 P O IN T S M A X IM U M N F R (2 P O C 2 C P S IN G L E P O IN T C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N D A T A P O IN T S E X C L U D E IS O L A T IO N C 2 B M E N U C 1 7 E N T E R R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E R E F E R E N C E IM P E D A N C E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP G R E A T E R T H A N Z o L E S S T H A N Z o T S S S S S N E X T C A L S T E P N E X T C A L S T E P R E F L E C T T Y P E E IC E N D E D 0 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E S T A R T C A L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E B T o C a l S e q ** Figure 4-6. 4-18 Menu Sequencing, TRM Calibration 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP From Standard, Offset-Short, and LRL/LRM Calibration Flowcharts MENU C7, C8, C9 Series CALIBRATION SEQUENCE CONNECT CALIBRATION DEVICE(S) CAL_MEAS_DEV MEASURING PORT 1: XXXXXXXXXXXX PORT 2: XXXXXXXXXXXX PRESS TO MEASURE DEVICE(S) MENU CAL_NEXT_DEV P R E S S FOR NE XT C AL S TE P OR P R ES S TO R E-ME A SU R E YES CAL DONE NO PRESS <1> FOR PORT 1 DEVICE GO TO NEXT CAL STEP PRESS <2> FOR PORT 2 DEVICE MENU CAL_COMPLETED CONNECT NEW CALIBRATION STANDARDS SERIES = REFLECTION DEVICES * C7 C8 SERIES = SLIDING LOAD C9 SERIES = TRANSMISSION DEVICES CALIBRATION SEQUENCE COMPLETED PRESS TO STORE CAL DATA ON DISK OR PRESS TO PROCEED Figure 4-6. 37XXXD OM Calibration Sequence Menus 4-19 SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY 4-4 FRONT PANEL OPERATION Pressing this key displays the first of a menu set (below) that lets you save or recall control panel setups and calibration data. Full menu descriptions can be found in the alphabetically ordered Appendix A under the menu’s call letters (SR1, SR2, SR3, etc). SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY M E N U . S A V E F R O N T P A N E L S E T U P T O IN T E R N A L M E M O R Y - C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t M E M O R Y 1 M E M O R Y 2 M E M O R Y 3 S a v e / R e c a ll M e n u M E N U S R 1 S A V E /R E C A L L F R O N T P A N E L A N D C A L D A T A S A V E R E C A L L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T F U N C T IO N S R 2 R E C A L L (O R S A V E ) F R O N T P A N E L S E T U P IN IN T E R N A L M E M O R Y F R O S E T C A L O N N T U P D A H A R P A N E L A N D T A D D IS K F R O S E T C A L O N N T U P D A F L O P A N E L A N D T A P P Y D IS K 4 M E M O R Y 4 M E M O R Y 5 M E M O R Y 6 M E M O R Y 7 M E M O R Y 8 M E M O R Y 9 M E M O R Y 1 0 P R E V IO U S R E C A L L F R O N T P A N E L S E T U P F R O M IN T E R N A L M E M O R Y . N A n a s te r is a m e m o ry th a t it h a s M E M O R Y M E N U A L T E R N A T IV E T E X T S R 3 o te k (* ) n e x t to lo c a tio n in d ic a te s s to re d d a ta . M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R U S E K E Y P A D E ith e r D is k S A V E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U T O C R E A T E N E W E F IL E 1 E 3 E 4 E 5 2 E E 6 E 7 E 8 M E N U D S K 3 S E L E C T F IL E O V E R W R IT E F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL R E C A L L P R E V IO U S D S K 2 S E L E C T F IL E T O R E A D F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL E 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E Figure 4-7 4-20 Save/Recall Key-Group Menus 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4-5 MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Measurement key-group are described below. Flowcharts of the Setup Key and Data Points key menus are shown in Figure 4-8. As described for the calibration menus, the flow is left-to-right and the double arrowhead lines indicate that the flow returns to the calling menu once a selection has been made. Full menu descriptions can be found in the alphabetically ordered Appendix A under the menu’s call letters (SU1, SU2, DF, etc). Setup Menu Key: Pressing this key calls Sweep Setup Menu SU1 or SU3. Depending upon which menu items you select, additional menus may also be called. Data Points Key: Pressing this key calls Menu SU9 or SU9A. Menu SU9 provides for data point selection. Menu SU9A is called if the C.W. MODE selection in Menu SU1 is on. Hold Key: If the instrument is sweeping, pressing this key results in an immediate halt of the sweep at the current data point. The LED on the button lights, indicating that the Hold Mode is active. If you restart the sweep after performing any recall-from-disk operations in the Hold Mode (sweep stopped at some data point), the sweep restarts from the beginning. The instrument may be taken out of the hold mode as follows: q By pressing the Default Program key. This causes the 37XXXD to revert to a predefined state q By pressing the Begin Cal key. This causes the 37XXXD to resume sweeping and begin the Calibration Menu sequence NOTE See the description for Menu SU4 for a discussion of the interaction between the Hold Mode and the selection of “Single Sweep” or “Restart Sweep.” Domain Key: This key function is fully described in paragraph 4-2 (page 4-8). Additionally, if the Time Domain option is installed, making a selection other than “Frequency Domain” lets you display measured data in the time domain. It also calls a further sequence of Time Domain Menus. Refer to section 9-2 for additional details. Appl: Pressing this key calls a menu that lets you select the following applications: Adapter Removal, Swept Frequency Gain Compression, or Swept Power Gain Compression. 37XXXD OM 4-21 MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION M E N U S U 1 _ C E N T E R S W E E P S E T U P D a ta P o in ts S e tu p M e n u H o ld D o m a in S T A R T X X .X X X X X X G H z S E T S T A R T /S T O P S T O P X X .X X X X X X G z X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E S E T C E N T E R /S P A N S e e S h e e t 2 S e e C h a p te r 9 M A R K E R S W E E P H O L D B U T T O N F U N C T IO N M A R K E R S W E E P T E S T S IG N A L S S U 3 S T O P S W E E P M A R K E R (n ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z M A X P T S 2 0 1 M A X P T S 1 0 1 M A X P T S 5 1 M A X P T S P O IN T S D R A W N IN C W X X X X P O IN T (S ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C .W F R E Q M A R K E R (n ) X X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z U S E K E Y P A D T O S E L E C T M A R K E R (1 -6 ) U S E K E Y P A D T O S E L E C T M A R K E R (1 -6 ) G H z M E N U M E N U S U 3 A R E T U R N T O S W E E P M O D E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S W E P T P O W E R F R E Q U E N C Y X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P S T A R T -X X .X X d B m M E N U S U 2 A T E S T S IG N A L S M E N U S U 2 , S U 2 a , C A L _ S U 2 P S T O P -X X .X X d B m M e n u S U 1 ( D e s tr o y s C a lib r a tio n ) M E N U S U 4 S E L E C T F U N C T IO N F O R H O L D B U T T O N S W E P T P O W E R S E T U P T E S T S IG N A L S T E S T S IG N A L S P O W E R S W E E P O N (O F F ) -X X .X X d B H O L D B U T T O N F U N C T IO N P O W E R C O N T R O L X X .X d B (0 T O -1 5 d B ) . P O R T 1 A T T N 2 0 d B (0 - 7 0 ) S W E P T P O W E R G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N P O R T 1 P O W E R -X X .X X d B m R E T U R N T O S W E P T F R E Q U E N C Y M O D E P O R T 2 A T T N X X X d B (0 -X 0 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F S O U R C E 1 P W R -X X .X X d B M S O U R C E 2 P W R -X X .X X d B M P O R T 1 A T T N 0 *1 0 d B (0 - 7 0 ) P O R T 2 A T T N 0 *1 0 d B (0 -0 0 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F C A L IB R A T E F O R F L A T N E S S (C A L E X IS T S ) T o M e n u G C 4 * E x it A p p lic a tio n a p p e a r s o n ly w h e n in th e S w e p t F r e q u e n c y G a in C o m p r e s s io n a p p lic a tio n H O L D /R E S T A R T S IN G L E S W A N D H O L D E E P B IA S /R F H O L D C O N D IT IO N S A R IN T L E C G E O N R F O N /A U T O N (O F F ) T E C T IO N A U L T R E S E T N S O N H O L D H B IA S /R F N E D O F F P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S U 8 o r C A L _ S U 8 C A L IB R A T E F O R F L A T P O R T P O W E R F IL L F O R W A R D D IR E C T IO N T , S , T " M E N U X X M E P O X X D F 2 IN S E R T IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q U E N C IE S S T A R T F R E Q X X .X X X X G H z IN C R E M E N T X .X X X X G H z B IA S D U T P R O D E F T U R W IT T U R S T P O S E A N N U M B E R O F P T S X X X P O IN T S S T O P F R E Q X X .X X X X F IL L R A N G E (X X X E N T E R E D ) X T E S T .X F R R F X X P O N L Y IN T S R E 1 P W E V E R N T S P R E V IO U S R M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E Q S E D R E Q W A S X G H z P R E V IO U S A L L P O A S U IN T P O I S T A R T F L A T P O W E R C A L IB R A T IO N N E X T F R E Q X X .X X X X G H z X X E N L A X X X P O W E R T A R G E T -X X X .X d B m IN P U T A F R E Q , P R E S S < E N T E R > T O IN S E R T A U T O IN C R O N X X .X X X X G H z IN D IV ID U A L F R E Q IN S E R T F IN IS H E D R E T U R N T O S W T U R N K N O B T O C H A N G E N U M B E R O F P O IN T S (O F F ) M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S O U R C E 2 P W R X X .X d B m E X IT A P P L IC A T IO N * H O L D /C O N T IN U E U T R , N L R M E N U D F 1 D IS C R E T E IN P IN C T H E "F IL C L E A R F L A T N E S S O N (O F F ) C O R R E C T IO N A T X X .X d B m 4-22 G H z M A X P T S 4 0 1 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F H O L D B U T T O N F U N C T IO N Figure 4-8. S U 6 F R E Q U E N C Y M A R K E R C .W . 8 0 1 S U 9 A T E S T S IG N A L S S IN G L E P O IN T M E A S U R E M E N T S E T U P C .W . F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X M E N U S U 5 S T A R T S W E E P M A R K E R (n ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F D IS C R E T E F IL L H O L D B U T T O N F U N C T IO N M E N U M E N U F R E Q U E N C Y M A R K E R S W E E P D IS C R E T E F IL L C .W . M O D E O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z M E N U N U M B E R O F D A T A P O IN T S 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S C .W . M O D E O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S T E P S IZ E A p p l S U 9 N U M B E R O F D A T A P O IN T S S P A N X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S W E E P S E T U P M e a s u re m e n t M E N U C E N T E R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z M E N U S U 1 T o M e n u S U 1 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T Measurement Key-Group Menus Menu Flow (Sheet 1 of 2) 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP F ro m S h e e t 1 M E N U M E N U A D A P T E R 1 2 -T X A N E X IS C U R A P P S A P P L IC A T IO N S A D A P T E R S W G A S W G A E P T IN C O E P T IN C O N x N E /O O /E E M B M E R S O M E M E E D G E L U A S A S /D C T IO U R U R E -E A L U E N C Y E S S IO N E R E S S IO N N E M E E M E M B E F IL E B D M E N U G C -D F 2 S W E P T P O W E R F R E Q U E N C IE S A G C 2 S W E P T P O W E R G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N P S T O P -X X .X X d B m S T E P S IZ E X .X X d B A T G A P O X X T E IN IN .X N U A T IO N C O M P R E S S IO N T (M A X R E F ) X d B N O M IN A L O F F S E T -X X .X X d B A D A P T E R E X T _ C A R 1 H E L P F IL E S E T F R E Q U E N C IE S C L F IN R E S W T P U E X X R F E A R IS H T U R E E P O W N C X X R E Y E R X X X X G H z Q N U M B E R A L L E D , N T O P O W E R S E T U P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U G C _ S U 2 S W E P T P O W E R G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N P O R T 1 A T T N 0 *1 0 d B (0 - 0 0 ) P O R T 2 A T T N 0 *1 0 d B (0 - 0 0 ) C A R 2 R E M O V A L R E T H F R (A D P O A D C E X T O M H A P T R T 2 A L E S A R E R ) F IL E O F T P O R T D D IS K O N R E T H F R (A D P O A D C E X T O M F A P T R T 2 A L E S L O E R ) F IL E O F T P O R T P P Y D IS K O N S U 8 A S h e e t 1 M E N U G C 1 S W E P T F R E Q U E N C Y G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N N O M IN A L O F F S E T -X X .X X d B F O R W A R D D IR E C T IO N O N L Y S T A R T L IN E A R P O W E R C A L IB R A T IO N F L A T N E S S C O R R E C T IO N A T -X X .X X d B m P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T C A L IB R A T E R E C E IV E R (N O C A L E X IS T S ) D E V IC E P A IR (1 + 2 ) P A IR _ 1 _ 3 .S 2 P D E V IC E P A IR (2 + 3 ) P A IR _ 2 _ 3 .S 2 P D E V IC E 1 L E N G T H + X X X .X X X m m + X X X .X X X p s D E V IC E 2 L E N G T H + X X X .X X X m m + X X X .X X X p s D E V IC E 3 L E N G T H + X X X .X X X m m + X X X .X X X p s S O L V E D E V IC E 1 S O L V E D E V IC E 2 S O L V E D E V IC E 3 8 M E N U F IL E O F T P O R T P P Y D IS K O N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T 3 E P O R T 1 /P O R T 2 4 E M E T H O D E M B E D /D E -E M B E D 5 E 6 E 7 E S W A P P O R T S O F S 2 P D A T A 8 P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E C A L IB R A T IN G F O R L IN E A R P O W E R P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T M E N U C O T H B E T E G C 3 G C _ R C V R C O N N E C T A U T A N D A P P L Y B IA S N N R O T W S T R E D IS N O A U A T N O A U E A E C U G E E P O U D P O P A S U N T H L IN E R T S E A N N E N R T O R E M Y T S W IT H F T H E E N T P A T H W A IT F O R O N E C O M P L E T E S W E E P B E F O R E S T O R IN G P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S T O R E C A L I B R A T E R E C E I V E R ( N O C A L E X IS T S ) P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T S 2 1 O P T IO N S (N O T S T O R E D ) G C 4 M U L T IP L E F R E Q U E N C Y G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N T E S T A U T T E X T D A T A T O H A R D D IS K S U 8 A S h e e t 1 T E X T D A T A T O F L O P P Y D IS K S W G A R E F R E P T IN C T U R E Q U P O O M N T E N W P R O C Y E R E S S IO N S W E P T M O D E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U G C 4 _ A B O R T S U L T S P L A Y T R M A IL Z T P E R F P S T A R R M A L IZ T O M A T C H P O W IN A H A T IS E D T O O R M A N T . A T IO N IC F O R E R S W N E C U L T L A Y V A L F O R E R T T S IN S H U E E A S W P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S T O R E M E N U P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T D E _ 9 A E M B E D /D E -E M B E D S 2 P F IL E S 2 P F IL E D A T A O F T H E N E T W O R K T H E C E M E N U D S K 2 F O R S 2 P F IL E S O N H D D R E A D S 2 P F IL E F R O M H A R D D IS K IS E E P R E A D S 2 P F IL E F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K M E N U D S K 2 F O R C A L F IL E S O N F D D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T W A IT F O R O N C O M P L E T E S W E E P B E F O R E S T O R IN G M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S T O R E M E N U M E R G 1 M E R G E C A L F IL E S A C A L F IL E S M U S T E X IS T IN T H E C U R R E N T D IR E C T O R Y M E R G E C A L F IL E S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E R G 2 M E N U M E R G 3 M E R G E C A L F IL E S M E R G E C A L F IL E S R E A D C A L F IL E 1 F R O M H A R D D IS K R E A D C A L F IL E 2 F R O M H A R D D IS K R E A D C A L F IL E 1 F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K R E A D C A L F IL E 2 F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T Figure 4-8. 37XXXD OM M E N U D S K 2 F O R C A L F IL E S O N F D D P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T H R O U G H A O W IN G O F C H E E P A U T P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T D IS P L A Y S 2 1 C O N R E S D IS P T H E S 2 1 P O W M U L T IP L E F R E Q U E N C Y G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N T E S T IN G R E A D C A L F IL E F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K G C _ N O R M W A IT F O R O N E C O M P L E T E S W E E P B E F O R E S T O R IN G G C _ S 2 1 _ O P T N O R M A L IZ E S 2 1 R E C E IV E R C A L IB R A T IO N IN C L C O M A R E M E A P R E V IO U S M E N U M E N U D S K 2 F O R C A L F IL E S O N H D D R E A D C A L F IL E F R O M H A R D D IS K M E N U M E N U D E _ 9 O R IG IN A L C A L F IL E T O A P P L Y N E T W O R K C O N N E C T A U T A N D A P P L Y B IA S E P T O D E Q U E N C Y S S IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N P O IN T (0 d B R E F ) X X .X X d B A L L T E S T T Y P E S G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N A M /P M O F F /O N A P P L Y N E T W O R K S 2 P F IL E D A T A T O C A L F IL E D A T A P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U E X IT A P P L IC A T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T U R N O N /O F F 2 E D E _ 8 E M B E D /D E -E M B E D S 2 P F IL E L IN E A R IT Y O N (O F F ) C O R R E C T IO N O R 7 E A L E S L O E R ) E M E N U E M B E D /D E -E M B E D S 2 P F IL E 1 L IN E A R P O W E R C A L IB R A T IO N C A L IB R A T E F O R L IN E A R IT Y (N O C A L E X IS T S ) S W Y M R E R E E A D C E Y T O M F A P T R T 1 E M E N U G C -S U 8 A _ A B O R T S W E P T P O W E R G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N T O N C E F M P 6 R E T H F R (A D P O F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E S U 1 S h e e t 1 R N U E IP L C O 5 E P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E M E N U R E T U F R E Q M U L T G A IN E P R E V IO U S S U 2 A S h e e t 1 L O C A T IO N O F C U R R E N T D IR E C T O R Y H A R D D IS K /F L O P P Y 4 F IL E O F T P O R T D D IS K O N N O R M A L IZ E S 2 1 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U N X N E A L E S A R E R ) N O R M A L IZ E S 2 1 (N O T S T O R E D ) M O R E N x N S O L U T IO N 3 A D C E Y T O M H A P T R T 1 B D S K 2 S E L E C T F IL E T O R E A D R E M O V A L R E T H F R (A D P O T E S T A U T P R E V IO U S M E N U M E N U 1 2 E A D A P T E R M E N U C A R 3 P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T M E N U G C -S U 8 A C A L IB R A T E F O R L IN E A R P O W E R C A L IB R A T E F O R F L A T N E S S (N O C A L E X IS T S ) E E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T IN P U T A F R E Q P R E S S < E N T E R > T O IN S E R T S W E P F R E Q X X X .X C L E A X X S E T F R E Q U E N C IE S M E N U F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL M E N U D S K 2 S E L E C T F IL E T O R E A D L S F O R S T H E IR E C T O R Y H E L P S P S T A R T -X X .X X d B m C A Y M U IN T N T D P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S e e C h a p te r 8 M E N U R E M O V A L M R E M O V E A D A P T E R N T N T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U E L E C T R IC A L L E N G T H O F T H E A D A P T E R + X X X .X X X X p s R E M O V A L F R E Q M P R P O W M P R E R D T S R E C A R 1 Measurement Key-Group Menus Menu Flow (Sheet 2 of 2) 4-23 CHANNELS KEY-GROUP 4-6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION The individual keys within the Channels key-group are described below: CHANNELS KEY-GROUP Ch 1-4 Keys: These keys (below) define the active channel. One (and only one) must always be active as indicated by the associated LED. Pressing a button makes the indicated channel active. If channel indicated by the key is already active, pressing the key has no effect. The active channel will be the channel acted upon by the S Params, Graph Type, Ref Plane, Trace Memory, Set Scale, Auto Scale, Markers/Limits and Domain keys. When in the single channel display mode, the active channel will be the one displayed. Channel Menu: Pressing this key calls menu CM (below). Here, you select the number of channels to be displayed. When in the single display mode, only the active channel will be displayed. Full menu description can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu’s call letters (CM). . - C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t 3 C h a n n e ls C h a n n e l M e n u C h C h C h 1 3 C h 2 4 M E N U C M S E L E C T D IS P L A Y M O D E S IN G L E C H A N N E L D U A L C H A N N E L S 1 & 3 O V E R L A Y D U A L C H A N N E L S 1 & 3 D U A L C H A N N E L S 2 & 4 O V E R L A Y D U A L C H A N N E L S 2 & 4 A L L F O U R C H A N N E L S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T Figure 4-9. 4-24 Channel Key-Group Menu 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4-7 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP DISPLAY KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Display key-group are described below. Menu flow diagrams are shown in Figure 4-10. Full menu description(s) for menu SP and all others mentioned below can be found in the Appendix A alphabetical listing under the menu’s call letters (SP, GT1, RD1, etc.). Graph Type Key: Pressing this key calls menu GT1 or GT2. These menus let you select the type of display to appear on the active channel for the selected S-Parameter. Set Scale Key: Pressing this key calls the appropriate scaling menu (SS1, SS2, SS3, etc.) depending upon the graph type being displayed on the active channel for the selected S-Parameter. Auto Scale Key: Pressing this key autoscales the trace or traces for the active channel. The new scaling values are then displayed on the menu (if it is displayed) and graticule. The resolution will be selected from the normal sequence of values you have available using the knob. When the active channel has a Real and Imaginary type display, the larger of the two signals will be used to autoscale both the real and imaginary graphs. Both graphs will be displayed at the same resolution. S Params Key: Pressing this key calls menu SP. This menu allows you to select the S-Parameter to be displayed by the active channel for the selected S-Parameter. Ref Plane Key: Pressing this key calls menu RD1. This menu lets you input the reference plane in time or distance. You do this by selecting the appropriate menu item. For a correct distance readout, the dielectric constant must be set to the correct value. This is accomplished by selecting SET DIELECTRIC, which calls menu RD2. 37XXXD OM 4-25 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION On menu RD1, selecting AUTO automatically adjusts the reference delay to unwind the phase for the active channel. The 37XXXD unwinds the phase as follows: q First, it sums the phase increments between each pair of measured data points, then it takes the average “Pdelta” over the entire set of points q Next, it corrects the phase data by applying the following formula: Pcorrect = Pmeasured - NxPdelta Where P = phase Assuming there are fewer than 360 degrees of phase rotation between each data point, the operation described above removes any net phase offset. The endpoints of the phase display then fall at the same phase value. Trace Memory Key: Pressing this key brings up menu NO1. This menu—which relates to the active channel—allows you to store data to memory, view memory, perform operations with the stored memory, and view both data and memory simultaneously. Four memories exist, one for each channel. This allows each channel to be stored and normalized independent of the other channels. Data from the trace memory may be stored on the disk or recalled from it. NOTE Trace memory will automatically be set to VIEW DATA (that is, turned off), if a sweep with a greater number of points is selected while operating on a stored trace. 4-26 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . - C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t M E N U S S 1 o r C A L _ S S 1 D is p la y -L O G S e t S c a le G ra p h T y p e S R e f P la n e P a ra m s M A G - -L O G R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X d B /D IV A u to S c a le R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X d B T ra c e M e m o ry R E F E R E N C E X S e e s h e e t 2 M E N U G T 1 S E L E C T G R A P H T Y P E S E L E C T G R A P H T Y P E L O G S M IT H C H A R T (A D M IT T A N C E ) M A G N IT U D E P H A S E L O G A N D L IN E A R L O G M A G N IT U D E P H A S E P O L A R L IN E A R M A G A N D P H A S E S W R E A L G R O U P D E L A Y IM A G IN A R Y P O W O U T R E A L A N D IM A G IN A R Y E R M O R E M A G - -L IN E A R V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E -P H A S E * R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X ° V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X ° V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L S L _ A L E S C A S 5 S S 5 IN G S L E > R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X p U V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X * V A L U E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L -IM A G IN A R Y - -L IN E A R R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /D IV R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /D IV R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X p U V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L * * R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X U IM P E D A N C E (A D M IT T A N C E ) -S M IT H C H A R T - V A L U E N O R M A L S M IT H (R E F L = 1 .0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F U L L S C A L E ) L IN E S E L E C T P O L A R C H A R T M O D E E X P A N D 1 0 d B (R E F L = O .3 1 6 2 2 7 8 F U L L S C A L E ) M A G N IT U D E , P H A S E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L E X P E N D 2 0 d B (R E F L = 0 .1 0 0 0 0 0 0 F U L L S C A L E ) * E X P A N D 3 0 d B (R E F L = 0 .0 3 1 6 2 2 8 F U L L S C A L E ) * S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > -L O G P O L A R - R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X d B /D IV R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X d B F IX E D R E F E R E N C E V A L U E L IN E S E L E C T P O L A R C H A R T M O D E M A G N IT U D E , P H A S E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L * C O M P R E S S 3 d B (R E F L = 1 .4 1 2 5 3 7 5 F U L L S C A L E ) * M E N U * M E N U S S 7 o r C A L _ S S 7 M E N U S S 1 3 o r C A L _ S S 1 3 S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > -S W D E L A Y - R - R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X fs V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X U V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L U R E C E N T E E P X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L * S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > -P O W -R E A L - R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X p U V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X p U R E F E R E N C E X L IN E R E F E R E N C E X E R O U T - R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U / R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /D IV R E S O L U T O N X X .X X X U /D IV V A L U E L IN E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L -IM A G IN A R Y * M E N U S S 1 4 M E N U S S 1 0 o r C A L _ S S 1 0 S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > -R E A L - R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U / R T E R S W X .X M E N U S S 1 2 o r C A L _ S S 1 2 S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T 0 S C A L E > R E S O L U T IO N X X X .X X X fs /D IV A P E X .X P O F X * X R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X U V A L U E R E F E R E N C E L IN E P C 1 S E L E C T P O L A R C H A R T M O D E M A G N IT U D E P H A S E M A G N IT U D E S W P P O S IT IO N S E T S W E E P P O S IT IO N B O U N D A R IE S S T A R T A N G L E X .X X S T O P A N G L E X .X X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X D E G /D IV R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X ° V A L U E R E F E R E N C E X L IN E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L * Figure 4-10. 37XXXD OM M E N U S S 6 o r C A L _ S S 6 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L * -G R O U P * A p p e a rs fo r C A L _ S S X X M e n u s P O L A R - F IX E D R E F E R E N C E * S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O C A L E > * P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L M E N U S S 3 _ Z o r _ Y o r C A L _ S S 3 _ Z o r _ Y S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > R E F E R E N C E L IN E X P H A S E S H IF T X .X X ° * M E N U S S 2 o r C A L _ S S 2 M E N U S S 1 1 o r C A L _ S S 1 1 R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X * /D IV P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X ° /D IV U -P H A S E - M A G - R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /D IV R E F E R E N C E X X X .X X X p U E N C A S C P R O S M O R E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L M A G S M IT H C H A R T (IM P E D A N C E ) L IN E P H A S E S H IF T X .X X ° P O L A R L IN E A R R R E F E R E N C E X S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /D IV R E F E R E N C E V A L U E X X X .X X X d B L IN E R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X ° /D IV G T 2 -L IN E A R M A G - R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X d B /D IV V A L U E -P H A S E M E N U S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > M o r S E T O R < A U T M E N U S S 8 o r C A L _ S S 8 M E N U S S 9 o r C A L _ S S 9 M E N U S S 4 o r C A L _ S S 4 Display Key-Group Menus (1 of 2) 4-27 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION D is p la y S e t S c a le G ra p h T y p e A u to S c a le R e f P la n e S P a ra m s T ra c e M e m o ry M E N U N O 1 T R A C E M E M O R Y F U N C T IO N S V IE W V IE W M E N U D S 1 1 , U S E R b 2 / 1 M E N U S 2 2 , R E V b 2 / a 2 R E F L M E N U M E N U R A T IO M E N U P R E S S < 1 > T O R E D E F IN E S E L E C T E D P A R A M E T E R (R a ) a 2 (R b ) A U T O A IR (1 .0 0 0 6 4 9 ) b 1 (T a ) b 2 (T b ) D IS T A N C E X X X .X X X m m P O L Y E T H Y L E N E (2 .2 6 ) T IM E X X X .X X X T E F L O N (2 .1 0 ) P D 1 S 2 1 / U S E R 1 U S C H C H P H P H A S E L O C K E R L A B E L A N G E R A T IO A N G E A S E L O C K C H A N G E P R E V IO U S a 1 (R a ) a 2 (R b ) b 1 (T a ) b 2 1 U S E R R A T IO b 2 / a 1 U S E R a 1 (U N IT Y ) D E N O M IN A T O R P A R A M E T E R D E F IN IT IO N L A B E L M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R S W IT C H S E T D IE L E C T R IC C O N S T A N T a 1 1 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R D 2 R D I S E T R E F E R E N C E P L A N E N U M E R A T O R 2 T R A N S P D 2 P A R A M E T E R T R A N S S 1 2 , R E V b 1 / a 2 M E M O R Y V IE W D A T A A N D M E M O R Y S P S E L E C T P A R A M E T E R S 2 1 , F W b 2 / a 1 D A T A S E T D IE L E C T R IC X X X M E N U (T b ) P R E V IO U S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P D 3 P A R A M E T E R D E F IN IT IO N (U N IT Y ) P H A S E M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T m s a 1 (R a ) a 2 (R b ) M E N U M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O T H E R X X X X .X X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T L O C K P R E V IO U S M IC R O P O R O U S T E F L O N (1 .6 9 ) G P 5 R N K N IN D IC A R A C T E U N C T IO S E L E C T T R A C E M A T H S T O R E D T O M E M O (S T O R E D (N O T S T O A T A R Y ) R E D ) D IS K O P E R A T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T N O 2 S E L E C T T R A C E M A T H A D D (+ ) S U B T R A C T M U L T IP L Y D IV ID E (-) (* ) (/) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U N O 3 T R A C E M E M O R Y D IS K O P E R A T IO N S C H A N N E L X S A V E M E M O R Y T O H A R D D IS K S A V E M E M O R Y T O F L O P P Y D IS K R E C A L L M E M O R Y F R O M H A R D D IS K M E N U D S K 2 o r D S K 3 R E C A L L M E M O R Y F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E L E C T L A B E --------A B C D E F G H IJ K N O P Q R S T U V W 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( ! # $ % & @ ^ _ '{ } B K S P C L R D O T U T O C H A F V IE W D A T A (X ) B Y M E M O R Y M E N U L L M X Y Z )~ N E R O B T E N O R P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T N U M B E R S M A Y A L S O B E S E L E C T E D U S IN G K E Y P A D Figure 4-10. 4-28 Display Key-Group Menus (2 of 2) 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4-8 ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Enhancement key-group are described below. Full menu description(s) for menu OPTNS and all others mentioned below can be found in the Appendix A alphabetical listing under the menu’s call letters (OPTNS, EM, CAL_BW, etc). ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP Option Menu Key: This key brings up the OPTNS menu. Depending on choices selected, this menu causes other menus to appear. A menu flow diagram for this key is shown in Figure 4-12 on the following page. Video IF BW Key: Pressing this produces a menu that lets you choose between four different IF bandwidths. This menu is shown below. Avg/Smooth Menu Key: Pressing this key brings up the EM Menu (Figure 4-11). When pressed during the calibration sequence, it brings up the EM Cal Menu instead. These menus are shown below. Trace Smooth and Average Keys: The Average and Trace Smooth keys set their respective functions on and off with the appropriate LED indicating when the function is selected. . - C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t E n h a n c e m e n t M E N U E M D A T A E N H A N C E M E N T A V E R A G IN G X X X X M E A S . A V E R A G IN G S W E E P -B Y -S W E E P R E S E T A V G C O U N T X X X X S W E E P (S ) O T E R W E P O A v g S m o o th M e n u V id e o IF B W M E N U T ra c e S m o o th T h is m e n u o n ly a p p e a r s d u r in g c a lib r a tio n . H IN G C E N T . E P IN T ( S ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < A V G /S M O O T H M E N U > T O R E S E T A V G C O U N T 37XXXD OM C A L _ E M D A T A E N H A N C E M E N T A V E R A G IN G X X X X M E A S . S A M P L E R S U S E D P E R S W E E P X S A M P L E R S Figure 4-11. A v e ra g e T Y P E P O IN T -B Y -P O IN T S M O X .X P O F S X X X O p tio n M e n u A V E R A G IN G T Y P E P O IN T -B Y -P O IN T S W E E P -B Y -S W E E P R E S E T A V G C O U N T X X X X S W E E P (S ) S A M P L E R S U S E D P E R S W E E P X S A M P L E R S R E S U M E C A L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < A V G /S M O O T H M E N U > T O R E S E T A V G C O U N T M E N U B W 1 o r C A L _ B W 1 S E L E C T V ID E O B A N D W ID T H M A X IM U M (1 0 k H z ) N O R M A L (1 k H z ) R E D U C E D (1 0 0 H z ) M IN IM U M (1 0 H z ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L * * A p p e a rs fo r M e n u C A L _ B W 1 Enhancement Key-Group Menus 4-29 ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION M E N U . C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t O U T P U T IN T E R N A L T E R N A L A S U R E M E N T L A Y .X X X s e c O N (O F F ) I.F . C A L IB R A T IO N A U T O M A T IC I.F . C A L E n h a n c e m e n t O p tio n M e n u A v g S m o o th M e n u M E N U V id e o B W T ra c e S m o o th A v e ra g e M E N U H /W C A L IB R A T IO N S (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) R F O N [O F F ] D U R IN G R E T R A C E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M U L T IP L E S O U R C E C O N T R O L A p p e a r s if O p tio n 1 2 in s ta lle d S E E N O T E 1 S C M E N U A C T IV E / IN A C T IV E S O U R C E L O C A T IO N IN T E R N A L / E X T E R N A L D E F IN E B A N D S S O U R C E C O N F IG G P IB A D D R E S S 4 M U L T IP L E S O U R C E M O D E O N (O F F ) O F F S O U R C E 2 D E F IN E A C T IV E / IN A C T IV E O N S O U R C E L O C A T IO N E X T E R N A L G P IB A D D R E S S 5 G P IB C O P R E V IO U P R E S T O O R T U N T R O S M E S < E N S E L E R N O L O N (O F F ) N U T E R > C T N /O F F O M 1 M U L T IP L E S O U R C E C O N T R O L A M E N U R C V 1 R E C E IV E R M O D E S T A N D A R D U S E R D E F IN E D S O U R C E C O N F IG S P U R N O R M P R E S T O R E A L S < S E D /O E L U C T IO N F F N T E R > E C T M A IN D /A V O L T A G E P O W E R O U T P U T V O L T A G E O F F S E T D /A V O L T A G E P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E V IO U S M E N U D G 3 M E N U M O R E M E N U H C A (F O U S A R L IB R E O D G 5 D W A R E R A T IO N S S E R V IC E N L Y ) R D L IB R E O W A R R A T S E R N L Y S T A R T S O U R C E F R E Q C A L IB R A T IO N L O 1 C A L IB R A T IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U L O 2 C A L IB R A T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S O U R C E A L C C A L IB R A T IO N S O U R C E L O C K T H R E S H O L D C A L IB R A T IO N D IS K O P E R A T IO N S M E N U H A C A (F O U S R D L IB R E O D G 5 _ A L C W A R R A T S E R N L Y E IO N V IC E ) S T A R T A L C F R E Q C A L IB R A T IO N M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E IO N V IC E ) P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U O M 2 D E F IN E B A N D S B A N D 1 E Q U A T IO N T O E D IT B A N D S T A R T F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S O U R C E 1 B A N D S T O P F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z B A N D F U N C T IO N S E D IT S Y S T E M E Q U A T IO N S S T O R E B A N D 1 B A N D S S T O R E D : ( X X X X X X ) C L E A R A L L D E F IN IT IO N S R C V 2 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T U S E R D E F IN E D R E C E IV E R M O D E S O U R C E L O C K T R A C K IN G S E T O N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U M E N U O T S 1 T E S T S E T C O N F IG U R A T IO N IN T E R N A L O T S 2 IN T E R N A L T E S T S E T W A R N IN G : C O N T IN U IN G W IL L IN V A L ID A T E C U R R E N T S E T U P A N D C A L IB R A T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U D G 4 _ IF B P S E A R C H O N (O F F ) F O R L O C K T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G F IR S T I.F . B A N D P A S S D V M C H A N N E L X X X X (U N U S E D C H A N N E L ) F IR S T I.F . B A N D P A S S L A T C H C O N T R O L M E N U A D D R E S S X X X (U N U S E D A D D R E S S ) T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G R E C E IV E R M O D E T R IG G E R R E A D O U T P U T : X T R IG G E R W R IT E IN P U T : X D G 4 _ R C V R L O 1 F R E Q U E N C Y X X .X X X X G H z H A R M O N IC N U M X X X S O U R C E L O C K P R E V IO U S M E N U T R A C K IN G P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E T O N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T A P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F S O U R C E 2 M E N U N O R M A L E Q U A T IO N S U M M A R Y C .W . R E V E R S E S E L E C T < R E V E R S E > S O U R C E L O C K P O L A R IT Y IF : O N (O F F ) M U L T IP L IE R X X D IV IS O R X X O F F S E T F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O M 1 A S O U R C E L O C K P O L A R IT Y R E C E IV E R P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T N O T E 2 : G O E S T O M E N U B B 2 IF O P T IO N 1 2 IS IN S T A L L E D (S E E C H A P T E R 1 5 ) O M 3 E D IT S Y S T E M E Q U A T IO N S D IS P L A Y E D F R E Q R A N G E S E T M U L T IP L E S O U R C E M O D E M E N U M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T R E C E IV E R M O D E S O U R C E L O C K P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T G P IB IN T E R F A C E H A C A (F O U S D G 4 A T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) F IN IS H E D , R E C O V E R F R O M T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G E X T E R N A L K E Y B O A R D M IL L IM E T E R W A V E N O T E 1 : G O E S T O M E N U M M W 4 IF 3 7 3 5 A T E S T S E T IS IN S T A L L E D (S E E C H A P T E R 1 4 ) S O U R C E L IN E A R IT Y V O L T A G E F IR S T I.F . B A N D P A S S C R T M O R E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S O U R C E P E R IP H E R A L T E S T S D G 5 _ S R C D D S P H A S E L O C K V O L T A G E P R E V IO U S M E N U E X T E R N A L A T O D IN P U T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O F F S E T P H A S E L O C K V O L T A G E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R IN T E R IN T E R F A C E M E N U D G 4 _ S O U R C E T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G S O U R C E L O 2 F R O N T P A N E L S O U R C E F R E Q U E N C Y C A L IB R A T IO N S O U R C E C O N F IG S O U R C E 1 G P IB C O N T R O L M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F M E N U L O 1 C L E A R L O G D /A V O L T A G E P R E V IO U S M E N U M A IN P H A S E L O C K V O L T A G E N O N -R A T IO E D P A R A M E T E R S S A V E L O G T O F L O P P Y D IS K P H A S E L O C K V O L T A G E D G 4 _ L O 2 T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G L O 2 D G 4 T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) P R IN T L O G R E S O L U T IO N 1 .0 0 0 V /D IV D G 1 M E N U D IS P L A Y L O G P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T a 2 V D G 2 S E R V IC E L O G V E R T IC A L S C A L IN G T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) T E S T S E T C O N F IG M E N U M E N U P H A S E L O C K a 1 P E R IP H E R A L T E S T S S e e N O T E 2 S O U R C E C O N F IG ** M E N U V E R T IC A L IN S T A L L E D O P T IO N S R E C E IV E R M O D E O r S E L E C T M O D E F O R O U T P U T R E A D S E R V IC E L O G D IA G N O S T IC S * O R P 2 S T A R T S E L F T E S T R E A R P A N E L O U T P U T B R O A D B A N D D E F IN IT IO N S T A R T /L O C K X .X X X X V D G 4 _ L O 1 T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G L O 1 H O R IZ O N T A L H O R IZ O N T A L O R P H A S E L O C K S C A L IN G D IA G N O S T IC S T R IG G E R S ** S E L E C T M O D E X X X X X X X X X X M E N U R E F E R E N C E V A L U E 0 .0 0 V /D IV O P T N S M IL L IM E T E R W A V E B A N D D E F IN IT IO N M E N U O N (O F F ) S T O P /L O C K X .X X X X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F O P T IO N S * O N (O F F ) T R IG G E R I.F . C A L IF O R P 1 R E A R P A N E L O U T P U T C O N T R O L M E A S U R E M E N T E X M E D E X X M E N U T R IG T R IG G E R S - M E N U L O 2 M E N U L O 1 H A R D W A R E C A L IB R A T IO N H A R D W A R E C A L IB R A T IO N (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) S T A R T L O 2 C A L IB R A T IO N S T A R T L O 1 C A L IB R A T IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T H E D U T C O N T A IN S M U L T I-C O N V E R S IO N S T A G E S , A N D M E N U S L T H A R D W A R E C A L IB R A T IO N (F O R S E R V IC E U S E O N L Y ) S T A R T S L T C A L IB R A T IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T H F IN IS N O E P A L O P R M H O P O A N O IS S O E Q R M D E U R U A A L F IN C E T IO IF IS S T IS P A S G O U H E A O S N D A S E O F T H E U T P U T I.F . S IT E O F L O U R R E A R C E T H E S S U IT IV V IC P E D 1 N O L A R IT Y B Y T H E A N D 2 S C E 1 T E R 2 F R I.F . M E D E P O E V E F R E Q T H A N E Q , T O B E L A R IT Y R S A P R E S S < E N T E R > T O C O N T IN U E P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T Figure 4-12. 4-30 Enhancement Key-Group (Options Menu Key) 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4-9 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP HARD COPY KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Hard Copy key-group are described below. Full descriptions for menus can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu’s call letters (PM1, PM2, PM3, etc.) Menu Key: Pressing this key brings up menu PM1. This menu allows you to define what will happen every time you press the Start Print key. A menu flow diagram is shown in Figure 4-13. Start Print Key: Pressing this key starts outputting the measured data as defined by the setup defined by the selected MENU key. Stop Print Key: Pressing this key can result in any of the following actions if the printer is selected: q If the printer is active, the key aborts the printing and sends a form feed command to the printer. Aborting the printing clears the print buffer q If the printer is not active and another form of output is active, pressing this key aborts printing, but does not send a form feed to the printer Plotting Functions: The 37XXXD can plot an image of either the entire screen or subsets of it. Plots can be either full size or they can be quarter size and located in any of the four quadrants. You can select different pens for plotting different parts of the screen. You cannot, however, plot tabular data. 37XXXD OM 4-31 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION M E N U M E N U P M 2 D A T A O U T P U T H E A D E R S . - C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t M O D E L O N (O F F ) X X X X X X X X X X X X D E V IC E ID O N (O F F ) X X X X X X X X X X X X M M E N U L O G O O N F IL E D S K 3 N E W F IL E 1 IL T R O N L O G O D IS K P R IN T E R F O R P L O T T E R P R E V IO U S M E N U F IL E O P T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T U T O C H A F O N (O F F ) O N (O F F ) P R E S S < E T O T U R N O O R P R E S S T O C H A N T E R > N /O F F M E N U M E N U P M 5 P R IN T O P T IO N S P R IN T E R T Y P E T H IN K J E T D E S K J E T T A B U L A R D A T A F R O M H A R D D IS K T O P R IN T E R T A B U L A R D A T A F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K T O P R IN T E R P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E P S O N P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E M E N U D IS K D A T A P M 4 A F IL E O P T IO N S D E S T IN A T IO N H A R D D IS K F L O P P Y D IS K F O R T E S 2 T A B I P M E N U M A T X T B U L A R T M A P F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL D A T A P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T U S E < S T A R T P R IN T > T O C A P T U R E D A T A M E N U T O L IM IT S P L O T M E N U M E N U O N (O F F ) M E N U O N (O F F ) D A T A T R A C E S O N (O F F ) A N D M A R K E R S F U L L S IZ E P L 3 -Q U A R T E R S IZ E P L O T S - S E L E C T P E N C O L O R S P L O T F O R M A T D A T A n P L O T S IZ E P E N C O L O R S P L O T O R IE N T A T IO N P O R T R A IT L A N D S C A P E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F P L 2 P L O T S IZ E O N (O F F ) G R A T IC U L E E 4 E 5 E 6 E E 7 8 M E N U P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E O N (O F F ) M E N U 1 2 3 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T F U L L P L O T H E A D E R E E E P R E V IO U S P L 1 P L O T O P T IO N S O B J E C T S D S K 2 S E L E C T F IL E T O R E A D H P G L 8 P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E O B T E R O R N P M 4 7 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T L M X Y Z )~ N E H A R D C O P Y D IS K O P E R A T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T 6 R N K N IN D IC A R A C T E U N C T IO L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O T U R N O N /O F F T A B U L A R 5 A B E -H IJ K V W 7 8 9 ( ^ _ '{ } D O N U M B E R S M A Y A L S O B E S E L E C T E D U S IN G K E Y P A D < 1 > N G E G R A P H IC A L D A T A 4 G P 5 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E T U P L O G O F O R M A T O F P R IN T E R O U T P U T 3 F IL E F IL E O P E R A T IO N S H E A D E R S W L O G O P R IN T O P T IO N S D IS K 2 F IL E F IL E & D A T E T Y P E P L O T O P T IO N S S E L E C T F IL E T O O V E R W R IT E F IL E (O F F ) IN S T A L L U S E R F R O M F L O P P Y F O R O P E R A T O R O N (O F F ) X X X X X X X X X X X X X C O M M E N T O U T P U T O P T IO N S O R F IL E F IL E U S E R 2 A D IS K O P E R A T IO N S P lo t F IL E D IS K S E T U P O R C R E A T E P M 1 O U T P U T D E V IC E P R IN T E R P L O T T E R S E T U P P r in t M E N U S to p P r in t P M S E T U P L O G O S ta rt P r in t E N U L O G O S T A N D A R D H a rd C o p y M e n u S E L E C T L ------A B C D E F G N O P Q R S T U 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 !# $ % & @ B K S P C L R n P E N D A T A T R A C E O V E R L A Y P E N G R A T IC U L E n n P E N M A R K E R S A N D L IM IT S P E N H E A D E R n P E N P E N S P E E D 1 0 0 P E R C E N T O F M A X IM U M P R E V IO U S U P P E R L E F T U P P E R R IG H T L O W E R L E F T L O W E R R IG H T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U P M 3 T A B U L A R P R IN T O U T O U T P U T F O R M A T M A R K E R D A T A S W E E P D A T A O N (O F F ) (O N ) (O F F ) H E A D E R A N D O N (O F F ) P A G E B R E A K S X P R T P U P O IN X X P IN T T P T E O IN P T R IN V E R T (S H E A D E R P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E O N (O F F ) S C R E E N A R E A T O O U T P U T F U L L S C R E E N G R A P H O N L Y P R IN T D E N S IT Y X X O U 1 X P M 3 A G R A P H IC A L P R IN T E R O U T P U T F O R M A T (S ) T S Y ) B IT M A P F IL E O U T P U T O P T IO N S T R U E C O L O R C O L O R O N W H IT E B A C K G R O U N D P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F T U R N K N O B T O C H A N G E N U M B E R O F P O IN T S W B L A C K O N H IT E B A C K G R O U N D P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T U R N O N /O F F O R M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T Figure 4-13. 4-32 Hard Copy Key-Group Menus 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4-10 SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the System State key-group are described below. The menu flow for the Utility Menu key is shown in Figure 4-14 on page 4-35. Full descriptions for menus can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix 1) under the menu’s call letters (U1, U2, U3, etc.) Default Program Key: Pressing this key brings up the default menu. If pressed again, it recalls the factory selected default values for the control panel controls. The values are defined in Table 4-2 on the following page. Pressing this key then the 1 key resets front panel key states and internal memories 1 through 4. Pressing this key then the 0 key resets front panel key states, internal memories 1 through 10, and certain hardware settings. NOTE Use of this key will destroy control panel and calibration setup data, unless they have been saved to disk. Utility Menu Key: Pressing this key calls menu U1. This menu accesses subordinate menus to perform system, disk, and system utilities. The only functions performed directly from the U1 Menu are “Blank Frequency Information.” and “Data Drawing.” 37XXXD OM 4-33 SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION Table 4-2. Function 4-34 Default Settings Default Setting Instrument State Measurement Setup Menu Displayed Measurement Maximum sweep range of source and test set Source Power: Model Dependent Resolution: Normal (401 points) Channel Quad (four-channel) display Channel 1 active Display Channel 1: S11, 1:1 Smith Chart Channel 2: S12, Log Magnitude and Phase Channel 3: S21, Log Magnitude and Phase Channel 4: S22, 1:1 Smith Chart Scale: 10 dB/Division or 90/Division Offset: 0.000dB or 0.00 degree Reference Position: Midscale Electrical Delay: 0.00 seconds Dielectric: Air (1.000649) Normalization: Off Normalization Sets: Erased Enhancement Video IF Bandwidth: Normal Averaging: Off Smoothing: Off Calibration Correction: Off and Calibration erased Connector: K Connector Load: Broadband Markers/Limits Markers On/Off: All off Markers Enabled/Disabled: All enabled Marker Frequency: All set to the start-sweep frequency (or start -time distance) D Reference: Off Limits: All set to reference position value (all off all enabled) System State GPIB Addresses: Unchanged Frequency Blanking : Disengaged, Error(s): GPIB SRQ errors are cleared, Service Log errors are not cleared Measurement: Restarted 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP M E N U . C h a n n e ls E T H E R N E T A D D R E S S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C G P 7 G P IB A D D R E S S E S E n h a n c e m e n t M E N U U 2 D IS P L A Y IN S T R U M E N T S T A T E P A R A M E T E R S S ta te D e fa u lt P r o g r a m 6 U tility M e n u M E N U D E D IC A T E D G P IB IN T E R F A C E S Y S T E M E X T E R N A L S O U R C E 1 4 C A L IB R A T IO N E X T E R N A L S O U R C E 2 O P E R A T IN G U 1 5 S E L E C T U T IL IT Y F U N C T IO N O P T IO N S G P IB N E T W N E X T P A R A M P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E T U P D IS P L A Y IN S T R U M E N T P A R A M E T E R S D IS K M E N U C A L C O M P O N E N T U T IL IT IE S IN S T A L L K IT IN F O R M A T IO N F R O M F L O P P Y C O N F IG D A T A O N (O F F ) D R A W IN G D A T E /T IM E W D F L T IN U IN G E R A S E E N T P A N D R A T IO N P R E S S < D E F A U L T P R O G R A M > T O C O N F IR M P R E S S < C L E A R > T O A B O R T D IS K D IS P L A Y W A V E G U ID E IN F O R M A T IO N A R N IN G C O N T W IL L C U R R S E T U C A L IB D IS P L A O P E T E C O N N D IS P L A Y C O A X IA L O F F S E T S H O R T IN F O R M A T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F D E F A U L T P R O G R A M S E L E C T E D M E N U D IS P L A Y C O A X IA L O P E N & S H O R T IN F O R M A T IO N B L A N K F R E Q IN F O R M A T IO N M E N U IN G T C L T 0 .0 S O T A B U L A R D A T A T E X T D A T A H A N G E G A T E W A Y .0 .0 N E E X IS T S S 2 P D A T A B IT M A P D A T A D E F A L U T G A T E W A Y X X X .X X X .X X X .X X X D IS P L A Y D IR E C T O R Y M E N U U 6 S E T D A T E /T IM E Y E A R X X X X M O X D A X N T H X X Y P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T Y IN S T A N & S H O S T P O R E C T O R T IN F O K - C O N N (M ) K - C O N N (F ) V - C O N N (M ) V - C O N N (F ) W 1 - C O N N (M ) W 1 - C O N N (F ) S M A (M ) S M A (F ) G P C - 3 .5 (M ) G P C - 3 .5 (F ) G P C - 7 N E X T C O N N E C T O R M O R E C O N N E C T O R S P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M IN U T E X X D O N E , (S E T D A T E /T IM E ) P R E V IO U S M E N U (D A T E /T IM E N O T S E T ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E 2 E M E N U 3 E 4 E 6 E 8 M E N U P R E V IO U S P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E T Y P E O F F IL E S T O C O P Y M E N U U 4 A Y IN S T A N & S H O S T P O R E C T O R L L E D R T T IN F O D IS P L A O P E T E C O N N U 4 B Y IN S T A N & S H O S T P O R E C T O R L L E D R T T IN F O W 1 - C O N N (M ) W 1 - C O N N (F ) T Y P E N (M ) T Y P E N (F ) S P E C IA L A (M ) S P E C IA L A (F ) T Y P E N (M ) 7 5 9 T Y P E N (F ) 7 5 9 S P E C IA L B (M ) S P E C IA L B (F ) 7 /1 6 (M ) 7 /1 6 (F ) S P E C IA L C (M ) S P E C IA L C (F ) T N C (M ) T N C (F ) N E X T C O N N E C T O R 2 .4 m m 2 .4 m m P R E V IO U S M E N U (M ) (F ) S P E C IA L (M ) S P E C IA L (F ) N E X T C O N N E C T O R M O R E C O N N E C T O R T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U D S K 8 D S K 9 S E L E C T F IL E T O C O P Y S 2 P D A T A F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL B IT M A P D A T A P R E V IO U S F R O N T P A N E L S E T U P A N D C A L D A T A T R A C E D A T A T A B U L A R D A T A T E X T D A T A H P G L D A T A A L L T Y P E S (* .* ) P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T E E 1 2 E 4 E E 6 E S T A R T A U T O C A L C H A R A C T E R IZ A T IO N H A R D D IS K U T IL IT IE S M E N U A U T O C A L U T IL IT IE S A U T O C A L C H A R A C T E R IZ A T IO N S A V E T O H A R D D IS K S A V E T O F L O P P Y D IS K D IS K M E N U C O L O R D IS K U 5 A S C H E M E S R E S E T C O L O R S N E W 8 C O L O R S C L A S S IC C O L O R S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T IN V E R S E C O L O R S P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E V IO U S P A G E B R IL L IA N T C O L O R S M E N U S O F T C O L O R S P R E S S < 2 > F O R N E X T P A G E M E N U U 5 C O L O R C O N F IG U R A T IO N D A T A X X X X O V X X M E X X E R L A Y D A T A X X M O R Y D A T A X X M A R K E R S X X X X & L IM IT S A N M E X X M E (T X N O T A N U T X X N U H IT L E S X X X T IO N E X T T O S E S C M O C O S T C U S L E C T H E M D IF Y N F IG O R E T O M IZ E A C O L O E A N D /O T H E C O , T H E N A S R E S E R R L O R T S T O R E C O L O R C O N F IG A S R E S E T (D E F A U L T ) C O L O R S P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T G R A T IC U L E X X X X & E A D E R S & IN F O ) B A C K G R O U N D X X X X R E S E T C O L O R S C O L O R S C H E M E S Figure 4-14. 37XXXD OM P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R S W IT C H A C A L _ U T IL S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T 7 E IS O L A T IO N X X X X F O R M A T F L O P P Y D IS K R E C A L L F R O M F L O P P Y 5 A V G S T H R U X X X X C O P Y F IL E S T 0 H A R D D IS K R E C A L L F R O M H A R D 3 E O F L O A D X X X X D E L E T E F IL E S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U N U M B E R R E F L E C T IO N X X X X D IS P L A Y D IR E C T O R Y 7 E A V E R A G IN G P O R T C O N F IG L = 1 , R = 2 / R = 1 , L -2 D S K 1 -F D F L O P P Y D IS K U T IL IT IE S 5 E C O M M A N D L IN E D IS P L A O P E T E C O N N S W IT C H X X X X 1 C O M M A N D L IN E P R E V IO U S M E N U H O U R X X E F O R M A T H A R D D IS K M E N U L L E D R T F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL F IL A C A L _ C H A R A U T O C A L C H A R A C T E R IZ A T IO N S E L E C T F IL E T O D E L E T E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U M E N U D S K 7 A L L T Y P E S (* .* ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T U 4 M E N U P R E V IO U S H P G L D A T A C O P Y F IL E S T 0 F L O P P Y D IS K F R E Q U E N C Y C O U N T E R 7 U 3 C A L IB R A T IO N C O M P O N E N T U T IL IT IE S A U T O C A L U T IL IT IE S S E T H A R D D IS K U T IL IT IE S R N N O F A U O M L E S F L O P P Y D IS K U T IL IT IE S U T IL IT IE S C O L O R P A G E D S K 1 -H D W A D O D E F R U N D E L E T E F IL E S P L O T T E R P O W E R M E T E R 2 3 C H A N N E L S 3 & 4 A D D R E S S E S O R K 8 C H A N N E L S 1 & 2 T R A C E D A T A S U B N E T M A S K X X X .X X X .X X X .X X X M E N U M O R E C A L IB R A T IO N F R O N T P A N E L S E T U P A N D C A L D A T A IP A D D R E S S X X X .X X X .X X X .X X X A D D R E S S D S K 6 T Y P E O F F IL E S T O D E L E T E M e a s u re m e n t IE E E 4 8 8 .2 G P IB IN T E R F A C E S y s te m M E N U N E T W O R K S E T U P - M E N U D is p la y G P 8 System State Key-Group Menus 4-35 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP 4-11 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION The individual keys within the Markers/Limits key-group are described below. The menu flow for the Marker Menu key is shown in Figure 4-15 on the following page. Full descriptions for these menus can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu’s call letters (M1, M2, M3, etc.) Marker Menu Key: Pressing the Marker Menu key calls Menu M1. This menu lets you toggle markers on and off and set marker frequencies, times, or distances. Readout Marker Key: Pressing this key calls different menus, depending upon front panel key selections, as described below: q It calls menu M1 if there are no markers available within the selected frequency range q It calls menu M3 if no Delta ref marker has been selected q It calls menu M4 if the DReference mode is off and the selected marker is in the current sweep range (or time/distance) q It calls menu M5 if the DReference mode and marker are both on and the DReference marker is in the selected sweep range (or time/distance) q It calls menu M6 if ACTIVE MARKER ON ALL CHANNELS has been previously selected in menu M9 q It calls menu M7 if SEARCH has been previously selected in menu M9 q It calls menu M8 if FILTER PARAMETER has been previously selected in menu M9 Limits Key: Pressing this key calls the appropriate Limit menu based on the graph type selected using the Graph Type key and menu. Marker Readout Functions: This menu choice, which appears on several marker menus, provides for several filter-related measurements. It also allows for performing a marker-value search and for reading the active marker value on all displayed channels. NOTE Full menu descriptions can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu call letters (LF1, LF2, LF3, etc.) Limit Frequency Readout Function: The 37XXXD has a Limit-Frequency Readout function. This function allows frequency values to be read at a specified level (such as the 3 dB point) on the data trace. This function is available for all rectilinear graph-types. The graph-type and their menu call letters are listed below: q q q q q q 4-36 Log Magnitude, Menu LF1 Phase, Menu LF2 Group Delay, Menu LF3 Linear Magnitude, Menu LF4 SWR, Menu LF5 Real, Menu LF6 q q q q q Imaginary, Menu LF7 Power Out, Menu LF8 Real, Menu LF6 Imaginary, Menu LF7 Power Out, Menu LF8 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . - C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t M a r k e r s /L im its S e e S h e e t 2 L im its M a rk e r M e n u N O T E M S E T M E N U M N O T E R e a d o u t M a rk e r M A R K E R 1 O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X X G H z O N M A R K E R 3 O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R 1 X X .X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R 2 X X .X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R 3 X X .X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R 4 X X .X X X X X X M A R K E R 4 O N (O F F ) M A R K E R 5 O N (O F F ) M A R K E R 5 X X .X X X X X X M A R K E R 6 O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R 6 X X .X X X X X X D IS P L A Y O N M A R K E R S R E F M O D E (O F F ) O N M E N U M S E L E C T R E F M A R K E R M A R K E R 1 X X .X X X X X X M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S M A R K E R 3 X X .X X X X X X M A R K E R 4 X X .X X X X X X R K .X X .X X X .X E R X X X d X X M A R K E R M A R K E R M 3 X X .X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B X X .X X D E G G H z G H z 4 G H z G H z (1 X X .X X X .X (X X X 5 X X .X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B X X .X X D E G 6 X X .X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B X X .X X D E G - 2 X X .X 5 C H X X -X X -X X C H C H X X -X X -X X - 5 X X .X X X X .X X ( X X X .X - 6 X X .X X X X .X X ( X X X .X C H F IL T E R B A N D -X X X R E X X .X X V A L U E A T R E F E R E N C E -X X X .X X X d B S E A R C H S E A R C H S E C H C H C H C H M A X M IN A R C H 1 : -X 2 : -X 3 : -X 4 : -X M R X .X X .X X .X X .X T R A C K IN G T H d B R K E R X X X G H z Q X X X X .X X X K R X X X X X X X X V A L U E S d B d B d B d B O N (O F F ) S H A P E F A C T O R X X X .X X X T R A C K IN G F IL T E R O N S E T U P M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T U R N O N /O F F ) X W ID .X X X F M A X X X L O S S A T R E F -X X X .X X X d B L E F T R IG H T X X .X X X X X X X X G H z 4 - S 2 2 M 8 P A R A M E T E R S C E N T E R F R E Q X X .X X X X X X X X G H z R E F E R E N C E M A X IM U M V A L U E R E F M A R K E R 0 d B S 1 2 X X X X X X G H z X X d B X ° 7 M E N U M 7 V A L U E -X X X .X X X d B P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T X X X G H z d B X D E G ) ( 1 M E N U S 1 1 X X X X X X G H z X X d B X ° T O T O N O T E S E A R C H 2 - S 2 1 3 .X X X .X X .X 6 M 6 M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S ) X 1 .X X X .X X .X M A R K E R M A R K E R X X X G H z d B X D E G ) X N O T E M E N U - 3 ) X X X X G H z X X d B .X X D E G ) ) 5 M A R K E R X A L L D IS P L A Y E D C H A N N E L S ) X X X G H z X d B X ° ) ( 1 M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S G H z M E R 1 X X X X G H z E R T O M A X E R T O M IN ( 1 - 4 X X .X X X X .X X ( X X X .X X X .X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B X X .X X D E G (O F F ) E N U R K .X X R K R K (1 X X .X X X .X (X X X M A X M IN X X .X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B X X .X X D E G G H z M A X X M A M A X X G H z B D E G T O T O N O T E 4 + X X X .X X X X m m R E F + X X X .X X X d B O F F S E T + X X X .X X ° O F F S E T 1 2 P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T S E L E C T R E F M A R K E R (O F F ) M 4 + X X X .X X X X m m R E F + X X X .X X X d B O F F S E T + X X X .X X ° O F F S E T M A X X X X X X R E F M O D E IS O N 2 N O T E 3 M E N U M 3 S E L E C T R E A D O U T M A R K E R 1 R E F G H z N O T E M E N U 1 A R K E R S M A R K E R 2 X X .X X X X X X 2 O R X X X G H z d B X D E G ) M 8 A S E T U P B A N D W ID T H L O S S V A L U E X X X .X X X D B M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U F IL T E R R E F E R E N C E M A X IM U M V A L U E R E F M A R K E R 0 D B M E N U S H A P E F A C T O R H IG H X X X .X X X d B M 9 M A R K E R R E A D O U T F U N C T IO N S M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L 1 : M e n u M 1 a p p e a r s if n o m a r k e r s a r e a v a ila b le w ith in th e s e le c te d fr e q u e n c y r a n g e . N O T E 2 : M e n u M 3 a p p e a r s w h e n M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 a n d ( 1 ) If th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e is o ff a n d th e r e is n o s e le c te d m a r k e r o r if th e s e le c te d m a r k e r is n o t w ith in th e s w e e p r a n g e . ( 2 ) If th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e is o n a n d th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m a r k e r is n o t w ith in th e s w e e p r a n g e o r if n o D e lta R e fe r e n c e m a r k e r is s e le c te d . N O T E 3 : N O T E 4 : e n u M 5 a p p e a r s w h e n M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M a n d m a r k e r a r e b o th o n a n d th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m a r k e r is w ith in th e s e le c te d s w e e p r a n g e . N O T E 5 : M M e n u M 3 , M 4 , o r M 5 A C T IV E M A R K E R S O N A L L C H A N N E L S M e n u M 6 S E A R C H M e n u M 7 F IL T E R P A R A M E T E R S M e n u M 8 M A R K E R N O T E M O D E C O N T IN U O U S N O T E 6 : N O T E 7 : M e n u M 4 a p p e a r s w h e n M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u a n d if th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e is o ff a n d th e s e le c te d m a r k e r is w ith in th e c u r r e n t s w e e p r a n g e . M M M e n u e n u M e n u M M 6 7 8 a p p e a r s w h e n A C T IV E a p p e a r s w h e n S E A R C H a p p e a r s w h e n F IL T E R M A R K E R S h a s b e e n P A R A M O N A L L C H A N N E L S p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d E T E R S h a s b e e n in M h a s b e e n e n u M e n u p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d M M 9 in M 9 a n d e n u M if th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e L O W X X X .X X X d B R E A D O U T S Q O F F S H A P E F A C T O R O F F P R E V IO U S M E N U 9 . 9 . p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 . D IS C R E T E S E T M A R K E R S M e n u M 1 Figure 4-15. 37XXXD OM Markers Menus (1 of 3) 4-37 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Limits Limits Limits Limits MENU L2 MENU L1 MENU L3 SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS - LOG MAG - DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS A READOUT LIMIT B TEST LIMITS - PHASE - PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF XXX.XXX ˚ - LOG MAG - UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB SINGLE LIMITS - SMITH CHART- UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB MENU L4 SINGLE LIMITS - LINEAR POLAR- UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS READOUT LIMIT B TEST LIMITS PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX ˚ A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS TEST LIMITS B SEGMENTED LIMITS C PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF READOUT LIMIT DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS TEST LIMITS B SEGMENTED LIMITS C PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Limits Markers/Limits Limits MENU L5 Limits MENU L6 SINGLE LIMITS Markers/Limits Limits MENU L7 MENU L8 SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS - PHASE - - LOG POLAR - - GROUP DELAY- - LINEAR MAG - UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF XXX.XXX ˚ UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX fs UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX ˚ LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX fs LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU READOUT LIMIT A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS TEST LIMITS TEST LIMITS B SEGMENTED LIMITS C READOUT LIMIT DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS B PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Figure 4-15. 4-38 A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS READOUT LIMIT A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS TEST LIMITS B TEST LIMITS B SEGMENTED LIMITS C SEGMENTED LIMITS C PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Markers/Limits Key-Group Menus (2 of 3) 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION Markers/Limits MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP Limits MENU L9 SINGLE LIMITS UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF XXX.XXX ˚ A READOUT LIMIT A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS READOUT LIMIT B C B SEGMENTED LIMITS C PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF A B C SEGMENTED LIMITS PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF C MENU LFX READOUT LIMIT INTERCEPTS MENU LSX SEGMENTED LIMITS - XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Markers/Limits UPPER LIMIT (REF) XXX.XXX xx Limits LOWER LIMIT XXX.XXX xx L IMIT DIFFERENCE ∆ (UPPER-LOWER) INTERCEPTS AT LOWER LIMIT MENU L13 SINGLE LIMITS X.XXXX GHz X.XXXX GHz X.XXXX GHz X.XXXX GHz X.XXXX GHz X.XXXX GHz - SWRUPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU Markers/Limits A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) DEFINE UPPER LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) DEFINE LOWER SEGMENTED OFFSETS HORIZONTAL XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz VERTICAL XX.XXX dB CLEAR ALL DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS TEST LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS Limits TEST LIMITS B SEGMENTED LIMITS C PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU MENU LD1 DEFINE UPPER SEGS SEGMENT ON (OFF) X TEST LIMITS READOUT LIMIT - IMAGINARY - TEST LIMITS PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF MENU L14 PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF SINGLE LIMITS STOP POSITION A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS B A READOUT LIMIT DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS TEST LIMITS B SEGMENTED LIMITS C PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF HORIZONTAL XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz VERTICAL XX.XXX dB BEGIN NEXT ATTACH NEXT CLEAR SEGMENT PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF MENU LD1 DEFINE LOWER SEGS SEGMENT ON (OFF) X START POSITION HORIZONTAL XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz VERTICAL XX.XXX dB VERTICAL XX.XXX dB LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU TEST LIMITS VERTICAL XX.XXX dB HORIZONTAL XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU READOUT LIMIT START POSITION HORIZONTAL XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz STOP POSITION - POWER OUT-- A READOUT LIMIT A DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS SEGMENTED LIMITS READOUT LIMIT LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU TEST LIMITS LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX ˚ UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS - PHASE - - REAL - - IMAGINARY- UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX dB A SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS - REAL - READOUT LIMIT MENU L12 MENU L11 MENU L10 - LINEAR MAG - Limits Limits Limits SINGLE LIMITS Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Markers/Limits BEGIN NEXT ATTACH NEXT CLEAR SEGMENT PREVIOUS MENU B MENU LTST TEST LIMITS LIMIT ON (OFF) TESTING BEEP FOR ON (OFF) TEST FAILURE LIMIT TEST TTL FAIL CONDITION TTL LOW/TTL HIGH CHANNEL 1 TEST PASS (FAIL) CHANNEL 2 TEST PASS (FAIL) CHANNEL 3 TEST PASS (FAIL) CHANNEL 4 TEST PASS (FAIL) PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Figure 4-15. 37XXXD OM Markers/Limits Key-Group Menus (3 of 3) 4-39 DISK STORAGE INTERFACE 4-12 DISK STORAGE INTERFACE Disk Format Disk Files FRONT PANEL OPERATION The 37XXXD has two internally mounted disk drives: an 80 MB hard disk and a 3.5 inch floppy. The format, files, and directory are compatible with MS-DOS, Version 5.0 and above. Floppy diskettes are MS-DOS compatible and have a 1.44 MByte capacity. You may find any of the following file-types on the 37XXXD disk: q Program Files: These are binary files used to load the operating program. They are provided on the hard drive, and a backup copy is provided on floppy diskettes. Application programs cannot read them q Calibration Data Files: These are binary files used to store and retrieve calibration and other data. Application programs cannot read them. File size depends on calibration type q Text Files: These are tab-delimited ASCII files with the “txt” file extension. They can be read by application programs q S2P Parameter Data Files: These files define a 2-port file format that includes all four S parameters. They can be read by applications programs. They have a file extension of “S2P” NOTE File names must begin with alphabetical, not numeric characters. q Tabular Measurement Data Files: These are ASCII files used to store actual measurement data. They can be read by applications programs. File size depends on selected options q Trace Memory Files: These are binary files used to store trace data. Applications programs cannot read them. You use them to perform trace math operations on data q Cal Kit File for Coax or Waveguide q AutoCal Characterization file 4-40 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION Disk File Output Device DISK STORAGE INTERFACE You can select the output drive destination for the disk file as either the hard disk (C:) or the floppy drive (A:). The format of the disk file is also selected. The default condition is text disk file to the hard disk. You may then proceed with normal measurements. The Start Print key may then be used at the instant you intend to capture the data. Menu DISK 3 then appears and allows the creation of a new file or to overwrite an existing file in the current directory. Note that the output for text and S2P files have predefined formats. Tabular data format is configured via the Print Options (Menu PM5) or Tabular Data (Menu PM3). Bitmap format is configured via the Print Options (Menu PM5), Options (Menu PM5, or Graphical Data (Menu PM3A). HPGL format is configured via the Plot Options (Menu PL1). You are able to direct hard copy output to the HDD or floppy, in addition to the printer and plotter. In addition to text (*.txt), S2P (*.s2p), and tabular (*.dat) files, bitmaps (*.bmp) and HPGL (*.hgl) files are offered to satisfy your desktop publishing requirements. Specifically, color bitmaps and graphic language files can be imported into Windows applications, such as Cap3700. Formatting a Data File Disk You may format additional diskettes to hold calibration, tabular measurement, and trace-memory data files. Do this using the FORMAT DISK selection on the “Floppy Disk Utilities” menu. Using this selection will format the target disk and overwrite any existing data it contains. A format hard disk utility is provided in case of hard disk failure. Using this feature overwrites your system software and requires booting from the backup floppy diskettes. Copying Data Files From Disk to Disk Recovering From Disk Write/Read Errors Use the COPY FILES selection on the “Floppy Disk Utilities” and “Hard Disk Utilities” menus to copy data files between hard and floppy diskettes. If you experience a read or write error during a disk operation, you should: q Verify first character of filename is alphabetical and not numeric q Verify that the diskette has been properly formatted q Verify that the diskette is high density (1.44 MB). Low density (720 KB) diskettes are not supported q Verify that the write-protect tab on the disk is engaged q Retry the disk operation Repeated disk errors may indicate a defective diskette and format. 37XXXD OM 4-41 COMMAND LINE 4-13 COMMAND LINE FRONT PANEL OPERATION The Command Line menu choice provides several DOS compatible commands. Command line options are: q CREATE DIRECTORY (MD) q LIST DIRECTORY (DIR) q CHANGE DIRECTORY (CD) q DELETE FILES (DEL) q REMOVE DIRECTORY (RD) q COPY FILES (COPY) These options are NOT case sensitive. Create Directory This command is performed by: MD c:\pat-h\dir_name or MD a:\path\dir_name. The c: is used to refer to the hard disk, and a: is for the floppy disk. List Directory This command is performed by “DIR” command. This may be used as DIR c:\path or without any path specified. The syntax is: DIR c:\path or DIR a:\path. If c: or a: is not used, the default is the current hard disk directory. You may use wild cards as follows: q DIR *.cal q DIR filter?.cal Change Directory This command is performed by CD c:\path or CD a:\path. Both of these options do not require a device name. The device name is referred to by c: or a:. If you choose to do CD dir_name, this implies the current Hard disk directory. Delete Files This command is used to delete a particular file(s) in a directory, or delete the entire contents of the directory by using the wild card option. The command line is: q DEL filename q DEL c:\path\filename q DEL a:\path\* 4-42 37XXXD OM FRONT PANEL OPERATION Remove Directory COMMAND LINE This command is used to delete a particular directory. The command is only valid when the entire directory is empty: q RD c:\path\directory q RD a:\path\directory Copy Files This command is performed by the command line COPY source: destination: COPY c:\path\name a:\path\name Any combination of the drive is allowed, except for the same directory, and the same name. Once the COMMAND LINE is selected, the system will prompt a one line dialog box to allow command entry. The dialog box remains open only for the user interface. Conventions Be aware of the following conventions when using the Command Line choice. There is a limitation of five sublevel directories in the 37XXXD models: q Any directory change will force the system to use that as the current directory for other menus that deal with the file system. For example, if the user changes the directory to c:\lib\junk, then any activity for saving hard copy or calibration files will be saved on the junk directory. q The default directory is the root directory. q GPIB support: GPIB mnemonics will provide functionality for each of the above operations. The format is shown below: Function 37XXXD OM Path List directory DIR “[device:/][” Make directory MD “[device:/][path]name” Change directory CD “[device:/][path]napath]nameme” Delete File(s) DEL “[device:/][path]name” Remove directory RD “[device:/][path]name” Copy files COPY “[device:][/path/][source]” “[device:][/path/][destination]” 4-43 COMMAND LINE FRONT PANEL OPERATION Vector Network Analyzer Clear/Ret Loc _____ Esc Start Print ________ Print Screen, F12 Hold _____________ Pause Default Program Avg/Smooth Menu Channel Menu Utility Menu Options Menu Ctrl Trace Smooth Average Video IF BW Alt Marker Menu Readout Marker Limits Shift Ch 1 Ch 2 F1 F2 Command Line S Params Save Recall CAL from HDD Save CAL to HDD Recall NRM from HDD Save NRM to HDD Set Scale Ref Plane Trace Memory Auto Ref Plane Store Data to Memory F8 Recall Ch 3 Ch 4 Graph Type Auto Scale F3 F4 F5 F6 Command Line Recall Copyright (c) 1994-98 by Anritsu Company Alt Default Program Avg/Smooth Menu Trace Smooth Average Video IF BW Shift Channel Menu Marker Menu Readout Marker Limits Ctrl Vector Network Analyzer Clear/Ret Loc _____ Esc Start Print ________ Print Screen, F12 Hold _____________ Pause Ch 1 Utility Menu Options Menu S Params Save S2P to Floppy Save S2P to HDD Save DAT to Floppy Save DAT to HDD Hardcopy Menu Shift Domain Applications Begin Cal Stop Print Setup Menu Data Points Apply Cal Start Print F9 F10 F11 F12 Save Recall CAL from HDD Save CAL to HDD Recall NRM from HDD Save NRM to HDD Save TXT to Floppy Save TXT to HDD Save S2P to Floppy Save S2P to HDD Save DAT to Floppy Save DAT to HDD Hardcopy Menu Alt Set Scale Ref Plane Trace Memory Domain Applications Begin Cal Stop Print Shift Store Data to Memory Setup Menu Data Points Apply Cal Start Print F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Graph Type Auto Scale Auto Ref Plane F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Copyright (c) 1994-98 by Anritsu Company F1 F7 Alt Save TXT to Floppy Save TXT to HDD Ctrl Ctrl Actual-Size Keyboard Templates for 37XXXD 4-44 37XXXD OM Chapter 5 Error and Status Table of Contents 5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-2 ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Chapter 5 Error and Status Messages 5-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter lists, describes, and provides corrective action for the error messages that point to problems that the operator can correct. Any error messages that appear on the display but do not appear in this chapter will require action by a qualified service representative. 5-2 ERROR MESSAGES Error messages are provided in Tables 5-1 and 5-2. Table 5-1. General Error Messages (1 of 3) Error Message Description Corrective Action ATTENUATOR UNAVAILABLE Option 6 Port 2 Test Step Attenuator is not installed. Install Option 6 Step Attenuator, BANDS MUST SEQUENCE Frequency bands in Multiple Source mode must sequence in a 1-2-3-4-5 order. None, no skipping is allowed. BOTH LIMITS MUST BE ON Must have both limits activated. Turn on limits. DIFFERENT H/W SETUP. RECALL ABORTED Source is different from the recalled setup. Reconfigure system to duplicate the hardware setup that was used to store the saved data. DIFFERENT S/W VERSION, RECALL ABORTED Saved state not compatible with hardware or software version. Load compatible software (S/W) version and retry. DISCRETE FREQS LOST Change in frequency caused discrete fill frequencies to be lost. None. DISPERSIVE MEDIUM, ONLY TIME USED Distance does not apply for dispersive media. None. FREQUENCIES HAVE REACHED UPPER LIMIT Frequencies being defined in Multiple Source mode have reached upper limits of Sources. Redefine frequencies to not exceed limits of Sources. ILLEGAL IN C.W. MODE Attempted to readout limit frequency. None, no limit lines are permitted in CW mode. ILLEGAL IN TIME DOMAIN Attempted to readout limit frequency None. LOGO FILE NOT FOUND Attempted to read a non-existent logo file from disk. Create user-defined logo using application on external controller. MEAS DATA NOT AVAILABLE FOR STORAGE Measurement data is not available for storage on floppy or hard disk. None. MEMORY LOCATION CORRUPTED Requested memory location is corrupted. None. If problem reoccurs after storing a new setup, contact Anritsu Customer Service. NO BANDS ARE STORED No frequency bands have been defined and stored. Need to define and store frequency bands to turn on Multiple Source mode. 37XXXD OM 5-3 ERROR MESSAGES Table 5-1. ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES General Error Messages (2 of 3) Error Message Description Corrective Action NO STORED MEMORY DATA No data is stored in floppy or hard disk memory. None. OPTION NOT INSTALLED Selected an option that is not installed. None. OUT OF CAL RANGE Entered values out of the selected calibration range. Change calibration range or re-enter values that are within the current range. OUT OF H/W RANGE Entered value is out of the instrument’s hardware range. Re-enter values that are within range. OUT OF RANGE Entered value is out of range. Re-enter values that are within range. OUT OF RANGE, 10 PERCENT MIN Entered value is out of the instrument’s range by greater than 10 percent. Re-enter frequency or power value. OUT OF RANGE, 20 PERCENT MAX Entered smoothing or group delay value exceeds the range by greater than 20 percent. Re-enter values that are within range, 0 to 20%. OUT OF SWEEP RANGE Entered a frequency that is out of the instrument sweep range. Re-enter frequency. OUT OF WINDOW RANGE Attempted to set marker outside start to stop range. Redefine marker to be within frequency start/stop range. POWER OUT OF CALIBRATED RANGE Power range has been changed to be outside the range of the active linearity calibration. Linearity calibration is turned off. Perform linearity calibration over new power range. POWER RESTORED TO CAL RANGE Power range is outside of the linearity calibration range when the calibration was turned on. The power range is changed to the calibration range. If new power range is desired, perform new linearity calibration over new power range. RECEIVER OUT OF RANGE BY EQUATION Equation defined in Multiple Source mode places receiver frequency out of range when attempting to store band. Redefine frequency. SOURCE 1 OUT OF RANGE BY EQUATION Equation defined in Multiple Source mode places Source 1 frequency out of range when attempting to store band. Redefine frequency. SOURCE 2 OUT OF RANGE BY EQUATION Equation defined in Multiple Source mode places Source 2 frequency out of range when attempting to store band. Redefine frequency. STANDARD CAL NOT VALID FOR WAVEGUIDE Cannot use waveguide when calibrating with the standard method. Use the Offset Short method with waveguide. START F FOLLOWS PREVIOUS STOP F Start frequency of current band immediately follows stop frequency of previous band. Cannot be modified. None. START GREATER THAN STOP Entered start frequency is greater than the stop frequency. Re-enter frequency values such that the start frequency is lower than the stop frequency. START MUST BE LESS THAN STOP Entered start frequency is greater than the stop frequency. Re-enter frequency values such that the start frequency is lower than the stop frequency. STEP IS TOO LARGE Entered discrete fill step extends the stop fill out of range. Re-enter so that step is within range. 5-4 37XXXD OM ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES Table 5-1. ERROR MESSAGES General Error Messages (3 of 3) Error Message Description Corrective Action STOP IS OVER RANGE Entered value exceeds the instrument’s stop frequency. Re-enter stop frequency. SYSTEM BUS ADDRESSES MUST BE UNIQUE GPIB address is being used by another bus instrument. Select a different, unique GPIB address. SYSTEM UNCALIBRATED 37XXXD is uncalibrated for the selected measurement values. Perform a measurement calibration. TOO FEW POINTS, 2 MINIMUM Entered too few discrete file points, 2 is minimum. Re-enter data points. TOO MANY POINTS, 1601 MAXIMUM Entered too many discrete file points, 1601 points are the maximum allowed. Re-enter data points. UNDEFINED DIVIDE BY ZERO Denominator cannot be zero in equation. Make denominator a value other than zero. WARNING: NO GPIB CONTROL OF SOURCE SWEEP Neither Source power nor flat-port power can be modified when receiver mode is user-defined with NO Source GPIB control. None. WARNING: SET ON RECEIVER MODE Phase-lock setting is undefined when VNA is Set-On Receiver mode. None. WARNING: SOURCE 2 DOES NOT EXIST 2nd, external, frequency source is not present. Connect frequency source. WINDOW TOO SMALL Attempted to set start greater than or equal to stop. Re-enter frequency values. 37XXXD OM 5-5 ERROR MESSAGES Table 5-2. ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES Disk Error Messages Error Message Description Corrective Action 7140: FLOPPY DISK GENERAL ERROR Invalid disk media or format. Use 1.44 MB diskette and format in the 37XXXD. 7142: FLOPPY DISK READ ERROR Read error when accessing disk file. Use 1.44 MB diskette and format in the 37XXXD. 7143: DISK WRITE ERROR Error in writing to disk file. Use 1.44 MB diskette and format in the 37XXXD. 7147: FLOPPY DISK UNAVAILABLE Floppy disk is not available. Install floppy diskette or floppy disk drive. 7170: HARD DISK GENERAL ERROR General error in accessing hard disk. Retry and if still fails, reformat the hard disk drive. 7172: HARD DISK READ ERROR Read error when accessing disk file. Retry and if still fails, reformat the hard disk drive. 7173: HARD DISK WRITE ERROR Error in writing to disk file. Retry and if still fails, reformat the hard disk drive. 7177: HARD DISK UNAVAILABLE Hard disk is not available. Install hard disk drive circuit board. 8140: GENERAL DISK BUFFER ERROR Out of RAM. Press the System State, Default Program key and retry. FILE NOT FOUND Disk file not found. None. FLOPPY DISK HAS NO ROOM FOR FILE Floppy diskette is full. Delete files or install new diskette. FLOPPY DISK NOT READY Floppy disk is not ready (or not installed.). Install diskette in floppy drive. FLOPPY DISK WRITE PROTECTED Write protect tab in place on floppy diskette. Remove write-protect tab. HARD DISK HAS NO ROOM FOR FILE, DELETE EXISTING FILES(S) TO CREATE SPACE Hard disk is full. Delete files. 5-6 37XXXD OM Chapter 6 Data Displays Table of Contents 6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6-2 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Graph Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 6-3 FREQUENCY MARKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-4 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-5 STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Analog Instrument Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Sweep Indicator Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6-6 DATA DISPLAY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Data Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Display of Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6-7 HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Chapter 6 Data Displays 6-1 6-2 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides discussion and examples of the various types of data displays. DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES The 37XXXD displays measurement data using a “Channel Concept.” This means that each channel can display both a different S-Parameter and a different graph type. As you select each channel, the graph type, scaling, reference delay, S-Parameter, etc., associated with that channel appears on the screen. You can display the same S-Parameter on two or more channels. Several graph-types are possible: polar, rectilinear, or Smith chart. The rectilinear graph-type may be magnitude, phase, magnitude and phase, SWR, group delay, real, imaginary, and real and imaginary. The Smith chart graph-type is specifically designed to plot complex impedances. Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 You select this display type (Figures 6-1 and 6-2) by choosing “Single Display” on Menu CM (Appendix A). Possible graph types are Smith, polar, rectilinear, or dual (split) rectilinear (magnitude and phase). S11 FORWARD REFLECTION LOG MAG. REF= 0.040000000 Figure 6-1. 37XXXD OM 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV GHz 20.000000000 Single Channel Display, Log Magnitude 6-3 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS S11 FORWARD REFLECTION LOG MAG. REF= 0.000 dB 0.040000000 GHz PHASE Figure 6-2. Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 10.000 dB/DIV 20.000000000 | 0.00 REF= | 90.00 /DIV Single Channel Display, Magnitude and Phase If you have chosen a dual display of magnitude and phase, the affected area of the LCD screen is subdivided into two smaller portions (Figure 6-3). You select this display type by choosing “Dual Display” in Menu CM (Appendix A). S11 FORWARD REFLECTION 1 IMPEDANCE .5 2 .2 5 0 -5 -.2 -2 -.5 2.036000000 - 5.030000000 GHz S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION PHASE 2.036000000 Figure 6-3. 6-4 REF= 0.00 | GHz 90.00 | /DIV 5.030000000 Dual Channel Display 37XXXD OM DATA DISPLAYS Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES From four-to-eight graph types are displayed. In each quadrant, the graph type can be any of the possible choices listed in the GT menu (Appendix A). If you have chosen to display magnitude and phase on a channel, the quadrant displaying that channel is further subdivided as described above. You select this display type by choosing “All Four Channels” in Menu CM. An example of a four-channel display appears in Figure 6-4, below. S11 S21 0.000 dB 1 Z LOGM+P 10.000 dB/DIV 2 .5 .2 5 0 2.036000000 GHz 5.030000000 -5 -.2 -2 -.5 -1 S12 0.000 dB 0.00 | 90.00 | S22 LOGM+P 10.000 dB/DIV Z 2 .5 .2 2.036000000 GHz 5.030000000 5 0 -5 -.2 -2 -.5 0.00 | Figure 6-4. 37XXXD OM 90.00 | /DIV /DIV 1 -1 Four-Channel Display 6-5 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES Dual Trace Overlay DATA DISPLAYS For rectilinear graph types, two traces can be displayed, one overlaid (superimposed) on the other (Figure 6-5). By menu selection, the two traces can be Channel 1 overlaid on Channel 3 or Channel 2 overlaid on Channel 4. Each trace is in a different color. Channels 1 and 2 are displayed in red, while Channels 3 and 4 are displayed in yellow. CH1:S11 FWD REFL CH3:S21 FWD TRANS LOG MAG. LOG MAG. REF= 0.000 dB REF= 10.000 dB/DIV 2.036000000 Figure 6-5. 6-6 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV GHz 5.030000000 Dual Trace Overlay 37XXXD OM DATA DISPLAYS Graph Data Types DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES The data types (real, imaginary, magnitude, phase) used in the displayed graph-types reflect the possible ways in which S-Parameter data can be represented in polar, Smith, or rectilinear graphs. For example: Complex data—that is, data in which both phase and magnitude are graphed—may be represented and displayed in any of the ways described below: q Complex Impedance—displayed on a Smith chart graph q Real and imaginary—displayed on a real and imaginary graph q Phase and magnitude components—displayed on a rectilinear (Cartesian) or polar graph q Group delay plot—group-delay measurement units are time, those of the associated aperture are frequency and SWR The quantity group delay is displayed using a modified rectilinear-magnitude format. In this format the vertical scale is in linear units of time (ps-ns-ms). With one exception, the reference value and reference line functions operate the same as they do with a normal magnitude display. The exception is that they appear in units of time instead of magnitude. Examples of graph-data types are shown in Figure 6-6 through 6-11, on the following pages. 37XXXD OM 6-7 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS S11 FWD REFL REF= 1.000 U 200.000 mU/DIV 90 LINEAR POLAR 135 45 180 0 0 -135 -45 -90 Figure 6-6. Linear Polar Graticule S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION LOG MAG. REF= -38.569 dB REF= 483.588 mU 2.036000000 S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION LINEAR MAG. 2.036000000 Figure 6-7. 6-8 GHz GHz 20.000 dB/DIV 10.020000000 200.000 mU/DIV 10.020000000 Dual Channel Rectilinear Graticule 37XXXD OM DATA DISPLAYS DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES S21 FWD TRANS REF= 0.000 dB 1.000 dB/DIV 90 LOG POLAR 135 45 180 0 -135 -45 -90 Figure 6-8. Log Polar Graticule S11 FORWARD REFLECTION 1 IMPEDANCE 2 .5 .2 0 5 .2 .5 1 2 5 -5 -.2 -.5 -2 -1 2.036000000 - Figure 6-9. 37XXXD OM 10.020000000 GHz Normal Smith Chart 6-9 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS S11 FORWARD REFLECTION 1 IMPEDANCE .5 2 .2 -.17 0 .2 .5 1 2 5 -5.8 -.2 -2 -.5 -1 2.036000000 - Figure 6-10. 10.020000000 GHz 3 dB Compressed Smith Chart S11 FORWARD REFLECTION .20 IMPEDANCE .15 .10 .05 0 .82 .85 .90 .95 1.0 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 -.05 -.10 -.15 20 Figure 6-11. 6-10 20 dB Compressed Smith Chart 37XXXD OM DATA DISPLAYS 6-3 FREQUENCY MARKERS FREQUENCY MARKERS The example below shows how the 37XXXD annotates markers for the different graph-types. Each marker is identified with its own number. When a marker reaches the top of its graticule, it will flip over and its number will appear below the symbol. When markers approach the same frequency, they will overlap. Their number will appear as close to the marker as possible without overlapping. S11 S12 -20.000 dB 1 Z LOGM+P 10.000 dB/DIV 2 .5 .2 5 2 1 3 2 0 2.036000000 GHz 10.020000000 3 -5 -.2 3 2 1 1 -2 -.5 -1 S21 0.000 dB 3.91 | 60.00 | S22 LOGM+P 10.000 dB/DIV /DIV 1 Z 2 .5 2 .2 1 1 2.036000000 GHz 10.020000000 2 3 5 2 3 0 3 -5 -.2 1 -2 -.5 7.99 | Figure 6-12. Marker Designation 6-4 60.00 | /DIV -1 Marker Annotation Depending on menu selection, you may designate a marker as the “active” or the “delta reference” marker. If you choose a marker to be active—indicated by its number being enclosed in a square box—you may change its frequency or time (distance) (or point number in CW Draw) with the Data Entry keypad or knob. If you have chosen it to be the delta-reference marker, a delta symbol (D) appears one character space above the marker number (or one character space below a “flipped” marker). If the marker is both active and the delta reference marker, the number and the delta symbol appear above (below) the marker. The delta symbol appears above (below) the number. LIMITS Limit lines function as settable maximum and minimum indicators for the value of displayed data. These lines are settable in the basic units of the measurement on a channel-by-channel basis. If the display is rescaled, the limit line(s) will move automatically and thereby maintain their correct value(s). 37XXXD OM 6-11 STATUS DISPLAY DATA DISPLAYS Each channel has two limit lines (four for dual displays), each of which may take on any value. Limit lines are either horizontal lines in rectilinear displays or concentric circles around the origin in Smith and polar displays. Each channel can produce segmented limits. They allow different upper and lower limit values to be set at up to ten segments across the measurement range. 6-5 STATUS DISPLAY In addition to the graticules, data, markers, and marker annotation, the 37XXXD displays certain instrument status information in the data display area. This information is described below. Reference Position Marker The Reference Position Marker indicates the location of the reference value. It is displayed at the left edge of each rectilinear graph-type. It consists of a green triangular symbol similar to the cursor displayed in the menu area. You can center this symbol on one of the vertical graticule divisions and move it up or down using the “Reference Position” option. When you do this, the data trace moves accordingly. If you also select the reference value option, the marker will remain stationary and the trace will move with the maximum allowable resolution. When changing from a full-screen display to half- or quarter-screen display, the marker will stay as close to the same position as possible. Scale Resolution Each measurement display is annotated with the scale resolution. For log-magnitude displays resolution ranges from 0.001 to 50 dB per division. Linear displays of magnitude range from 0.001 to 50 units per division. Cartesian phase displays can range from 0.01 to 90 degrees per division. The polar display is 45 degrees per display graticule. Frequency Range Each measurement display is annotated with the frequency range of the measurement. Analog Instrument Status Display Area The 37XXXD displays analog-instrument-status messages (in red when appropriate) in the upper right corner of the data-display area (left). They appear at the same vertical position as line 2 of the menu area. If more than one message appears, they stack up below that line. Menu Area Display screen showing the data 6-12 37XXXD OM DATA DISPLAYS Measurement Status Sweep Indicator Marker 6-6 DATA DISPLAY CONTROL DATA DISPLAY CONTROL The 37XXXD displays measurement-status messages (in red when appropriate) in the upper-right corner of the graticule (channel) to which they apply. A blue sweep-indicator marker appears at the bottom of each displayed graph-type. It indicates the progress of the current sweep. When measuring quiet data—that is, data having few or no perturbations—this indicator assures that the instrument is indeed sweeping. Its position is proportional to the number of data points measured in the current sweep. If the sweep should stop for any reason, the position of the indicator will stop changing until the sweep resumes. The following figure shows the algorithm that the 37XXXD uses to display the active channel. S E L E C T A C T IV E C H A N N E L (P R E S S C H 1 , C H 2 , C H 3 , C H 4 ) C H A N N E L P R E S E N T L Y D IS P L A Y E D ? N O Figure 6-13. 37XXXD OM N O D U A C H A N D IS P L A 1 -3 ? L N E L Y E D Y E S Y E S C O N T IN U D IS P L A Y IN G A C T IV (S IN G L E , D U A L , O R F O D IS P L A Y S IN G L E C H A N N E L D IS P L A Y E D ? E E C H A N N E L U R -C H A N N E L ) C H A N G E T O A C T IV E C H A N N E L Y E S N O C H A N G E T O D U A L 1 -3 + C H A N G E T O A C T IV E C H A N N E L C H A N G E T O D U A L 2 -4 + C H A N G E T O A C T IV E C H A N N E L Active Channel Algorithm 6-13 DATA DISPLAY CONTROL S-parameter Selection Data Display Update DATA DISPLAYS If you select a new S-parameter using Menu SP (Appendix A), it appears on the then-active channel in the same graph-type in which it was last displayed. The following table shows the displayable S-parameters based on the correction type you have in place. If you attempt to display other S-parameters, an error message appears. In cases when there is no last-displayed S-parameter stored, the display will default as shown. If an S-parameter is selected for which there was no last-displayed graph-type, the display defaults to S21, S12 Log Magnitude and Phase and S11, S22 Smith. When you change a control panel parameter that affects the appearance of the display, the entire display changes immediately to reflect that change. For example, if you press Autoscale, the entire display rescales immediately. You do not have to wait for the next sweep to see the results of the change. The following parameters are supported for this feature: Reference Delay, Offset, Scaling, Auto Scale, Auto Reference Delay, Trace Math, IF BW, and Smoothing. In the case of Averaging, the sweep restarts. Correction Type None Displayable S-parameters All Default Display Position CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 S11 S12 S21 S22 Frequency Response Reverse Transmission S12 Forward Transmission S21 Both S12, S21 Port 1 Reflection Only S11 Port 2Reflection Only S22 S12 S21 S12 S21 S11 S22 Reflection Only, Both S11, S22 S11 Forward 1-Path 2-Port S11, S21 S11 Reverse 1-Path 2-Port S12, S22 12-Term All S22 S21 S12 S11 S12 S22 S21 S22 If the knob is used to vary any of the above parameters, the change occurs as the measurement progresses–that is, the continuing trace will reflect the new setting(s). When you change a marker frequency or time (distance), the readout parameters will change. This change reflects the changes in measurement data at the marker’s new frequency, using data stored from the previous sweep. Display of Markers 6-14 Once you have selected a marker to display, it will appear on the screen. It does not matter what resolution you have selected. When you set a marker to another calibrated frequency and then lower the 37XXXD OM DATA DISPLAYS HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT resolution, that frequency and the marker will continue to display. It will display even if its frequency is not consistent with the data points in the lower-resolution sweep. 6-7 HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT In addition to the LCD screen, the Model 37XXXD is capable of outputting measured data as a: q Tabular Printout q Screen-Image Printout q Pen Plot q Disk Image of the Tabular Data Values The selection and initiation of this output is controlled by the Hard Copy keys. Tabular Printout An example of a tabular format is shown in Figure 6-14 (page 6-16). The tabular formats are used as follows: q Tabular Printout Format: Used when printing three or four channels. q Alternate Data Format: Used when printing one or two channels. In tabular printouts, the 37XXXD shifts the data columns to the left when an S-Parameter is omitted. Leading zeroes are always suppressed. The heading (Model, Device ID, Date, Operator, Page) appears on each page. Screen-Image Printout Plotter Output In a Screen-Image Printout, the exact data displayed on the screen is dumped to the printer. The dump is in the graphics mode, on a pixel-by-pixel basis. The protocol used to control plotters is “HP-GL (Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language). HP-GL contains a comprehensive set of vector graphics type commands. These commands are explained in the Interfacing and Programming Manual for any current model Hewlett-Packard plotter, such as the 7470A. When the plotter is selected as the output device, it is capable of drawing the graph shown on the screen or of drawing only the data trace(s). Multiple traces may be drawn on a single sheet of paper (in different colors, if needed). Disk Output 37XXXD OM The 37XXXD can write-to or read-from the disk all measured data. This data is stored as an ASCII file in the exact same format as that shown for the tabular printout in Figure 6-14 (page 6-16). If read back from the disk, the data is output to the printer. There, it prints as tabular data. 6-15 HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT Figure 6-14. 6-16 DATA DISPLAYS Example of a Tabular Printout 37XXXD OM Chapter 7 Measurement Calibration Table of Contents 7-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-2 DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Establishing the Test Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Understanding the Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7-3 SLIDING TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 7-4 SOLT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 7-5 OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 7-6 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 7-7 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 7-8 TRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 7-9 MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Chapter 7 Measurement Calibration 7-1 INTRODUCTION This section provides discussion and examples for performing a measurement calibration. It also provides a detailed procedure for calibrating with a sliding termination. 7-2 DISCUSSION Measurements always include a degree of uncertainty due to imperfections in the measurement system. The measured value is always a combination of the actual value plus the systematic measurement errors. Calibration, as it applies to network analysis, characterizes the systematic measurement errors and subtracts them from the measured value to obtain the actual value. The calibration process requires that you establish the test ports, perform the calibration, and confirm its quality. Let us examine each of these steps. Establishing the Test Ports Figures 7-1 and 7-2 are two of the most common approaches used to make measurements on two-port devices. In many cases, you may need adapters to change between connector types (N, SMA, GPC-7, etc.) or between genders (male [M] or female [F]). PORT 1 PORT 2 Figure 7-1. 37XXXD OM Establishing the Test Port 7-3 DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION The use of cables and/or adapters does not effect the final measurement result, if they were in place for the calibration process. The vector error corrections established during the calibration process eliminates cable and/or adapter effects as long as the ports used are stable and exhibit good repeatability. Figure 7-2 shows such a configuration. ADAPTERS PORT 1 PORT 2 Figure 7-2. Using Adapters on the Test Port Many calibration kits include adapters that are designed to have equal phase length. These parts are called phase equal adapters (PEA). Anritsu designs in-series adapters (e.g., K Connector M-M, M-F, F-F) to be phase insertable when technically possible. When available, it is good practice to use PEAs to establish test ports (Figure 7-3). 33KKF50 33KFKF50 TEST SET CONNECTOR KM TEST PORT 1 KM TEST PORT 2 KF CABLE CONNECTOR KM Figure 7-3. 7-4 Use of PEAs to Establish Test Ports 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION DISCUSSION This approach offers two advantages: q It minimizes wear on the more expensive test set and cable connectors q It provides a simple solution to measuring non-insertable devices (e.g., a filter with K female input and output connectors) by merely swapping PEAs after calibration. See Figure 7-4 NOTE In this and other discussions, we will talk about “insertable” and “non-insertable” devices. Insertable devices have an insertable connector pair (i.e., male input and female output connectors) and can be measured after a through calibration. A non-insertable device has a non-insertable pair of connectors. This would be the case if it included female connectors on both ports or different connector types on each port. Therefore, “non-insertables” cannot be connected directly into the measurement path without an adapter. USING THE PHASE-EQUAL INSERTABLE (PEI) Calibration M F M F F M PEA PEA TEST PORT TEST PORT Measurement M F M PEA F F M DUT TEST PORT Figure 7-4. Understanding the Calibration System F M PEA TEST PORT Using Phase-Equal Insertables Measurement errors must be reduced by a process that uses calibration standards. The standards most commonly used are Opens, Shorts, and Z0 (Characteristic Impedance) Loads. In conjunction with a through connection, these standards can correct for the major errors in a microwave test system. These errors are Directivity, Source Match, Load Match, Isolation, and Frequency Tracking (reflection and transmission). Calibration also corrects for many internal system errors, such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and system component interaction. Random errors such as noise, temperature, connector repeatability, DUT sensitive leakages, frequency repeatability, and calibration variables are not completely correctable. However, some of them can be minimized by careful control. For instance: temperature effects can be reduced by room temperature control, calibration variables can be re- 37XXXD OM 7-5 DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION duced through improved technique and training, and frequency errors can be virtually eliminated by the fully synthesized internal source. ERRORS REDUCED BY CALIBRATION · Directivity · Source Match · Load Match · Frequency Sensitivity (Tracking) · Isolation We know that adapters and cables degrade the basic directivity of the system, but these errors are compensated by vector error correction. In general, transmission measurement errors are source match, load match, and tracking; while reflection measurement errors are source match, directivity, and tracking. Error modeling and flow graphs are techniques used to analyze the errors in a system. Error models describe the errors, while flow graphs show how these errors influence the system. Error models (Figure 7-5) can become quite complex. DIRECTIVITY, SOURCE MATCH, AND TRACKING ERRORS INTERNAL SYSTEM ERRORS · RF Leakage · IF Leakage · System Interaction DISTORTED MEASUREMENT ED E S S 11M S 11A RANDOM ERRORS · Frequency · Repeatability · Noise · Connector Repeatability · Temperature/Environmental Changes · Calibration Variables Figure 7-5. Example of Error Modeling The 37XXXD offers a selection of calibration possibilities depending on the user’s needs. These possibilities are as follows: q Frequency Response q Reflection Only—1 Port q 1 Path, 2 Port q 12-Term—2 Port, Both Directions TRANSMISSION MEASUREMENT ERRORS 7-6 · Source Match · Load Match · Tracking These calibration types are described below. Frequency Response: Corrects for one or both of the transmission error terms associated with measurements of S21, S12, or both. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION DISCUSSION Reflection Only: Corrects for the three error terms associated with an S11 measurement (EDF, ESF, and ERF), an S22 measurement (EDR, ESR, and ERR), or both. REFLECTION MEASUREMENT ERRORS · Source Match · Directivity · Tracking CALIBRATION TYPES · Frequency Response · Reflection Only—1 Port · 1 Path, 2 Port · 12 Term—2 Port, Both Directions 37XXXD OM 1 Path, 2 Port: Corrects for the four forward-direction error terms (EDF, ESF, ERF, and ETF), or the four reverse-direction error terms (EDR, ESR, ERR, and ETR). Full 12-Term: Corrects for all twelve error terms associated with a two-port measurement. A 12-Term error model is shown in Figure 7-6. Measurement calibration using the 37XXXD is straightforward and menu directed. A short time spent in preparation and preplanning will make the process simple and routine. (Example: Adjusting the coaxial cables used in the measurement setup such that insertion of the DUT causes minimal flexing of these cables). The screen prompts on the 37XXXD guide you through the calibration process—a process that consists of connecting and disconnecting connectors and moving the slide on a sliding load (if one is used). The most critical part of the calibration process is properly seating and torquing the connectors. Also, you will notice that the calibration takes longer when the ports are terminated with a load. This is intentional. It allows for more averaging during the isolation measurement. 7-7 DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION PORT 1 E XF 1 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 2 S21M S11 E SF DUT ETF DUT EDF S22 S2 1 RF IN S21 ERR ELR ELF S22 S11 ESR EDR S22 S12 ETR 1 S12M ERF R S12 EXR S11M Forward Direction Terms Reverse Direction Terms 12 - TERM E XF PORT 1 PORT 1 PORT 2 S21M RF IN S21 PORT 2 S21 RF IN S21 ETF ETF DUT DUT 1 Path - 2 Port Terms Frequency Response - Transmission Only Terms EDF S11 E SF ERF S11M PORT 1 PORT 1 PORT 2 RF IN PORT 2 RF IN DUT DUT EDF S11 E SF ERF S1 1 ER F S11M Reflection Only Terms Figure 7-6. 7-8 Frequency Response - Reflection Only Terms Error Models 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Calibrating for a Measurement CALIBRATING FOR A REFLECTION MEASUREMENT USES THREE STANDARDS: · Short · Open · Termination IDEAL TERMINATIONS · Reflectionless · Perfect Connector · Infinite-Length, Dimensionally Exact, Reflectionless Transmission Line PRACTICAL Zo TERMINATIONS · Broadband Load · Sliding Termination 37XXXD OM DISCUSSION Let us assume that we want to correct for three errors in the reflection measurement: source match, directivity, and tracking. We accomplish this using three standards. Shorts are the easiest to visualize. They totally reflect all of the incident RF energy output at a precise phase. The terms zero-ohms impedance, voltage null, and 180° phase all define an RF Short. Opens are similar to Shorts, but their response is more complex. The terms voltage maximum, infinite impedance, and 0° phase all define a perfect Open. A perfect Open, however, is only a concept. In reality Opens always have a small fringing capacitance. To account for the fact that the Open will not predictably reflect impedance at an exact 0° phase reference, we alter its response using coefficients that accurately characterize the fringing capacitance. The coefficients are different for each coaxial line size, since each size has a different fringing capacitance. To maximize accuracy, ensure that these coefficients are installed prior to the calibration (Menu U3). As Opens and Shorts provide two references for a full reflection, Z0 terminations provide a zero-reflection reference. Ideal Z0 terminations must consist of two parts, a perfect connector and an infinite-length perfect transmission line that absorbs all of the RF energy that enters it (no reflections). Infinite length transmission lines are unwieldy at best, so you must use less-than-ideal terminations. For calibration purposes there are two common types: broadband loads and sliding terminations. 7-9 DISCUSSION BROADBAND LOAD · Easy to Use · Inexpensive · Adequate for Most Applications SLIDING LOAD · Connector · Long Transmission Line · Movable Microwave Load MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Broadband loads are widely used. An example is the Anritsu 28 Series Termination. These terminations are easy to use as calibration tools, and they are adequate for most applications. Sliding Loads are the traditional vector network analyzer Z0 calibration reference. They provide the best performance when the application requires high-precision return loss measurements. Sliding loads consist of a connector, a long section of precision transmission line, and a microwave load that is movable within the transmission line. One thing to remember with sliding loads is that they have a low-frequency limit and must be used with a fixed load below this cutoff frequency for full frequency coverage. Anritsu sliding loads cut off at 2 GHz. (V-connector sliding loads cut off at 4 GHz). Pin depth—the relationship between the interface positions of the outer and center conductors—is the most critical parameter under your control in a sliding load. An example of its criticality is that an incorrect pin depth of 0.001 inch can cause a reflection return loss of 44 dB. And, since we are trying to calibrate to accurately measure a 40 dB return loss, correct pin depth makes a big difference! Cables in the measurement system are another cause for concern. The main criteria for a cable are stability and repeatability. Anritsu offers two types of cables that meet these criteria: semi-rigid and flexible. Our semi-rigid cables provide maximum stability with limited flexibility of movement. Our flexible cables allow more freedom of movement and provide good phase stability. 7-10 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Evaluating the Calibration DISCUSSION The 37XXXD provides an accurate representation of complex data. However, it can only provide accuracy to the extent of the supplied calibration data. For this reason, it is necessary to periodically verify the calibration data and the 37XXXD system performance. Calibration verification reveals problems such as a poor contact with one of the calibration components, improper torquing, or a test port out of specification. Problems like these can easily occur during a calibration procedure. Anyone who has experienced one of these problems and stored bad data—after having performed a complete calibration procedure—knows the frustration it can cause. Additionally, it can be very costly to use incorrectly taken measurement data for design or quality assurance purposes. The best way to confirm a calibration is to measure a precision, known-good device and confirm its specifications. Verification Kits Anritsu has developed several precision-component kits: for 3.5 mm connectors, for GPC-7 connectors, K Connectorsâ and V Connectorsâ. These are, respectively, the Models 3666, 3667, and 3668 and 3669 Verification Kits. Each of the kits contain 20 dB and 50 dB attenuators, an airline, and a Beatty Standard. A Beatty Standard is a two-port mismatch similar to a beadless airline. It consists of a center conductor with a discontinuity in the middle providing the mismatch (Figure 7-7). Typically, these verification kits will be used by calibration or metrology labs. Each of the kits contain several precision components, all of which have been characterized at specified frequencies. The data on these components is stored on a disk provided with the verification kit. 5 0 9 S Figure 7-7. 37XXXD OM 1 1 5 0 9 2 5 9 5 0 9 The Beatty Standard 7-11 DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION The verification of the kit components is straight forward. The components are first measured with the 37XXXD, then they are compared with the data recorded on the disk. If the measured data compares favorably with the recorded data (taking tolerances into consideration), then the system is known to be operating properly and providing accurate data. There is one caution that you need to observe when using Verification Kits. Because the verification components have been characterized, you must handle them carefully so that you do not change their known characteristics. Consequently, you should not have them available for daily use. Rather, you should only use them for the accuracy verification checks taken every 6-to-12 months (or at any other time the system’s integrity is in doubt). This completes the discussion on calibration. Refer to paragraph 7-3 for a procedure showing how to calibrate the sliding load. 7-12 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION 7-3 SLIDING TERMINATION SLIDING TERMINATION Sliding terminations (loads) are the traditional Z0 calibration-reference devices for vector network analyzer calibration. When correctly used and perfectly aligned, they can be more accurate than precision fixed loads. However, sliding terminations have a 2 GHz (4 GHz for V-Connector sliding loads) low-frequency limit and must be used with a fixed load for full frequency-range coverage. Sliding terminations consist of a connector, a long section of precision transmission line, and a microwave load that is movable within the transmission line. Pin depth—the relationship between the interface positions of the outer and center conductors—is the most critical parameter that you can control in a sliding termination. An example of its criticality is that an incorrect pin depth of 0.001 inch can cause a reflection return loss of 44 dB. Since you are usually calibrating to accurately measure a greater than 40 dB return loss, correct pin depth is essential. Since setting an accurate pin depth is so important, this discussion centers on describing how to set the pin depth for male and female sliding terminations. Calibration with the sliding termination is essentially the same as described below for the broadband load. The procedure below uses the Model 3652 Calibration Kit and its 17KF50 and 17K50 Sliding Terminations. Calibration is similar for the Model 3650 SMA/3.5mm, Model 3651 GPC-7 and Model 3654 V connector kits. For the 3651, the procedure is simpler because the GPC-7 connector is genderless, there are no male and female versions. Procedure Step 1. Remove the Pin Depth Gauge from the kit, place it on the bench top. NOTE The gauge is convertible between male and female. The following procedure describes the zeroing process for the female fitting. The procedure for the male fitting begins with Step 16. 37XXXD OM 7-13 SLIDING TERMINATION 7-14 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 2. Push the outer locking ring towards the gauge to expose the center pin. Step 3. Take the 01-210 Ref Flat from the kit. Step 4. While holding the gauge as shown, press the Ref Flat firmly against the end of the exposed center pin. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 5. SLIDING TERMINATION While pressing the Ref Flat against the center pin, check that the pointer aligns with the “0” mark. If it does not, loosen the bezel lockscrew and rotate the bezel to align the pointer with the “0” mark. Tighten the bezel lock screw. NOTE Gently rock the Ref Flat against the center pin to ensure that it is fully depressed and you have accurately set the gauge for zero. 37XXXD OM Step 6. Remove the sliding termination with the female-connector (17KF50, for this example) from the kit, and slide the load all the way toward the end closest to the connector. Step 7. With either hand, pick up the sliding termination near its connector end. Step 8. Cup the sliding termination in your palm, and support the barrel between your body and crooked elbow. 7-15 SLIDING TERMINATION 7-16 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 9. Remove the flush short by holding its body and unscrewing its connector. Step 10. Install the gauge onto the end of the sliding termination. Step 11. If the COARSE SET adjustment—which has been set at the factory—has not moved, the inner dial on the gauge will read “0.” If it doesn’t, perform the Coarse Set Adjustment in Step 15. Step 12. Place the sliding termination, with the gauge attached, on the bench top. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SLIDING TERMINATION Step 13. Loosen the FINE LOCK ring and turn the FINE ADJ ring to position the gauge pointer 2-3 small divisions on the “–” side of zero. Step 14. Turn the FINE LOCK ring clockwise to both tighten the adjustment and place the pointer exactly to “0.” The Sliding Termination is now ready to use. NOTES Ensure that the inner dial reads “0.” The following step is not normally necessary. It needs to be done only if the adjustment has changed since it was set at the factory. 37XXXD OM Step 15. With the 01-211 Flush Short installed, loosen the COARSE LOCK and gently push the COARSE SET adjustment rod in as far as it will go. This coarsely sets the center conductor to be flush against the attached short. Return to Step 2. Step 16. The procedure for adjusting the male-connector sliding termination is essentially the same as that described above. The only difference is that you must install the female adapter on the end of the gauge shaft, over the center conductor. To install this adapter, proceed as follows: Zero-set the gauge as described in Steps 2 through 5. Push the outer locking ring back toward the gauge and turn it clockwise onto the exposed threads. Loosen the lock ring one turn in a counterclockwise direction. 7-17 SLIDING TERMINATION 7-18 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 17. Remove the 01-223 Female Adapter (“F ADAPTER FOR PIN GAUGE”) from the kit. Step 18. Install the female adapter over the center pin and screw it into the locking ring, and tighten the outer ring until it is snug against the housing. Step 19. Inspect the end of the adapter, you should see no more than two exposed threads. If so, repeat Steps 7 through 10. Step 20. Connect the gauge to the sliding termination and zero set the center pin using the FINE ADJ as previously described in Steps 2 through 5. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION 7-4 SOLT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION The SOLT calibration for the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer system uses a Short, Open, Load, and a Thru line connection to categorize the inherent errors in the measurement system. These errors include those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction. For maximum accuracy, install the capacitive coefficients (for the open device) using Menu U3. NOTE The SOLT calibration, in conjuction with the SSST calibration, are merged to create a continuous, single sweep broadband calibration on the ME7808A system. Refer to Chapter 15 for details about the broadband mode of operation. Calibration Procedure A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing a Short-Open-Load-Throughline calibration is given below. Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key. . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement MENU C11 BEGIN CALIBRATION KEEP EXISTING CAL DATA Begin Cal REPEAT PREVIOUS CAL Apply Cal AUTOCAL CAL METHOD STANDARD TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE: XXXXXXXX Step 2. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes SOLT and COAXIAL are not presently shown in blue as being selected.) CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 7-19 SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 3. MENU C11A CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE When menu C11A (left) appears, move the cursor to the following: a. SOLT (STANDARD), then press the Enter key. This selects Standard (SOLT) as the calibration method. NEXT CAL STEP CAL METHOD b. COAXIAL, then press the Enter key. This selects coaxial transmission line media. SOLT (STANDARD) SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH LOAD) c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key. This causes menu C11 to return to the screen. SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT) LRL/LRM Step 4. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the SOLT calibration method and COAXIAL line type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key to proceed. This brings up menu C5. Step 5. Menu C5 (left) lets you select the type of calibration. For this example, move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the Enter key. This selection calibrates for all twelve error terms. Step 6. The next menu, C5D, lets you choose whether to include or exclude the error terms associated with leakage between measurement channels. For a normal calibration, you would choose to include these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to INCLUDE ISOLATION ( STANDARD ) and press the Enter key. TRM TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE COAXIAL WAVE GUIDE MICROSTRIP PRESS TO SELECT MENU C5 CALIBRATION TYPE FULL 12-TERM 1 PATH 2 PORT TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY RESPONSE MENU C5D SELECT USE OF ISOLATION IN CALIBRATION REFLECTION ONLY INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) PRESS TO SELECT EXCLUDE ISOLATION PRESS TO SELECT 7-20 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 7. MENU C1 SELECT CALIBRATION DATA POINTS SOLT CALIBRATION Next, menu C1 appears. It lets you select the number of frequency points at which calibration data is to be taken. The choices are: a. NORMAL: Data is taken at up to 1601 equally spaced frequencies across the calibration frequency range. Use this selection for this example. NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) b. C.W.: Data is taken at one point. This choice brings up menu C2B (below) that lets you select the single CW frequency point. C.W. (1 POINT) N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES (2 TO 1601 POINTS) MENU C2B TIME DOMAIN (HARMONIC) SINGLE POINT CALIBRATION PRESS TO SELECT C.W. FREQ XX.XXXX GHz FINISHED ENTRY, NEXT CAL STEP INPUT FREQ AND PRESS TO SELECT c. N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES: This selection lets you specify a discrete number of frequency points, from 2 to 1601. MENU C2 FREQ RANGE OF CALIBRATION d. TIME DOMAIN: This selection is the calibration mode for low-pass time-domain processing. It lets you select frequencies at integer (harmonic) multiples of the start frequency. START 0.0400000000GHz STOP 20.000000000 GHz 201 DATA PTS 0.099800000 GHz STEP SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DATA POINTS 1601 MAX PTS 801 MAX PTS 401 MAX PTS 201 MAX PTS 101 MAX PTS 51 MAX PTS Step 8. The next menu, C2 (left), lets you set your start and stop frequencies. For this example, move the cursor to START, press 40 on the keypad, and hit the MHz terminator key. Perform like operations for the STOP choice, except make entry read 20 GHz. After setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key. NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 7-21 SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 9. When menu C3 (left) appears, if you want to change any of the parameters shown in blue letters, place the cursor on that parameter and press the Enter key. For this example, we will change them all, starting with the top one. Move the cursor to PORT 1 CONN and press the Enter key. Step 10. In menu C4 (below), which appears next, move the cursor to K CONN (M) and then press the Enter key. This choice presumes that you have a K-Female connector on the device-under-test (DUT). Remember, in this menu you choose the connector type on the test port, or the connector type that mates with the DUT connector. When menu C3 returns, observe that K CONN (M) is now shown in blue for the PORT 1 CONN choice. MENU C3 CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS PORT 1 CONN K CONN (M) PORT 2 CONN SMA (M) REFLECTION PAIRING MIXED LOAD TYPE SLIDING THROUGHLINE PARAMETERS REFERENCE IMPEDANCE TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE MENU C4 SELECT PORT 1 CONNECTOR TYPE K-CONN (M) K-CONN (F) V-CONN (M) V-CONN (F) W1-CONN (M) W1-CONN (F) SMA (M) SMA (F) GPC-3.5 (M) GPC-3.5 (F) GPC-7 USER DEFINED MORE PRESS TO SELECT 7-22 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION Step 11. With menu C3 (left) displayed, move the cursor to PORT 2 CONN and press the Enter key. Following the procedure in Step 10, select K CONN (M) for the Port 2 connector. Step 12. When menu C3 returns: MENU C3 CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS PORT 1 CONN K CONN (M) PORT 2 CONN K CONN (M) REFLECTION PAIRING MIXED LOAD TYPE SLIDING THROUGH PARAMETERS REFERENCE IMPEDANCE TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE a. Observe that PORT 2 CONN now reflects K CONN (M). b. Move the cursor to REFLECTION PARING and press the Enter key. This brings up menu C13 (below). MENU C13 SELECT REFLECTION PAIRING MIXED (OPEN–SHORT SHORT–OPEN) MATCHED (OPEN–OPEN SHORT–SHORT) PRESS TO SELECT Reflection Pairing lets you mix or match the Open and Short reflection devices in the Calibration Sequence menus. The MIXED choice lets you calibrate using first an Open on one port and a Short on the other, then a Short on one port and an Open on the other. Conversely, MATCHED lets you calibrate first using an Open on both ports then using a Short on both ports. For this example, choose MIXED and press the Enter key. 37XXXD OM 7-23 SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 13. MENU C3 CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS PORT 1 CONN TYPE N (M) PORT 2 CONN TYPE N (F) When menu C3 returns: a. Observe that REFLECTION PARING now reflects MIXED. b. Move cursor to LOAD TYPE and press the Enter key. This brings up menu C6 (below). MENU C6 REFLECTION PARING MIXED SELECT TYPE OF LOAD LOAD TYPE BROADBAND BROADBAND FIXED LOAD THROUGH PARAMETERS SLIDING LOAD (MAY ALSO REQUIRE BROADBAND FIXED LOAD) REFERENCE IMPEDANCE TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO SELECT This menu lets you select either of two load types, broadband or sliding. Broadband loads are adequate for all but the most demanding reflection measurements. They are easier to use and less expensive than sliding loads. If you choose a sliding load, refer to paragraph 7-3 for a procedure on setting pin depth. For this example, select BROADBAND LOAD and press the Enter key. MENU C6A ENTER BROADBAND LOAD IMPEDANCE BROADBAND LOAD IMPEDANCE 50.000 W c. The next menu to appear, C6A (left), prompts you to enter an impedance value. For this example, use the rotary knob to change the displayed value to 50W. Alternatively, you can key in 50 ohms. That is, press 50 on the keypad and the X1 terminator key. If the value is 1 mW, key in .001 and press the 10–3 terminator key. Conversely, if the value is 1 MW, key in 1000 and press the 103 terminator key. PRESS TO SELECT 7-24 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 14. SOLT CALIBRATION When menu C3 again returns: MENU C20 a. Observe that LOAD TYPE now shows BROADBAND. ENTER THROUGH LINE PARAMETERS b. Move cursor to THROUGH PARAMETERS and press the Enter key. OFFSET LENGTH 0.0000 mm THROUGHLINE IMPEDANCE 50.000 W Step 15. Menu C20 (left) appears next. It lets you define the length of the offset and the impedance of the throughline. For this example, enter 0 mm for length and 50 ohms for impedance. Step 16. When menu C3 reappears, move the cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and press the Enter key. This brings up menu C17 (left). Step 17. Move cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and use the rotary knob to change the displayed value to 50W. PRESS WHEN COMPLETE MENU C17 ENTER REFERENCE IMPEDANCE REFERENCE IMPEDANCE 50.000 W Press the Enter key when you have completed your value entry. PRESS WHEN COMPLETE 37XXXD OM 7-25 SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 18. When menu C3 returns, select TEST SIGNALS to bring up menu SU2 (left). Step 19. Menu SU2 lets you define the power level of the signals at the two test ports. Power delivered to the DUT by the test set must be such that the measured signals are well above the noise floor but below the 0.1 dB compression level of the Test Set samplers. (Noise floor and maximum signal into Port 2 levels are specified in Appendix C.) MENU SU2 TEST SIGNALS POWER CONTROL 0.0 dB (0 TO -20) PORT 1 ATTN 20 dB (0 - 70) PORT 1 POWER XX.XX dBm For measuring high power signals, a Port 2 attenuator in the forward transmission path allows up to 1 Watt of power (30 dBm) before 0.1 dB compression occurs. PORT 2 ATTN X0 dB (0-40) CALIBRATE FOR FLATNESS (CAL EXISTS) Determine the required input power level and the expected output RF power level from the DUT. Ideally, the Port 2 step attenuator should be set so that the input to the test sampler (left) is less than –10 dBm. For example, if the input to the DUT is set for –20 dBm and the device gain is 40 dB, set the PORT 2 ATTN menu option for 20 dB. FLATNESS CORRECTION AT XX.X dBm SOURCE 2 PWR XX.X dBm PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT (If you needed to calibrate the test port for power flatness, you would move the cursor to FLATNESS CORRECTION and press the Enter key.) Finally, move the cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press the Enter key. This returns you to menu SU1. When you get there, press the Enter key to return to menu C3. P2 TB 0 to 40 dB Sampler 7-26 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 20. MENU C3 CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS PORT 1 CONN TYPE N (M) PORT 2 CONN SMA (M) SOLT CALIBRATION When menu C3 reappears, select START CAL and press the Enter key to begin the calibration procedure. Continue the calibration sequence by following the prompts as they appear. Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, Broadband Loads, Opens, Shorts, and Throughlines, when requested in the calibration sequence. REFLECTION PAIRING MIXED LOAD TYPE SLIDING THROUGH PARAMETERS REFERENCE IMPEDANCE TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE 37XXXD OM 7-27 OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) 7-5 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) The Offset-Short calibration, now also referred to as the Double Offset-Short Calibration, is the standard technique for waveguide; however, this method can be used for the coaxial and microstrip line types as well. It uses two shorts, two loads, and a thru line to categorize the inherent errors in the waveguide measurement system. These errors include those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction. Calibration Procedure A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing an Offset-Short calibration for waveguide is given below. Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key. . Begin Cal MENU C11 BEGIN CALIBRATION KEEP EXISTING CAL DATA REPEAT PREVIOUS CAL Step 2. - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Apply Cal Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes OFFSET SHORT and WAVEGUIDE are not presently shown in blue as being selected.) AUTOCAL CAL METHOD XXXXXXX TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE: XXXXXXXX CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT 7-28 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 3. MENU C11A CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) When menu C11A (left) appears, move cursor to the following: a. SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT), then press the Enter key. This selects Offset Short as the calibration method. NEXT CAL STEP CAL METHOD SOLT (STANDARD) b. WAVEGUIDE, then press the Enter key. This brings menu C5 (bottom left) to the screen. SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH LOAD) c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key. This causes menu C11 to return to the screen. SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT) LRL/LRM Step 4. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the OFFSET SHORT calibration method and WAVEGUIDE line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key to proceed. Step 5. Menu C5 appears next. This menu (bottom left) lets you select the type of calibration. For this example, move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the Enter key. Step 6. The next menu, C5D (below), lets you choose whether to include or exclude the error terms associated with leakage between measurement channels. For a normal calibration, you would choose to include these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) and press the Enter key. TRM TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE COAXIAL WAVEGUIDE MICROSTRIP PRESS TO SELECT MENU C5 SELECT CALIBRATION TYPE FULL 12-TERM 1 PATH 2 PORT TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY RESPONSE REFLECTION ONLY PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM MENU C5D SELECT USE OF ISOLATION IN CALIBRATION INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) EXCLUDE ISOLATION PRESS TO SELECT 7-29 OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) Step 7. Menu C1 (left), which appears next, lets you select the number of frequency points at which calibration data is to be taken. Of these choices, which were described in paragraph 7-4, choose NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) for this example. Step 8. The next menu, C2 (below), lets you set your start and stop frequencies. For this example, move cursor to START, press 40 on keypad, and press the MHz terminator key. Perform like operations for the STOP choice, except make entry read 20 GHz. After setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key. MENU C1 SELECT CALIBRATION DATA POINTS NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION C.W. (1 POINT) N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES (2 TO 1601 POINTS) TIME DOMAIN (HARMONIC) MENU C2 PRESS TO SELECT FREQ RANGE OF CALIBRATION START 0.0400000000GHz STOP 20.000000000 GHz 201 DATA PTS 0.099800000 GHz STEP SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DATA POINTS 1601 MAX PTS 801 MAX PTS 401 MAX PTS 201 MAX PTS 101 MAX PTS 51 MAX PTS MENU C3B CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS INSTALLED NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT REFLECTION PAIRING XXXXXXXX LOAD TYPE BROADBAND THROUGH LINE PARAMETERS TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE 7-30 Step 9. When menu C3B (bottom left) appears, if you want to change any of the parameters shown in blue letters, place the cursor on that parameter and press the Enter key. (These choices operate the same as was described for menu C3 in section 7-4.) For this example, we change the waveguide parameters. Move the cursor to WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS and press the Enter key. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) Step 10. When menu C15 (left) appears, move cursor to one of the two available choices and press the Enter key. These choices are described below. MENU C15 SELECT WAVEGUIDE KIT TO USE a. USE INSTALLED WAVEGUIDE KIT: Selecting this choice uses the values shown in blue for IDENTIFIER, CUTOFF FREQ, SHORT 1, and SHORT 2. Select this choice, for this example. –INSTALLED KIT— IDENTIFIER XXXX CUTOFF FREQ: XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz b. USER DEFINED: Selecting this choice brings up menu C15A (below), which lets you specify waveguide parameters. After defining your waveguide parameters, you are returned to menu C3B. SHORT 1 XX.XXXX mm SHORT 2 XX.XXXX mm USE INSTALLED WAVEGUIDE KIT MENU C15A USER DEFINED ENTER WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS PRESS TO SELECT WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF FREQ: XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 1 XX.XXXX mm OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 2 XX.XXXX mm PRESS WHEN COMPLETE Step 11. 37XXXD OM Continue the calibration sequence by following the prompts as they appear. Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, Broadband Loads, Shorts, and Throughlines, when requested in the calibration sequence. 7-31 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) CALIBRATION 7-6 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) MEASUREMENT The Triple Offset-Short calibration method can be used in coax, waveguide, and microstrip line types, and is most accurate when used over narrower frequency ranges. As the name implies, this method uses three offset-shorts to categorize the inherent errors in the measurement system. These errors include those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction. NOTE A continuous single sweep bradband calibration from 40 MHz to 110 GHz can be created by merging a 40 MHz to 65 GHz SOLT calibration with a 65 GHz to 110 GHz SSST calibration. For more information, refer to section 7-9, Merge Cal Files, and to Chapter 15 for details about the broadband mode of operation. Calibration Procedure A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing a Triple Offset-Short calibration is given below: Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key. . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement MENU C11 BEGIN CALIBRATION KEEP EXISTING CAL DATA Begin Cal REPEAT PREVIOUS CAL Apply Cal AUTOCAL CAL METHOD STANDARD TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE: XXXXXXXX Step 2. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes that OFFSET SHORT and WAVEGUIDE are not presently shown in blue as being selected.) CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT 7-32 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION (SSST) Step 3. MENU C11A TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION When menu C11A (left) appears, move cursor to the following: a. SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT), then press the Enter key. This selects Triple Offset-Short as the calibration method. CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP SOLT (STANDARD) b. COAXIAL, then press the Enter key. This brings menu C5 (left) to the screen. SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH LOAD) c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key. This causes menu C11 to return to the screen. CAL METHOD SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT) Step 4. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the SSST calibration method and COAXIAL line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key to proceed. Step 5. Menu C5 appears next (lower left). This menu lets you select the type of calibration. For this example, move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the Enter key. Step 6. The next menu, C5D (below), lets you choose whether to include or exclude the error terms associated with leakage between measurement channels. For a normal calibration, you would choose to include these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) and press the Enter key. LRL/LRM TRM TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE COAXIAL WAVEGUIDE MICROSTRIP PRESS TO SELECT Menu C5 CALIBRATION TYPE FULL 12-TERM Menu C5D 1 PATH 2 PORT SELECT USE OF ISLOATION IN CALIBRATION TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY RESPONSE INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) REFLECTION ONLY EXCLUDE ISOLATION PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM PRESS TO SELECT 7-33 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) CALIBRATION Step 7. Menu C1 appears next (left) and lets you select the number of frequency points for which calibration data is to be taken. Select NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) (refer to section 7-4 for a description). Step 8. The next menu, C2 (below), lets you set your start and stop frequencies. For this example, move the cursor to START, press 65 on the keypad, then press the GHz terminator key. Perform like operations for the STOP choice, except make the entry read 110 GHz. After setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key. MENU C1 SELECT CALIBRATION DATA POINTS MEASUREMENT NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) C.W. (1 POINT) N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES (2 TO 1601 POINTS) MENU C2 FREQ RANGE OF CALIBRATION TIME DOMAIN (HARMONIC) START 0.0400000000GHz PRESS TO SELECT STOP 20.000000000 GHz 201 DATA PTS 0.099800000 GHz STEP SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DATA POINTS 1601 MAX PTS 801 MAX PTS 401 MAX PTS 201 MAX PTS 101 MAX PTS 51 MAX PTS NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT Menu C14 SELECT PORT n OFFSET SHORT CONNECTOR TYPE W1-CONN (M) W1-CONN (F) SPECIAL A (M) SPECIAL A (F) Step 9. This brings up the Menu C14 (lower left) for selecting the connector types on ports 1 and 2. Select the W1-CONN connectors with the appropriate sex for a W1 (1mm) calibration. SPECIAL B (M) SPECIAL B (F) SPECIAL C (M) SPECIAL C (F) USER DEFINED PRESS TO SELECT 7-34 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION (SSST) TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION Step 10. When menu C3B (left) appears, if you want to change any of the parameters shown in blue letters, place the cursor on that parameter and press the Enter key. Step 11. When menu C3 (lower left) returns: MENU C3B CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS INSTALLED a. Observe that PORT 1 CONN and PORT 2 CONN now reflects W1 CONN (M). REFLECTION PAIRING MIXED b. Move the cursor to REFLECTION PARING and press the Enter key. This brings up menu C13 (below). LOAD TYPE BROADBAND THROUGH LINE PARAMETERS MENU C13 SELECT REFLECTION PAIRING TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE MIXED (SHORT1-SHORT2, SHORT2-SHORT3, SHORT3-SHORT1) MATCHED (SHORT1-SHORT1, SHORT2-SHORT2, SHORT3-SHORT3) MENU C3 CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE PORT 1 CONN W1-CONN (M) PORT 2 CONN W1-CONN (M) Step 12. Reflection Pairing lets you mix or match Offset Short devices in the Calibration Sequence menus, as per the kit available. Generally, on-wafer calibration substrates have matched components; however, it is more convenient, on a coaxial calibration, to use MIXED pairing in the case of the same connector types on both ports. The MIXED choice lets you calibrate using different offset shorts on the two ports. Conversely, MATCHED pairing lets you calibrate in sequence using one offset short type in each step. For this example, choose MIXED and press the Enter key. Step 13. When menu C3 reappears, confirm the calibration parameters selected for the calibration, then select START CAL and continue the calibration sequence by following the prompts as they appear. Step 14. Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, the three Offset Shorts, and the Throughlines when requested in the calibration sequence. REFLECTION PAIRING XXXXXXXX LOAD TYPE BROADBAND THROUGH LINE PARAMETERS REFERENCE IMPEDANCE TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE 37XXXD OM 7-35 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION 7-7 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION The LRL/LRM (line-reflect-line/line-reflect-match) calibration* feature provides an enhanced capability for error compensation when making measurements in coaxial, microstrip and waveguide transmission media. Instead of using the standard Open, Short, and Load, the LRL/LRM calibration method uses two lines and a reflection or match. The difference in length between line 1 and line 2 creates the measurements necessary for the error solutions. The LRL/LRM calibration technique uses the characteristic impedance of a length of transmission line or a precision match as the calibration standard. A full LRL/LRM calibration consists of two transmission line measurements, a high reflection measurement, and an isolation measurement. Using this technique full 12-term error correction can be performed with the 37XXXD. Three-line LRL/LRM calibration can also be selected. In a two-line LRL measurement, the difference in length between line one and line two is necessary for calibration but limits the frequency range to a 9:1 span. The use of three lines in the calibration extends the frequency range to an 81:1 span. A combination of LRL and LRM can accomodate any broadband measurement. 1. Through the use of LRL/LRM calibration and an external computer, in conjunction with ANACAT software, multiple-level de-embedding is possible. This calibration allows you to make semi-conductor chip measurements up to 40 GHz with a single test fixture. 2. In addition, any non-coaxial transmission media, including mixed media interconnects, can be accommodated. For example, a test device with a waveguide input and a coplanar microstrip output can be measured. Software automatically compensates for the microstrip dispersion. A detailed procedure for calibrating for a measurement using the LRL/LRM method is provided in the following pages. *LRM Calibration Method of Rhode & Scharwz, Germany 7-36 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM Calibration (Microstrip) LRL/LRM CALIBRATION Microstrip is a dispersive media. The 37XXXD applies dispersion compensation during calibration for microstrip measurements. Because the 37XXXD must know the specific microstrip parameters, during the calibration procedure menus are available for entering the: q width of the strip q thickness of the substrate q substrate dielectric constant q effective dielectric constant Zc q characteristic impedance (reference) When testing microstrip devices it is necessary to launch from coax to microstrip. In production testing this launching must be temporary, so that the device can easily be installed in and be removed from the fixture. The requirement for launching to 65 GHz is met by the Anritsu Universal Test Fixture (UTF). The UTF provides accurate, repeatable launch to substrates from 5 to 70 mils thick, and from 0.15 to 2 inches long. Offset connections and right angles can be configured. DC bias probes can be mounted to the UTF to inject bias onto the substrate. UTF calibration/verification kits are available for alumina in 10 mil, 15 mil, and 25 mil microstrip, and for 25 mil coplanar waveguide. Although a UTF is not essential, the following calibration procedures presume its use. Step 1. Select the desired LRL line substrates from the appropriate microstrip calibration kit. When called for in the calibration sequence, mount the LRL line substrates on the UTF following the procedure given in the 3680 OMM. Step 2. Press the Begin Cal key. . Begin Cal 37XXXD OM - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Apply Cal 7-37 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 3. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes LRL and MICROSTRIP are not presently shown in blue as being selected.) Step 4. When menu C11A (bottom left) appears, highlight the following selections. MENU C11 BEGIN CALIBRATION KEEP EXISTING CAL DATA REPEAT PREVIOUS CAL a. LRL/LRM and press the Enter key. AUTOCAL CAL METHOD XXXXXXXX b. MICROSTRIP and press the Enter key. TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE: XXXXXXXX c. NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key. Step 5. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the LRL/LRM calibration method and MICROSTRIP line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key to proceed. Step 6. Continue through the calibration sequence, and make the following selections from the menus that appear: CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) (Menu C5D) NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) (Menu C1) START (Your start frequency) (Menu C2) STOP (Your stop frequency) (Menu C2) MENU C11A CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP CAL METHOD SOLT (STANDARD) SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH LOAD) SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT) LRL/LRM TRM TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE COAXIAL WAVEGUIDE MICROSTRIP PRESS TO SELECT MENU C5D MENU C1 MENU C2 SELECT USE OF ISOLATION IN CALIBRATION SELECT CALIBRATION DATA POINTS FREQ RANGE OF CALIBRATION INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) EXCLUDE ISOLATION C.W. (1 POINT) PRESS TO SELECT N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES (2 TO 1601 POINTS) TIME DOMAIN (HARMONIC) PRESS TO SELECT START 0.0400000000GHz STOP 20.000000000 GHz 201 DATA PTS 0.099800000 GHz STEP SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DATA POINTS 1601 MAX PTS 801 MAX PTS 401 MAX PTS 201 MAX PTS 101 MAX PTS 51 MAX PTS NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT 7-38 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 7. When menu C3G appears, if you want to change microstrip parameters to be different from those shown in blue, place the cursor on MICROSTRIP PARAMETERS and press the Enter key. Step 8. When menu C16 (left) appears, move the cursor to the Anritsu 3680 UTF calibration kit you wish to use or to USER DEFINED; then press the Enter key. MENU C3G CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS LRL/LRM PARAMETERS MICROSTRIP PARAMETERS USER DEFINED TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE LRL/LRM CALIBRATION The calibration kit selections shown in menu C16 are for the following 3680 Connection Substrate Kits: 10 MIL KIT — 36804B-10M 15 MIL KIT — 36804B-15M 25 MIL KIT — 36804B-25M If you choose USER DEFINED, the next menu that appears (C16A), lets you characterize your parameters. Move the cursor to each selection, key in a value, then press the Enter key to return to menu C16. MENU C16 SELECT MICROSTRIP KIT TO USE 10 MIL KIT 15 MIL KIT 25 MIL KIT USER DEFINED PRESS WHEN COMPLETE MENU C16A ENTER MICROSTRIP PARAMETERS WIDTH OF STRIP XX.XXXX mm THICKNESS OF SUBSTRATE XXXX.XXXX mm Zc XXX.XXX pW SUBSTRATE DIELECTRIC XX.XX EFFECTIVE DIELECTRIC XX.XX (RECOMMENDED 0.00) PRESS WHEN COMPLETE 37XXXD OM 7-39 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MENU C3G CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS LRL/LRM PARAMETERS CHANGE MICROSTRIP PARAMETERS XXXXXXXXX START CAL PRESS TO SELECT MENU C18 CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS NEXT CAL STEP MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 9. Select LRL/LRM PARAMETERS, when menu C3G returns. Step 10. When menu C18 appears, you have two choices to make: whether your calibration is to be two-line or three-line, and where you want to have your reference plane. a. Select the reference plane: Highlight MIDDLE OF LINE 1 (REF) or ENDS OF LINE 1 (REF) and press the Enter key. b. Select the type of LRL/LRM calibration: Highlight ONE BAND for a two-line calibration or TWO BANDS for a three-line calibration. As mentioned earlier in a two-line measurement, the difference in length between line 1 and line 2 is necessary for calibration, but limits the frequency range to a 9:1 span. By using three lines in the calibration, you extend the frequency range to an 81:1 span. If you select TWO BANDS, skip to Step 12. NUMBER OF BANDS USED ONE BAND TWO BANDS LOCATION OF REFERENCE PLANES MIDDLE OF LINE 1 (REF) ENDS OF LINE 1 (REF) PRESS TO SELECT 7-40 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION Step 11. When menu C18A (left) appears, make the following selections (for 2-line): MENU C18A CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS NEXT CAL STEP CHARACTERIZE CAL DEVICES DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF) X.XXXX mm DEVICE 2 LINE /MATCH X.XXXX mm PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH a. Move the cursor to DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF) and key in the value. b. Move the cursor to DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH. Here you have another decision to make: whether your calibration is to be LRL or LRM. For this selection, the Enter key acts as a toggle. c. If you toggle such that LINE turns red, then key in the value for line 2. This value depends on your frequency range. d. If you toggle MATCH red, observe that FULLBAND appears. This indicates that your reflective device covers the full calibration range. e. When you have made both selections, move the cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key to produce the next menu. Skip to Step 13. 37XXXD OM 7-41 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 12. When menu C18B (left) appears, make the following selections (for 3-line): MENU C18B CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS NEXT CAL STEP CHARACTERIZE CAL DEVICES DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF) XX.XXXX DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH XX.XXXX/LOWBAND DEVICE 3 LINE/MATCH XX.XXXX/HIGHBAND FREQ AFTER WHICH THE USE OF DEVICE 2 AND DEVICE 3 IS EXCHANGED BREAKPOINT XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHZ PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH a. Move the cursor to DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF) and key in the value (typically 1.00 cm). Press the Enter key to select. b. Move the cursor to DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH. Both here, and for the next choice, you have another decision to make: whether your calibration is to be LRL or LRM. For this selection, the Enter key acts as a toggle. c. If you toggle such that LINE turns red, then key in the value for line 2. This value depends on your frequency range. d. If you toggle MATCH red, observe that LOWBAND appears. This indicates that your reflection device is a low-band load. This load must have a passband such that it passes all frequencies from the start to the breakpoint (see below). e. Move the cursor to DEVICE 3 LINE/MATCH. If device 3 is a line, key in the value. If it is a match, the term HIGHBAND will appear. This indicates that your match is a high-band load. This load must have a passband such that it passes all frequencies from the breakpoint to the stop frequency. f. Move the cursor to BREAKPOINT and enter your breakpoint frequency. For two-line LRL calibrations, select a breakpoint equal to the upper frequency of the low frequency LRL line. For a combined LRL and LRM calibration, select a breakpoint equal to the top frequency of the calibration divided by six; for instance, to cover the frequency range 0.04 to 60 GHz, select 10 GHz as the breakpoint. g. When you have made all selections, move the cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press Enter to produce the next menu. 7-42 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION Step 13. LRL/LRM CALIBRATION The next menu, C19, gives you choices for your reflective device. MENU C19 a. Move the cursor to REFLECTION OFFSET LENGTH and key in a value (typically 0.0000 mm). CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS NEXT CAL STEP REFLECTION OFFSET LENGTH +XXX.XXXX mm b. Move the cursor to GREATER THAN Z0 or LESS THAN Z0, depending on whether your reflective device is an Open or a Short. Press the Enter key to select. REFLECTION TYPE GREATER THAN Zo NOTE Choose GREATER THAN Z0 for an Open and LESS THAN Z0 for a Short. LESS THAN Zo MATCH PARAMETERS MATCH IMPEDANCE +XXX.XXX W c. When you complete your choices, move the cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key. MATCH INDUCTANCE +XXXX.XXXX pH PRESS TO SELECT Step 14. When menu C3G reappears, move cursor to START CAL and press Enter. Step 15. Continue the calibration sequence by following the prompts as they appear. Mount the appropriate LRL line substrates when requested in the calibration sequence. MENU C3G CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS For the REFLECTIVE DEVICE and BROADBAND LOAD prompts, remove all substrates from the UTF and allow the lower jaws to short the center conductor. Separate the connector blocks by at least an inch. (The BROADBAND LOAD prompt only appears if you selected to include isolation in menu C5B.) CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS CHANGE MICROSTRIP PARAMETERS XXXXXXXXX START CAL Step 16. Store the calibration. PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 7-43 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION LRL/LRM Calibration (Coaxial) MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION An LRL cal kit is necessary to perform the coaxial calibration. Calibration kits for GPC-7 are available from Maury Microwave and Hewlett Packard. Two line lengths are used as the impedance standard. The calibration frequency range is limited by the difference in the lengths of the two lines. Their length must be different by approximately 90 degrees at the mid-band frequency. A good calibration can be achieved over the range of 18 degrees to 162 degrees making it possible to calibrate LRL over a 9:1 frequency range. LRL calibration is very sensitive to uncalibrated source match. If some padding is placed at the test ports, the directivity and source match will be improved. If the goal is high level measurements, then padding should be included. If low level measurements are being performed, then the padding must be left out. Step 1. Same as Steps 1 through 6 in the Microstrip procedure, except choose COAXIAL in menu C11A. Step 2. When menu C3E (left) appears, if you want to change line impedance, place cursor on REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and press the Enter key. Step 3. When menu C17 (left) appears, move cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE, key in the value, then press the Enter key. Step 4. Same as Steps 9 through 16 in the microstrip procedure. MENU C3E CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS LRL/LRM PARAMETERS REFERENCE IMPEDANCE TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE MENU C17 ENTER REFERENCE IMPEDANCE REFERENCE IMPEDANCE 50.000 W In the coaxial, three-line calibration there are factors you need to be aware of. Note that it is the line length differences that are important to the LRL calibration, namely (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) where L1 is the length of line 1, L2 is the length of line 2, and L3 is the length of line 3. Longer length differences are used for longer wavelengths (lower frequencies). For frequencies up to and including the breakpoint frequency, the larger absolute value of the (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) differences is used. At frequencies above the breakpoint, the smaller absolute value of the (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) differences is used. PRESS WHEN COMPLETE 7-44 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION Consideration must also be given to selecting the breakpoint frequency. Divide the frequency range to satisfy the 9:1 rule for any given pair of lines. The range is thus divided by the frequency breakpoint into the intervals [f1, f2] and [f2, f3]. Based on these intervals, next determine the appropriate length differences; the longer difference is associated with the lower interval [f1, f2]. Note that if the differences are equal to each other, concurrent frequency ranges are implied and only two lines need be used. Select a line 1 reference (L1) around which to place these two differences. Use any combination of positive or negative differences around line 1. The software selects which interval is associated with either of line 2 or line 3 by comparing the absolute values of the differences with line 1. Data from the two lines, which make up the larger absolute difference, are used for the interval [f1, f2]. Data from the two lines, which make up the smaller absolute difference, are used for the interval [f2, f3]. 37XXXD OM 7-45 TRM CALIBRATION LRL/LRM Calibration (Waveguide) MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION The waveguide procedure is very similar to the coaxial and microstrip procedures already described. Step 1. MENU C3F CONFIRM CALIBRATION PARAMETERS The only difference is with menu C3F (left). For a waveguide calibration, move the cursor to WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF FREQ and press Enter. This action calls menu C15B, which lets you enter the waveguide cutoff frequency. After doing so, you are returned to menu C3F. LRL/LRM PARAMETERS WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF FREQ TEST SIGNALS START CAL PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the Microstrip procedure, page 7-37, except choose WAVEGUIDE in menu C11A. Step 2. When menu C3F reappears, place cursor on CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS and press the Enter key. Step 3. Follow Steps 9 through 13, page 7-40, in the Microstrip procedure. MENU C15B ENTER WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF FREQUENCY WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF FREQ XX.XXXX GHz PRESS WHEN COMPLETE 7-8 7-46 TRM CALIBRATION The TRM Calibration procedure is the same as the LRL/LRM procedure, previous page, except that certain parameters have been set by default so that the calibration is simpler to perform (e.g., the L-parameter in the LRM calibration has been set to equal a length of 0 mm for a through, and the R-parameter is set for a short). 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION 7-9 MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION The Merge Cal Files application allows the user to combine two or more calibrations that were performed on the VNA, but having differing frequency ranges. This is of particular importance when a wide band RF calibration cannot be performed because wide band calibration components, such as loads and shorts, are not available. Such a case exists when using Anritsu’s 37X97D wideband VNAs. Here, the preferred calibration method would be to perform a standard method (SOLT) coaxial calibration in the 0.04 to 65 GHz bands, a triple offset-short (SSST) coaxial calibration in the 65 to 110 GHz band, then combine the calibrations to yield a wideband 0.04 to 110 GHz calibration that can be saved and recalled. The resultant calibration file setup will be the first calibration file setup except that the frequency points and RF correction values of the second calibration file will be intermingled with the frequency points and RF correction values of the first.The start and stop frequencies will be adjusted to reflect the lowest and highest frequencies in the intermingling. If there are frequency points in common, then the correction values of the first file will be used and that frequency and data point in the second file will be discarded. Both RF calibration files must be the same type, that is, full 12 Term, 1 Path 2 Port Forward, 1 Path 2 Port Reverse, etc., and the total number of frequency points of the first and second files added together cannot exceed 1601. In most cases, it doesn’t matter which calibration file is chosen as the first calibration file; however, if the VNA is a 37397C used in a Broadband setup that crosses the 65 GHz switchpoint, it is advised that the first calibration data be from the lower frequency band and the second calibration data be from the higher frequency band. Additionally, if the higher frequency band calibration starts at 65.0 GHz, the lower frequency band calibration must end at 65.0 GHz. This will prevent a spike at the 65.0 GHz band switch point. NOTE Refer to Appendix A, Front Panel Menus, for descriptions of menus MRG1, EXT_MRG1, MRG2, and MRG3 that relate to this application. 37XXXD OM 7-47/7-48 Chapter 8 Measurements Table of Contents 8-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-2 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-3 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 8-4 GROUP DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 8-5 ACTIVE DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 8-6 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 8-7 ADAPTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 8-8 GAIN COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Power and VNAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Swept Power Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 8-9 RECEIVER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Set-on Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 Receiver Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Receiver Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 8-10 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 Embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 De-embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 8-11 OPTICAL APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68 Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements . . . 8-74 Chapter 8 Measurements 8-1 8-2 INTRODUCTION This section discusses typical measurements that can be made with the Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer. TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION This discussion provides information on general measurement considerations and transmission and reflection measurements using the 37XXXD. Setup and Calibration To get started, apply power to the system. After turning on the power, allow the system to warm up for at least 60 minutes before operation. In normal operation, the system comes on line in the state that it was in when last turned off. If you want to return the system to its default state, you can do so by pressing the Default Program key twice. The default parameters provide a known starting point. For example, they reset the start and stop frequencies for maximum sweep width, the source control to 0 dB, and the display resolution to 401 data points. The Sweep Setup menu should now appear on the display (it also can be displayed using the Setup Menu key). If you like, you can select a new start frequency, stop frequency, or source power. You can further reduce the power level at Ports 1 and 2 with the built-in attenuators. Using the Reduced Test Signals option in the Sweep Setup menu, you can change the setting of the Port 1 source attenuator over a range of from 0 to 70 dB. The Port 2 test attenuator has a range of from 0 to 40 dB (in 10 dB steps) (if Option 6 is installed). 37XXXD OM 8-3 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS Install the calibration kit devices to the test ports as instructed by the U3 menu. Both the capacitance coefficients for the Open and the offset lengths for the Open and Short can be modified or defined. Selecting the Begin Cal key starts the calibration process. The Calibration menus step you through the calibration process, as follows: Select the type of calibration desired. Select the frequency range of calibration. Using the Data Points key, you can choose from 51 up to 1601 measurement data points. When the calibration is completed, you can store the calibration data on a disk. You are now ready to install the test device and proceed with the measurement. At this point you have a number of measurement options to consider such as displays, markers, limits, outputs, sweeps, and enhancements. You can select any of the available graph types and display them for any calibrated parameter on any of the four channels (if a 12-term calibration was performed). 8-4 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION Up to six markers are available. Using the Marker Menu, you can set the frequency of each one, you can set each one in the delta marker mode, and you can set each marker’s level to maximum or minimum. In some cases—such as in a production environment—limit lines are desirable. Options within the menu called up using the Limits key, provide for one or two flat, sloped, or single-point-segmented limit lines for each channel. These limit lines function with all of the graph types, including Smith and admittance. The color of the limit lines (blue) differs from that of the measurement trace. This allows for easy analysis of results. The Hard Copy Menu key menu (Figure 8-1) gives you a choice between a printer and a colored-pen plotter. It also lets you select menus from which you may chose from a variety of print or plot options.To output the display, press the Start Print key. The default setting provides for a full display printout from the associated printer. SELECT OUTPUT DEVICE PRINTER PLOTTER OUTPUT OPTIONS SETUP OUTPUT HEADERS OPERATIONS PRINT OPTIONS PLOT OPTIONS PRESS TO SELECT Figure 8-1. 37XXXD OM Output Menu 8-5 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS To label the output, select Setup Output Headers in the Output Menu or press the Device ID key. On the output to the printer, plotter, or disk. a menu then appears that lets you specify the device name/serial number, the date, the operator’s name, and user comments (Figure 8-2). DATA OUTPUT HEADERS MODEL ON FILTER DEVICE ID ON 870124 DATE ON 28-_JUNE_87 Á OPERATOR ON MIKE COMMENTS SELECT NAME FILTER_#2—ABCDEFGHIJKLM NOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456788-_/# DEL CLEAR DONE TURN KNOB TO INDICATE CHARACTER OR FUNCTION PRESS TO SELECT NUMBERS MAY ALSO BE SELECTED USING KEYPAD Figure 8-2. Label Menus Sweep frequencies can be changed with the calibration applied as long as the frequencies are between the calibration start and stop frequencies. Additionally, a marker sweep can be selected from the Setup Menu. This allows you to sweep between any two active markers as long as the frequency of each falls between the calibrated start and stop frequencies. Using the Data Points key, you can select the number of data points for optimal resolution-vs-speed. 8-6 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION Finally, you can enhance the measurement data by reducing the IF bandwidth and using averaging and/or smoothing. q Change the IF bandwidth by selecting the Video IF BW key q Set the averaging and smoothing values by selecting the Avg/Smooth Menu key q Turn on the averaging and smoothing using the Trace Smooth and Average keys, which have LED’s to let you know that the enhancement is being applied Measurement Discussion Before going any further, let us take a few moments to review some basic principles of network measurements. First, we apply incident energy to the input of a test device. If the device’s input impedance differs from the measurement system’s impedance, some of that energy is reflected. The remainder is transmitted through the device. We call the ratio of reflected-to-incident energy the reflection coefficient. The ratio of transmitted-to-incident energy we call the transmission coefficient (Figure 8-3). B A S IC M E A S U R E M E N T P R IN C IP L E S IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y R E F L E C T E D E N E R G Y R E F L E C T IO N C O E F F IC IE N T = T R A N S M IS S IO N C O E F F IC IE N T = Figure 8-3. T R A N S M IT T E D E N E R G Y D U T R E F L E C T E D E N E R G Y IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y T R A N S M IT T E D E N E R G Y IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y Basic Measurement Principles These ratios are complex quantities that have magnitude and phase components. Using vector representation, the vector magnitude is the ratio of reflected-to-incident magnitude (or transmitted-to-incident magnitude), while the vector phase is the difference in phase between the incident energy and the reflected/transmitted energy (Figure 8-4). 37XXXD OM 8-7 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS IM A G IN A R Y M A G N IT U D E P H A S E R E A L R E F L E C T IO N C O E F F IC IE N T = P H A S E = Figure 8-4. R E F L E C T IO N (M A G N IT U D E ) IN C ID E N T (M A G N IT U D E ) IN C ID E N T (P H A S E ) - R E F L E C T E D (P H A S E ) Magnitude/Phase Vector The measurement reference for the incident energy is the point at which the device connects to the measurement system. We call this point the reference plane. The incident energy at the reference plane is defined as having a magnitude of 1 and a phase of 0 degrees. We establish this during the calibration. q The ratio of reflected and transmitted energy to the incident energy can be represented by a number of different measurements and units, as shown below. q The default display for reflection measurements is the Smith chart. The default display for transmission measurements is the Log Magnitude and Phase graph. The Smith chart is a convenient way to display device impedance and is a useful aid for the graphical design and analysis of microwave circuits (Figure 8-5). SMITH CHART INDUCTIVE 50 Ω CAPACITIVE Figure 8-5 8-8 Smith Chart Display 1 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION Let us assume both that our system is already calibrated and that we have equalized the system for the test port in use. We would then 1. Connect the Short: A Short always appears as a dot at the left-most edge of the Smith chart’s horizontal axis. 2. Connect a Termination: Now you will see another dot located at the center (1+j0) of the chart (this assumes a 50-ohm load). 3. Connect the Open: An Open appears as an arc on the chart’s right edge. This is due to the fringing capacitance of the Open standard (Figure 8-6). SMITH CHART TERMINATION SHORT OPEN ARC Figure 8-6. 37XXXD OM Smith Chart Display 2 8-9 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS Now let’s perform a reflection measurement on a 20 dB attenuator over the 1 to 18 GHz range. We need to determine the setup, calibration, and measurement requirements. A known good starting point is to reset with Default Program parameters. Since our measurement lies between 1 and 18 GHz, set the Start and Stop frequencies using the Sweep Setup menu that appears on the display following system reset. Let’s perform a simple Reflection Only calibration, which uses an open, a short, and a broadband load. To do this, press the Begin Cal key and follow the directions in the menu area. When you complete the calibration, the “CHANNEL 1 WITH S11” Smith chart appears on the display. Now: 1. Select the Log Magnitude display and install the attenuator. 2. Select Auto Scale to optimize the display data. 3. Use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum impedance. 8-10 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION Now let us perform a transmission measurement on the same 20 dB attenuator over the same frequency range. We will follow the same steps as before, but this time we will use additional features. Once again, reset the system using the Default Program key. In this calibration we will select the N-Discrete Frequencies menu option and step all frequencies in increments of 50 MHz. When the calibration is complete, Channel 1 will display “S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION WITH LOG MAGNITUDE AND PHASE.” You can use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum values of the attenuators insertion loss. 37XXXD OM 8-11 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN 8-3 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS This discussion provides methods and techniques for making gain and low-signal-level measurements. It is divided into 37XXXD system considerations and test device considerations. 37XXXD System Considerations The 37XXXD system is limited in its ability to test low-signal levels by its dynamic range and signal-to-noise-power ratio. First we will discuss receiver dynamic range, which is the difference between the maximum and minimum acceptable signal levels (Receiver Dynamic Range = Pmax – Pmin). Receiver Dynamic Range The dynamic range of the 37XXXD is limited by the 0.1 dB compression level of the samplers at high signal levels. It is further limited at low signal levels by leakage signals and noise. Figure 8-7 shows the detected output signal as a function of the power level at the sampler. The 0.1 dB compression level is on the order of –10 dBm. The 37XXXD is designed such that all other conversions compress at a much greater level, which leaves the samplers as the main source of nonlinearity. C O M P R E S S IO N L E V E L -1 0 D E T E C T E D P O W E R O U T P U T (d B m ) 0 .1 d B C O M P R E S S IO N -1 0 P O W E R L E V E L A T IN P U T T O (d B m ) Figure 8-7. S A M P L E R Compression at 0.1 dB The small signal response is limited by errors due to noise and leakage signals. The leakage signals are both from within the 37XXXD and at the device-under-test (DUT) connectors. 8-12 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN The detected signal is the vector sum of the desired signals, the noise signals, and the leakage signals. These signals introduce an error or uncertainty (Figure 8-8). D E T E C T E D O U T P U T S IG N A L U N C E R T A IN T Y RNAY M G A II N O IS E S IG N A L L E A K A G E O R F A L S E S IG N A L M E A S U R E D S IG N A L A C T U A L S IG N A L P H A S E E R R O R R E A L Figure 8-8. Amplitude and Phase Uncertainty Some of the possible leakage paths for the 37XXXD are the transfer switch, the frequency conversion module, and the DUT. The system limits these leakages to greater than 100 dB. The 12-term error correction can reduce this leakage to better than 110 dB at 18 GHz and 90 dB at 40 GHz. NOTE We recommend using an isolation cell to decrease leakage signals for sensitive measurements. For best results, increase the default averaging value and decrease the default IF bandwidth setting during calibration and measurement. Using higher enhancement during the measurement than the calibration will not result in any accuracy improvements. The DUT connectors should have internally captivated center pins. Those connectors which use external pins to captivate the center conductor should have silver loaded epoxy on the pins to reduce radiation to better than 80 dB. Signal-to-Noise-Power Ratio The signal-to-noise-power ratio for each of the test or reference channels is as shown. The “signal power” is the power level of the 80 kHz IF signal at the internal synchronous detectors, and the “noise power” is the total power contained within the bandwidth of the bandpass filter at 80 kHz. The uncertainty, or error, in a measurement is a function of the amplitude of leakage signals and of the noise level. The uncertainty in the measurement of magnitude and phase of the S-parameters are calculable and shown in Figures 8-9 and 8-10. 37XXXD OM 8-13 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS M A X U N C E R T A IN T Y F O R M A G N IT U D E A S A F U N C T IO N O F S /N R A T IO 1 0 0 .0 1 0 .0 M A X IM U M U N C E R T A IN T Y (d B m ) 1 .0 .1 .0 1 .0 0 1 .0 0 0 1 0 Figure 8-9. 1 0 5 0 6 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 S IG N A L /N O IS E R A T IO (d B ) The Effect of S/N Ratio On Magnitude Measurements (Noise Only) M A X U N C E R T A IN T Y F O R P H A S E A S A F U N C T IO N O F S /N R A T IO 1 0 0 .0 1 0 .0 M A X IM U M U N C E R T A IN T Y (D E G R E E S ) 1 .0 .1 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 S IG N A L /N O IS E R A T IO (d B ) Figure 8-10. 8-14 The Effect of S/N Ratio On Phase Measurements (Noise Only) 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN The most difficult types of measurements are those that exercise the full dynamic range of the 37XXXD, such as filters (Figure 8-11. Filter measurements are examples of where one must observe both low-insertion loss (in the passband) and high attenuation (in the stop band). B A N D P A S S F IL T E R S 2 1 d B < 1 d B P A S S B A N D 0 d B > 5 0 d B S T O P B A N D F R E Q U E N C Y Figure 8-11. Filter Measurements There are two techniques that you can use to optimize the signal-to-noise ratio. They are (1) maximizing the RF signal level and (2) using signal enhancement. To maximize the RF signal level, use the default settings of the 37XXXD. The 37XXXD provides two enhancements for improving the signal-to-noise ratio: IF bandwidth reduction and averaging. Reducing the IF bandwidth is a primary method for enhancing accuracy. The 37XXXD has a choice of four bandwidths available from the front panel: Maximum (10 kHz), Normal (1 kHz), Reduced (100 Hz), and Minimum (10 Hz). The noise level should decrease by a factor equal to the square root of the IF bandwidth. Using IF Bandwidth reduction makes for faster measurements than with the use of an equivalent amount of averaging. 37XXXD OM 8-15 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS Averaging is another way to improve accuracy. The improvement is proportional to the square root of the number of averages. Two types of averaging are supported: Sweep-by-sweep and point-by-point. Point-by-point averaging works by collecting multiple measurements while at each frequency point and then averaging them together. Sweep-by-sweep averaging works by performing multiple complete sweeps and averaging the individual the individual frequency points by taking data from the different sweeps. The primary difference is the amount of time between samples at a given frequency point (short for point-by-point, longer for sweep-by-sweep). Sweep-by-sweep averaging may produce lower trace noise because the averaging time is more likely to exceed the coherence time of the noise source. The disadvantage is that any slow drift or transient response of the device under test will be lost in the averaging process. Sweep-by-sweep is hence less suitable for use during device tuning. Conversely, point-by-point averaging will better preserve device tuning response or device drift. It may, however, result in slightly elevated trace noise (relative to sweep-by-sweep) since the measurement time may be less than the coherence time of the noise source. Figure 8-12 shows the measured reduction in noise due to bandwidth and averaging. M E A S U R E M E N T S O N A 7 0 d B A T T E N U A T O R A L L D A T A N O R M A L IZ E D T O A 1 k H z IF B A N D W ID T H A N D 1 A V E R A G E 1 0 K H z (IF B W ) 7 .0 3 .5 1 K H z R E L A T IV E 1 .4 N O IS E (d B ) 1 0 0 H z .7 .3 5 .1 4 1 2 5 1 0 2 0 5 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 5 0 0 N U M B E R O F A V E R A G E S Figure 8-12. Reduction in Noise Using Averaging Example: Using 1 kHz BW reduction and 10 averages, you would increase the signal-to-noise ratio by 7.6 dB but would lengthen the time required for the measurement by a factor of 4.3. This example assumes a constant signal power. 8-16 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN Test Device (DUT) Considerations In order to test a device, the required input RF level and the expected device output RF level must be determined. The RF level at Port 1 must be set for the device input RF power level required. Attenuation can be added in steps of 10 dB up to 70 dB using the built-in source attenuator. Amplification can be added by removing the front panel loop and adding an external amplifier. Before calibration, ensure that the test setup is correct by setting the power level and adding attenuation as needed. 37XXXD OM 8-17 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS The 37XXXD uses enhancements in the calibration to ensure a wide dynamic range. It automatically selects 1 kHz IF bandwidth and varies the number of averages with the calibration device. Terminations require the most averages. If desired, the Video IF bandwidth and number of averages can be specified for the calibration measurements. Using 100 averages (Avg = 100) appears to be sufficient for most measurements. To obtain the maximum performance from the 37XXXD for measurements of attenuation, you can use the capability of the N discrete frequency calibration to spot check measurements in the frequency band of interest. 8-18 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN Wide Dynamic Range Device - Filter Since you do both low-insertion-loss and high- attenuation measurements simultaneously, use the maximum RF signal level and no attenuation. Selecting the 1 kHz Video IF BW setting and 100 averages will likely suffice for this kind of measurement (Figure 8-13). B A N D P A S S F IL T E R S 2 1 d B < 1 d B P A S S B A N D 0 d B > 5 0 d B S T O P B A N D F R E Q U E N C Y Figure 8-13. Filter Measurements High Gain Device - FET This device has a typical 15 dB gain and requires an input level of about –30 dBm. Set the Port 1 Source Attenuator to 30 dB. Since the device RF output level is –15 dBm (–30 dBm + 15 dB[gain] = –15 dBm) no attenuation is needed at Port 2. Medium Power Device - Amplifier Measure the small signal parameters of a 10 dB gain device that requires an input power level of 0 dBm. Here, Port 1 will have no attenuation. The device RF output level is 10 dBm. This level equals 10 dBm (0 dBm + 10 dB[gain] = 10 dBm) into Port 2 and will cause compression in the measurement. At least 10 dB of test attenuation will be needed at Port 2, which will reduce the Port 2 RF level to 0 dB. 37XXXD OM 8-19 GROUP DELAY 8-4 GROUP DELAY MEASUREMENTS Group delay is the measure of transit time through a device at a particular frequency. Ideally, we want to measure a constant—or relatively constant—transit time over frequency. The top waveform shown in Figure 8-14 is measured at one frequency. The bottom waveform is identical to the first, simply delayed in time. M A G N IT U D E t Figure 8-14. 0 t T IM E 1 Two Waveforms Delayed in Time Referring to Figure 8-15, the first waveform shown is the original waveform. It is made up of many frequency components. After traveling through a device the signal is delayed in time. Some frequencies are delayed more than others and thus our waveform does not have exactly the same shape as before. M A G N IT U D E IN P U T O U T P U T T IM E Figure 8-15. Waveform with Frequency Differences When delay is nonlinear, as shown above, distortion occurs. By measuring group delay with a network analyzer you can characterize the distortion that occurs from a signal traveling through your test device. 8-20 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GROUP DELAY When designing components it is important to measure group delay so that you can compensate for any distortion caused by the component. You may be able to tune the device so as to optimize the performance of group delay over the frequency range of interest. Outside of the specified frequency range, the group delay may or may not be linear. So how is group delay measured? Signals travel too fast to enable measuring the input and output times of each frequency component. Consequently, we must use mathematical calculations to derive the group delay from the phase slope. Group delay is mathematically represented by the following equations: t = - - dq -1 dq -1 dq 1 Dq = = = dw 2p df 360 df 2p Df What this equation shows is that group delay is a measure of the change in phase with relation to the change in frequency. The change in frequency is referred to as an aperture. Df = Aperture To measure group delay the frequency aperture must be selected. Depending on the size of aperture, different levels of precision can result for the measurement of group delay. Aperture = Frequency Range # Of Data Points A wide aperture results in a loss of fine-grain variations but gives more sensitivity in the measurement of time delay. A small aperture gives better frequency resolution, but at the cost of lost sensitivity. Thus, for any comparison of group delay data you must know the aperture used to make the measurement (Figure 8-16). M A G N IT U D E A P E R T U R E T O O A P E R T U R E T O O W ID E N A R R O W F R E Q U E N C Y Figure 8-16. 37XXXD OM Waveforms With Aperture Differences 8-21 GROUP DELAY MEASUREMENTS Let us take a look at a group delay measurement made on the Anritsu 37347D Vector Network Analyzer. Group delay, as a measurement option, can be found in the Graph Type menu. After selecting the option, the VNA displays the data in a time-vs-frequency graph, or to be more exact, a group-delay-vs-frequency graph (Figure 8-17). S 2 1 F O R W A R D G R O U P D E L A Y 3 .0 0 0 0 Figure 8-17. T R A N S M IS S IO N R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S G H z 6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV 9 .0 0 0 0 Group Delay-vs-Frequency Graph The 37XXXD automatically selects the frequency spacing between data points—that is, the aperture. Notice that this value is displayed on the screen with the measurement (Figure 8-18). S 2 1 F O R W A R D G R O U P D E L A Y 3 .0 0 0 0 Figure 8-18. 8-22 T R A N S M IS S IO N R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S G H z 6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV 9 .0 0 0 0 Group Delay Screen Showing Aperture 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GROUP DELAY The aperture defaults to the smallest setting for the frequency range and number of data points selected. This value is displayed in the Set Scale key menu when measuring group delay (Figure 8-19). S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N G R O U P D E L A Y 3 .0 0 0 0 Figure 8-19. R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S G H z 6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV 9 .0 0 0 0 37XXXD Aperture Group delay applications are found throughout the microwave industry, although the majority of such measurements are made in the telecommunications area. One occurrence of group delay that you may have experienced is with a long-distance telephone call. Occasionally a phone call can be disturbing because of the delay in time from when you speak and when the other person responds. If there is simply a delay, then time delay—or linear group delay—has occurred. But if the voices are also distorted, then non-linear group delay has occurred. It is this distortion that we must avoid. We can avoid linear group delay by measuring group delay both during the design and development stages and during recalibration in the field. One final group-delay application is found in the development of components. In this application, group delay is measured for the transit time of a signal through the device. When time is of the essence in a fast switching system, as in a modern computer, the travel time through a device is critical. 37XXXD OM 8-23 ACTIVE DEVICE 8-5 ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS Active devices are key components in microwave systems. The measurements that are made on active devices are similar to those made on passive devices. Active devices come in many shapes and sizes. In most cases we are going to have to develop a fixture in which to mount the device. Active devices require bias voltages, and in many cases they are easily damaged. High gain amplifiers may saturate with input signals of –50 dBm. With active devices, we have a new set of measurement requirements. The 373XXD has been designed to help you make these types of measurements. It includes one 70 dB step attenuator (60 dB for 37377D and 37397D) used to adjust the Port 1 power level. A second 40 dB step attenuator is also included (with Option 6) in the forward transmission path to allow measurement of high gain devices without sacrificing reverse transmission and reflection measurements (S12, S22). Bias tees on each port are used to bias the device via the test port center conductor. This approach to bias is useful for testing transistors; however, MMIC’s usually require bias injection at other points (Figure 8-20). B ia s T e e s V R F IN Figure 8-20. 8-24 B IA S T E S T P O R T Bias Tee 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS ACTIVE DEVICE Test fixtures are necessary for mounting the device so that it can be measured in our coaxial (or waveguide) measuring system (Figure 8-21). Figure 8-21. Active Device Test Fixture Now we have an interesting situation. While we can measure the performance at the connector—which is the calibration plane—what we really want to know is how our device performs (Figure 8-22). F E T G P C -7 G P C -7 S S Figure 8-22. 1 1 1 1 M View of a Test Device You can consider the device embedded in the fixture and can measure the S-parameters of the fixture with the device installed. The most elementary situation is a system in which the test fixture is electrically ideal or transparent. In this case, the solution is simple—merely move the reference plane out to the device (Figure 8-23). 37XXXD OM 8-25 ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS 5 0 O H M L IN E G P C -7 D U T N O Figure 8-23. L O S S , R E F L E C T IO N L E S S Simple Example of De-Embedding In some cases—depending on the fixture or the device being measured—this is satisfactory. But when it is not, we need to employ other techniques. One of the reasons that moving the reference plane out to the device does not always work, is that the test fixture includes a transition from coax to a structure such as microstrip, coplanar waveguide, or stripline (Figure 8-24). A L U M IN A C A R R IE R F E T G R O U N D IN P U T G R O U N D C O P L A N A R L A U N C H E R Figure 8-24. G R O U N D IN P U T G R O U N D C O P L A N A R L A U N C H E R Coax-to-Substrate Transition Engineers have come to grips with the general problem. However, there is no established standard approach. Two of the more common approaches are to calibrate the fixture as a part of the analyzer, and to characterize the fixture and compute the desired result. 8-26 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS ACTIVE DEVICE In the discussion on calibration we saw that the calibration components establish the reference plane and determine the quality of the measurement. If we have a good Open, Short and Z0 load to place at the end of a microstrip line, we can calibrate the system at the point of measurement. Figure 8-25 shows some of the special test-fixture calibration standards that are available. Figure 8-25. 5 0 O H M 2 4 0 /5 2 - O C T H R U L IN E O P E N 1 8 0 /8 2 - S C 2 4 0 /5 2 - S C O F F S E T S H O R T O F F S E T S H O R T Special Test Fixtures These special calibration kits are far from perfect, but they are superior to our perfect transmission line assumption. You may also have heard of the probe stations built to permit on-wafer calibration measurements. The Open, Short, termination approach provides three known standards that permit the analyzer to solve for three unknowns (Figure 8-26). P R O B E P R O B E O P E N C IR C U IT (IN A IR ) 1 0 0 O H M 1 0 0 O H M 5 0 O H M T E R M IN A T IO N P R O B E P R O B E P R O B E S H O R T C IR C U IT 5 0 O H M T H R O U G H L IN E Figure 8-26. 37XXXD OM Solving for Unknowns 8-27 ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS CAUTION You should turn off or disconnect the bias supplies during the calibration, since you are using a Short as the calibration standard. It is also possible to use three known impedances. For instance, a varactor with three voltages applied (Figure 8-27). S P E C IA L C A L IB R A T IO N K IT S C 1 C 2 C IS V A R IE D B Y C H A N G IN G V O L T A G E C 3 N O T P E R F E C T E IT H E R Figure 8-27. Three Known Impedances The second approach is to model the fixture. Modeling is elegant but of limited use due to the non-ideal characteristics of the fixture. Modeling can be accomplished in a CAD system. In summary, there are quite a variety of approaches—all with their own characteristic pitfalls. Engineers try to choose the most appropriate technique for their application. 8-28 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS 8-6 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL The Multiple Source Control mode permits independent control of the 37XXXD source, receiver, and an external Anritsu synthesizer (67XXB, 68XXXB, MG36XXA/B), without the need of an external controller (Figure 8-28). 37XXXD VNA. 1. Remove a1 loop on the front panel (Opt. 15 only). 2. Set up equipment as shown. 3. Normalize the data trace with the standard mixer installed. 4. Subsequent mixers can be tested for magnitude or phase match with respect to the "Standard Mixer." . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement To a1 In (Opt. 15). Power Divider RF Phase-Lock Mixer. Mixer 2 LO I.F. I.F. Mixer 1 LO RF Standard Mixer. Power Divider Figure 8-28. Test Setup for Mixer Measurement Using Multiple Source Control Operation Operation in this mode requires Option 15. Removing the reference loop lets you isolate the receiver from the source. This permits testing of frequency converters such as mixers. The software lets the frequency ranges and output powers of the two sources be specified. A frequency sweep can comprise up to five separate bands, each with independent source and receiver settings for convenient testing of frequency translation devices such as mixers. Up to five sub-bands (harmonics) can be tested in one sweep. Control Formula Multiple Source control is specified as a displayed frequency range partitioned into from one-to-five consecutive bands. For each band Source 1, Source 2, and receiver frequencies may be interdependently specified per the formula: Source 1 = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz) Source 2 = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz) Receiver = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz) where, the multiplier, divisor and frequency offset can be entered specific to the DUT. 37XXXD OM 8-29 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL MENU U1 SELECT UTILITY FUNCTION OPTIONS GPIB ADDRESSES DISPLAY INSTRUMENT STATE PARAMS MEASUREMENTS Multiple Source Control Pre-operational Setup The two sources receive control information from the 37XXXD VNA. The GPIB address assigned to the external source must be identical to the address contained in the data directed to the source by the 37XXXD VNA. Assure source/VNA address compatibility as follows: Step 1. Install Sources 1 and 2 on the Dedicated GPIB bus. Step 2. Press the Utility Menu key. GENERAL DISK UTILITIES CAL COMPONENT UTILITIES . AUTOCAL UTILITIES COLOR CONFIGURATION - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement DATA ON(OFF) DRAWING BLANKING FREQUENCY INFORMATION SET DATA/TIME PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF MENU 7 GPIB ADDRESSES Utility Menu Step 3. Move cursor to GPIB ADDRESSES and press Enter, when menu U1 (left) appears. Step 4. When menu GP7 (left) appears, observe that the address number is correct. If necessary, use the keypad to enter a new address. IEEE 488.2 GPIB INTERFACE ADDRESS 6 DEDICATED GPIB INTERFACE EXTERNAL SOURCE 1 4 EXTERNAL SOURCE 2 5 PLOTTER 8 POWER METER 23 FREQUENCY COUNTER 7 8-30 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL Multiple Source Control Operation MENU OPTNS OPTIONS Step 5. Press the Option Menu key. TRIGGERS REAR PANEL OUTPUT . DIAGNOSTICS MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG RF ON/OFF DURING RETRACE PRESS TO SELECT MENU OM1 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL Option Menu Step 6. When menu OPTIONS (left) appears, move cursor to MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL and press the Enter key. Step 7. When menu OM1(left) appears, move cursor to DEFINE BANDS and press the Enter key. This brings menu OM 1 to the screen. DEFINE BANDS SOURCE CONFIG MULTIPLE SOURCE MODE OFF STANDBY ON MORE PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 8-31 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL Step 8. MENU OM2 DEFINE BANDS BAND 1 DISPLAYED FREQ RANGE Band 1 must start at the beginning of the frequency range and end at either the user-specified stop frequency or the end of the frequency range. BAND STOP F XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz BAND FUNCTIONS EDIT SYSTEM EQUATIONS Band 2 must begin at the next point after band 1 ends and end at either the user-specified stop frequency or the end of the frequency range. STORE BAND 1 BANDS STORED: (1 2 3 4 5) SET MULTIPLE SOURCE MODE PRESS TO SELECT Step 9. Move cursor to BAND; select BAND 1 by entering “1” using the keypad or rotary knob. Step 10. Move cursor to BAND START F, and use keypad or rotary knob to enter the band 1 start frequency. Step 11. Move cursor to BAND STOP F, and enter the band 1 stop frequency. Step 12. Move cursor to EDIT SYSTEM EQUATIONS and press the Enter key. Step 13. When menu OM3 (left) appears, select SOURCE 1. Step 14. Move cursor to MULTIPLIER and use keypad or rotary knob to enter desired multiplier for Source 1. This is the multiplier term in the following equation: MENU OM3 EDIT SYSTEM EQUATIONS EQUATION TO EDIT SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 Freq = (Multiplier/Divisor) X (F + Offset Frequency) RECEIVER EQUATION SUMMARY C.W. DIVISOR XX OFFSET FREQ XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT 8-32 Step 15. Move cursor to DIVISOR and use keypad or rotary knob to enter desired DIVISOR for source 1. This is the divisor term given in the above equation. Step 16. Move cursor to either OFFSET FREQUENCY, and use keypad or rotary knob to enter desired offset frequency for Source 1; or C.W., and press Enter to toggle C.W. to OFF. OFF MULTIPLIER XX Coincident with menu OM2 (left), the data display area of the screen presents a chart entitled “RANGES OF BANDS STORED.” This chart shows the band start and band stop frequencies that have been stored for each of five bands. Using menu OM2, the displayed frequency range can be divided into one to five bands. BAND START F XXX.XXXXXX XXX GHz CLEAR ALL DEFINITIONS MEASUREMENTS The Offset Frequency choice is the offset frequency given in the above equation. The C.W. choice removes F from the equation and places Source 1 in the CW mode. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL Step 17. Move the cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press the Enter key. This returns you to menu OM2 (left). Step 18. Move cursor to STORE BAND 1 and press the Enter key. This stores the band start frequency, the band stop frequency and the Source 1, Source 2 and Receiver equations. BAND START F XX.XXXXXX GHz Step 19. Note that the BAND number has incremented to 2. BAND STOP F XX.XXXXXX GHz Step 20. Repeat the above steps to define the start and stop frequencies for bands 2 through 5. Set up the system equations for each band. MENU OM2 DEFINE BANDS BAND 2 DISPLAYED FREQ RANGE BAND FUNCTIONS EDIT SYSTEM EQUATIONS STORE BAND 1 BANDS STORED: ( NONE ) CLEAR ALL DEFINITIONS SET MULTIPLE SOURCE STATE PRESS TO SELECT MENU OM1 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL DEFINE BANDS SOURCE CONFIG MULTIPLE SOURCE MODE OFF STANDBY ON NOTE Except for band 1, the system software constrains all start frequencies to follow the previous band’s stop frequency. However, while frequency bands are being defined or the system equations are being edited, the system is automatically placed in the standby mode. In this mode, frequencies that may be entered are not supervised by the system software; any frequency can be entered and displayed. When the mode is switched to ON (in menu OM1, left), the system software restricts the frequencies to band limits. When the mode is switched to OFF, the frequencies are restricted to system limits. Source Lock Polarity: Normal/Reverse When making frequency translated devices measurements using the Multiple Source Control mode, enter the RF (source 1) and LO (source 2) frequencies. If the LO frequency is lower than the RF frequency, no phase inversion is expected by the VNA. The opposite is true if the LO frequency is higher than the RF frequency. These determinations may be wrong if the DUT is a cascaded multiple conversion device. In that case, determine if the final phase polarity is inverse of what is assumed by the VNA, and set the Source Lock Polarity to Reverse. Failure to do so may cause the RF source to be erroneously locked at a 5 MHz offset. MORE PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 8-33 ADAPTER REMOVAL 8-7 ADAPTER REMOVAL MEASUREMENTS Using adapters in VNA measurement applications can introduce complex errors that add to measurement uncertainty. The VNA Adapter Removal procedure provides for adapter compensation. This on-screen, menu-driven procedure allows the use of a through-line device or adapter with different connector types (non-insertables) on either end to be used for measurement calibration. The electrical effects are subsequently compensated for. The Adapter Removal procedure is described below. NOTE For purposes of explanation, assume that the adapter to be used is a length of rigid coax with a type N male connector on one end and an SMA male connector on the other end. Further assume that the Test Port 1 connector is a type N female and that the Test Port 2 connector is an SMA female (below). MENU APPL APPLICATIONS ADAPTER REMOVAL SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION Type N Male (X’) SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION Electrical Length: 170 ps SMA Male (Y’) Test Adapter E/O MEASUREMENT O/E MEASUREMENT MERGE CAL FILES PRESS TO SELECT Procedure: Step 1. Press the Appl key (below) to display the APPLICATIONS menu (top left). . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement MENU CAR1 ADAPTER REMOVAL 12-TERM CALS FOR X AND Y MUST EXIST IN THE CURRENT DIRECTORY ELECTRICAL LENGTH OF THE ADAPTER +XXX.XXXXX ps REMOVE ADAPTER Appl Step 2. Move the cursor to ADAPTER REMOVAL and press the Enter key. Step 3. Select HELP in the next menu (bottom left) to produce the step-by-step procedure shown in Figure 8-29 (next page). HELP PRESS TO SELECT 8-34 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS ADAPTER REMOVAL Step 4. Figure 8-29. 37XXXD OM Follow the on-line procedure and connect the Adapter’s N male connector (X’) to the N female connector on the VNA’s Test Port 1. Adapter Removal Help Screen 8-35 ADAPTER REMOVAL MEASUREMENTS Step 5. Press the Begin Cal key (below). MENU SR1 SAVE/RECALL FRONT PANEL AND CAL DATA . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement SAVE RECALL SET UP OUTPUT HEADERS PRESS TO SELECT FUNCTION Begin Cal Apply Cal Step 6. Follow the menu prompts and choose to perform a full 12-term calibration. Use the Adapter’s SMA male connector (Y') as Test Port 1 and the VNA’s Test Port 2 connector as Test Port Y (Figure 8-27). Step 7. Press the Save/Recall Menu key (below). MENU SR2 SAVE FRONT PANEL SETUP IN INTERNAL MEMORY . FRONT PANEL SETUP AND CAL DATA ON HARD DISK FRONT PANEL SETUP AND CAL DATA ON FLOPPY DISK Measurement Display Enhancement Save/ Recall Menu PRESS TO SELECT 8-36 - Channels Step 8. Choose SAVE from the displayed menu (top left). Step 9. Choose the appropriate hard or floppy disk location, based on individual preference (Menu SR2, bottom left). Step 10. When prompted, select CREATE NEW FILE and enter a conventional DOS filename, such as YPRIME_Y.CAL. (Store this file in the current directory.) Step 11. Now connect the Adapter’s SMA male end to the VNA’s Test Port 2 SMA female connector. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS MENU CAR1 ADAPTER REMOVAL Step 12. Press the Begin Cal key again. Step 13. Follow the menu prompts; again choose to perform a full 12-term calibration. Now use the Adapter’s Type N male connector (X’) as Test Port 2. Use the VNA’s Test Port 1 connector as Test Port X. Step 14. Save the calibration as described in Steps 7 and 8, above. Give this file a unique filename, such as X_XPRIME.CAL. (Store this file in the current directory.) Step 15. Press the Appl key and chose ADAPTER REMOVAL to return to Menu CAR1 (top left). Step 16. Enter the electrical length of the Adapter (170 ps for the test adapter) in the appropriate place in Menu CAR1. ADAPTER REMOVAL 12-TERM CALS FOR X AND Y MUST EXIST IN THE CURRENT DIRECTORY ELECTRICAL LENGTH OF THE ADAPTER +170.0000 ps REMOVE ADAPTER HELP PRESS TO SELECT NOTE Electrical length does not have to be precise. Plus or minus 5 ps is adequate for this procedure. MENU CAR2 ADAPTER REMOVAL READ CAL FILE OF THE X TEST PORT FROM HARD DISK (ADAPTER ON PORT 2) READ CAL FILE OF THE X TEST PORT FROM FLOPPY DISK (ADAPTER ON PORT 2) PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 37XXXD OM Step 17. Move the cursor to REMOVE ADAPTER, and press the Enter key. Step 18. Move the cursor to the appropriate READ CAL FILE OF THE X TEST PORT . . . , depending on where the calibration data is stored (hard or floppy disk). Press the Enter key. NOTE At this juncture, the “X” calibration file is marked for reading, but not actually read. Both the “X” and “Y” files will be read into the VNA together in the next step. 8-37 ADAPTER REMOVAL MEASUREMENTS Step 19. Move the cursor to the appropriate READ CAL FILE OF THE Y TEST PORT. . . choice (top left) and press the Enter key. Step 20. Observe that the text READING . . . FROM DISK appears in the menu area. Step 21. When the file has finished reading, the procedure is complete and the program returns to the SWEEP SETUP menu (below). MENU CAR3 ADAPTER REMOVAL READ CAL FILE OF THE Y TEST PORT FROM HARD DISK (ADAPTER ON PORT 2) READ CAL FILE OF THE Y TEST PORT FROM FLOPPY DISK (ADAPTER ON PORT 2) PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT If the adapter is still connected, the display will show the S-parameters of the adapter. Any device to be measured with that same connector configuration will be measured in an absolute sense. Also, you may wish to store the resulting Adapter Removal calibration for later use. MENU SU1 SWEEP SETUP START XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz STOP XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz SET CENTER/SPAN XXX DATA POINT(S) XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz STEP SIZE C.W. MODE ON (OFF) XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz MARKER SWEEP DISCRETE FILL HOLD BUTTON FUNCTION TEST SIGNALS PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN/OFF 8-38 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS 8-8 GAIN COMPRESSION GAIN COMPRESSION There are a number of ways to measure Gain Compression. With a VNA two approaches are possible: Swept Frequency Gain Compression (SFGC) and Swept Power Gain Compression (SPGC). The 37XXXD offers a very straightforward approach to each of these measurements. It is normally desirable to make S-parameter measurements in the linear operating region of an amplifier and then observe Compression or amplitude-modulation/phase-modulation (AM/PM) characteristics by increasing the input power to drive the amplifier into it's nonlinear region. The characteristics of the amplifier-under-test (AUT) dictate the operating power levels required for the tests. Prior to making measurements on a specific amplifier the user must determine the desired operating levels. A recommended level for linear region operation is: P = PG – Gain – 15dB (PGC=Nominal l dB compression of the AUT) The actual level is constrained by the power available from the VNA and the built in 70 dB step attenuator. (In the case of the 37XXXD, available power is easily supplemented by the addition of an external amplifier/attenuator combination.) Power input to Port 2 must also be considered as the test should not drive the VNA into nonlinear operation. Typical specifications show 0.1dB compression at a VNA receiver input level of –10 dBm. The receiver signal is derived through a 13 dB coupler from the Port 2 signal. The 37XXXD also includes a 40 dB step attenuator in this path that enables linear operation with input signals as high as 30 dBm (1 watt), the maximum signal level that should be input to Port 2. Higher power levels can be measured by attenuating the signal prior to Port 2. A typical power configuration example that will also be used throughout this section is included in Figure 8-28. A 10 dB pad has been used at both Port 1 and Port 2 to minimize mismatch errors. Power and VNAs It is necessary to measure absolute power to determine Gain Compression. VNA receiver channels are typically down-converters and do not measure power directly. They are, however, linear so that an accurate power calibration at one level will result in a receiver channel that will accurately indicate power in dBm. The 37XXXD firmware supports calibration with the following power meters: Anritsu ML2430A, HP437B, HP438, and Gigatronics 8541C/8542C. These meters differ in the way they handle sensor efficiency (consult the power meter manual), and the 37XXXD does expect to receive corrected data from the power meter. 37XXXD OM 8-39 GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS Gain Compression Power Configuration Amplifier Specifications: Frequency Range: 8 to 12 GHz Gain 25 dB nominal 1 dB Gain Compression (GC) 12 dBm minimum Gain Compression Formula: P = 12 – 25 – 15 = –28 dBm 37369C Setup Default Power: –7 dBm Power Control: –8 dB Port 1 Attenuator: 0 dB External Port 1 Attenuator: 10 dB The above setting result in Port 1 Power: –25 dBm Maximum Amplifier Output Figure 8-28. @15 dBm Coupler Loss: @13 dB Port 2 Attenuator: 10 dB Gain Compression Measurement Plan (Example) Pstop Input Power Phase Output Power Pstart Time Figure 8-29. 8-40 Input Power Input Power Power In (Pi) versus Power Out (Po) Graphical Example 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Errors can result if the proper correction factor is not applied by the power meter, as shown below. Correction Factor (%) Error (dB) 1 0.043 3 0.128 5 0.212 10 0.414 It is desirable to set the power control at or near the minimum (this varies from −20 to−30 dB, depending upon model) when establishing P, as this provides the full ALC range for a power sweep. The vector error correction available in VNAs is dependent upon ratioed S-parameter measurements. Power is measured using a single, unratioed channel; therefore, when power is being measured error correction is turned off. Swept Power Gain Compression A swept power test is done at a CW frequency. The input power will be increased with a step sweep starting at Pstart and ending at Pstop. The step increment is also user defined. This lets you observe the conventional Po vs. Pi presentation or a display of Phase vs. Pi. Figure 8-29 (previous page) illustrates this process. The SPGC process is implemented in the 37XXXD by following the procedure that begins on page 8-43. The test setup required for this procedure is shown in Figure 8-30 (page 8-42). Swept Frequency Gain Compression This is a manual procedure that provides a normalized amplifier response as a function of frequency at Pstart and manually increases the input power while observing the decrease in gain as the amplifier goes into compression. This lets you easily observe the most critical compression frequency of a broadband amplifier. The SFGC process is implemented in the 37XXXD by following the procedure that begins on page 8-52. The test setup required for this procedure is shown in Figure 8-30 (following page). 37XXXD OM 8-41 GAIN COMPRESSION Figure 8-30. 8-42 MEASUREMENTS Test Setup for Gain Compression Measurements 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Swept Power Gain Compression Measurement The following procedures describes the Swept Power Gain Compression Measurement. Step 1. Press the Appl key. MENU APPL ADAPTER REMOVAL . SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement E/O MEASUREMENTS O/E MEASUREMENTS MERGE CAL FILES PRESS TO SELECT Appl NOTE A 12-Term S-parameter calibration is not necessary for gain compression calibration and measurement. If such a calibration is in place, it will be disabled during the gain compression operation. MENU GC2 SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION SET FREQUENCIES Step 2. Move cursor to SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION and press Enter, when menu Appl (top left) appears. Step 3. When menu GC2 (bottom left) appears, follow the directions that appear adjacent to the menu, as described below: P START –25.00 dBm P STOP –5.00 dBm STEP SIZE 1.00 dB ATTENUATION GAIN COMPRESSION POINT (MAX REF) 1.00 dB NOMINAL OFFSET 0.00 dB MORE PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM Move cursor to SET FREQUENCIES, press Enter and select from 1 to 10 frequencies. Enter the frequency value, press a terminator key (e.g. GHz/103/ms/m), then Enter to add the frequency to the list. NOTE The number of frequencies and step size, that is entered later, directly affect the time required for Linear Power Calibration, in a later step. 8-43 GAIN COMPRESSION MENU GC_DF2 SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES INPUT A FREQ, PRESS TO INSERT SWEPT POWER FREQUENCY 12.000000000 GHz CLEAR FREQ NUMBER 1 CLEAR ALL FINISHED, RETURN TO POWER SWEEP SETUP PRESS TO SELECT MEASUREMENTS Move cursor to FINISHED, RETURN TO POWER SWEEP SETUP and press Enter. Move cursor to P START (previous page), set per power plan (Figure 8-28), and press Enter. Move cursor to P STOP (previous page), set per power plan, and press Enter. Move cursor to STEP SIZE (previous page), enter a value, and press Enter. The 1 dB default value is reasonable. This value, along with the number of frequencies entered in a previous step, directly affect the time required for Linear Power Calibration, in a later step. Move cursor to ATTENUATION (previous page) and press Enter. Set power values (bottom left) per power plan. Move cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press Enter when finished. MENU GC_DF2 SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION PORT 1 ATTN 0*10 dB (0 - 70) PORT 2 ATTN 2*10 dB (0 - 40) PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT Move cursor to GAIN COMPRESSION (previous page), enter the desired value (1 dB is typical), and press Enter. Move cursor to NOMINAL OFFSET (previous page), enter the value of any external device(s) connected between the front panel Input and Output connectors. Press Enter when done. In the example use -10 dB. A setting of 0.00 dB is normal when no external devices are connected. Move cursor to MORE (previous page) and press Enter to proceed to the next menu (GC3) (next page). 8-44 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Step 4. MENU GC3 SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION CALIBRATE FOR LINEARITY ([NO] CAL EXIST) Move the cursor to CALIBRATE FOR LINEARITY, press Enter, and follow the instructions that (1) appear adjacent to the follow-on menu and (2) are described below. If a calibration already exists, the menu choice will indicate CAL EXIST in blue letters. LINEARITY ON [OFF] CORRECTION NOTE This step is not required for a successful gain compression measurement; however, linearizing the power from Port 1 (which is what this step does) provides increased accuracy. CALIBRATE RECEIVER ([NO] CAL EXISTS) S21 OPTIONS ([NOT] STORED) AUT TEST TYPES Prepare the power meter as described in the following instructions: GAIN COMPRESSION AM/PM MULTIPLE FREQ GAIN COMPRESSION a. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter. RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE b. Set power meter offset, if required. PREVIOUS MENU c. Connect the power meter to the dedicated GPIB interface and the power sensor to the test port. d. Select . Connect the power sensor to Test Port 1. With START LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION highlighted (bottom left), press Enter to begin the calibration. MENU GC_SU8A CALIBRATE FOR LINEAR POWER FORWARD DIRECTION ONLY START LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM Step 5. Observe LINEARITY CORRECTION choice (top left). If a linearity correction has been performed, it will indicate ON in blue letters. Step 6. Move cursor to CALIBRATE RECEIVER and follow the instructions, as follows: Connect a through line between Test Port 1 and Test Port 2. Be sure to include all components that are part of the measurement path. 8-45 GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then press Enter to store the calibration. MENU GC3 SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION LINEARITY ON [OFF] CORRECTION NOTE It is likely that the trace will be off screen at the bottom of the display. If so, press Autoscale to obtain a discernable trace. If this trace shows vertical instability, then do the following: CALIBRATE RECEIVER ([NO] CAL EXISTS) 1. Press Video IF BW and select REDUCED (100 Hz) from the menu. CALIBRATE FOR LINEARITY ([NO] CAL EXIST) S21 OPTIONS ([NOT] STORED) 2. Press Avg/Smooth Menu and select AVERAGING 100 MEAS. PER POINT from the menu. AUT TEST TYPES GAIN COMPRESSION AM/PM MULTIPLE FREQ GAIN COMPRESSION 3. Press Average to turn averaging on. Step 7. Press Appl to return to the gain compression menu set, and follow the prompts to return to Menu GC3. Repeat Step 6. Step 8. Move the cursor to S21 OPTIONS (top left), select NORMALIZE S21 in the next menu (not shown), then NORMALIZE S21 again (bottom left); then press Enter and follow the menu instructions: RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE PREVIOUS MENU MENU GC_NORM NORMALIZE S21 Remove the through line and connect the amplifier-under-test (AUT) between Port 1 and Port 2. CONNECT AUT AND APPLY BIAS . Apply bias to the AUT. WAIT FOR ONE COMPLETE SWEEP BEFORE STORING Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then press Enter to store the normalization measurement. PRESS TO STORE PRESS TO ABORT 8-46 Step 9. Move the cursor to the desired test and press Enter. The steps that follow presume that gain compression has been selected. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Step 10. Observe that the SWEPT POWER SETUP menu and the dual-trace display resembles that shown below. Step 11. Press Readout Marker (below) for a display of gain compression at the marker frequency. MENU SU3A SWEPT POWER SETUP SWEPT POWER FREQUENCY 9.000000000 GHz P START –25.00 dBm P STOP –5.00 dBm STEP SIZE 1.00 dB POWER SWEEP ON HOLD BUTTON FUNCTION MULTIPLE FREQ GAIN COMPRESSION RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF MENU M7 SEARCH VALUE –1.000dB REFERENCE MAXIMUM VALUE DREF MARKER 0 dB . VALUE AT REFERENCE –0.000 dB - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement SEARCH LEFT SEARCH RIGHT –9.56 dBm SEARCH MRKR VALUES CH1: 13.753dBm CH2: CH3: –1.000 dB CH4: Readout Marker TRACKING ON MARKER READOUT FUNCTIONS 37XXXD OM Step 12. Observe the readout marker values from the displayed menu (left). 8-47 GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS Step 13. MENU SU3A Press Setup Menu (below) to return to SWEPT POWER SETUP menu. SWEPT POWER SETUP SWEPT POWER FREQUENCY 9.000000000 GHz . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement P START –25.00 dBm P STOP –5.00 dBm Setup Menu STEP SIZE 1.00 dB POWER SWEEP ON HOLD BUTTON FUNCTION MULTIPLE FREQ GAIN COMPRESSION Step 14. Move cursor to SWEPT POWER FREQUENCY (top left), select the next frequency from the SET FREQUENCY list, and press Enter. Step 15. Repeat Steps 11 through 13. RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE Step 16. PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Repeat Steps 14 and 15 until all frequencies have been observed. Step 17. To examine the phase performance for a swept input power, AM/PM should be selected. This leads to the two channel display (Channels 2 and 4) with Channel 4 active shown below. The sweep mode is continuous to facilitate tuning, Markers are set to the DReference mode on the active channel. MENU CH2 - 21 REFERENCE PLANE 0.0000mm MARKER 1 -25.00 dBm MARKER TO MAX MARKER TO MIN D(1-2) -15.44 dBm 4.17° MARKER READOUT FUNCTIONS 8-48 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Step 18. Repeat Steps 13 through 16 until all desired frequencies have been observed. Step 19. If desired, a multiple frequency gain compression display can be obtained by selecting MULTIPLE FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION (left) and pressing Enter. Step 20. Move cursor to TEST AUT (top left) and press Enter. Step 21. Observe that the Multiple Frequency Gain Compression display resembles that shown below. Step 22. Make desired selection from menu to copy text and data to hard or floppy disk (top left). Step 23. The power linearity calibration, receiver calibration, and DUT normalized data exists in volatile memory. At this time, the data can be stored for subsequent recall using the SAVE function. MENU GC4 MULTIPLE FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION TEST AUT TEXT DATA TO HARD DISK TEXT DATA TO FLOPPY DISK SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE PRESS TO SELECT NOTE It is prudent to save this calibration; otherwise, it will be destroyed if you move anywhere in the program except between this calibration and the S-parameters menu. 37XXXD OM 8-49 GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS Step 24. Move cursor to RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE and press Enter to exit the gain compression mode. NOTE When exiting the Swept Frequency Power Gain Compression mode, the DUT should be turned off, unless the user has selected the proper attenuator settings for standard swept frequency (S-parameter) operation. 8-50 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Swept Frequency Gain Compression Measurement The following procedure describes the Swept Frequency Gain Compression Measurement. ADAPTER REMOVAL Preliminary: Refer to Figure 8-28 and set the Power Control and Port 1 Attenuator for the values shown in the power plan for the example, or in the power plan constructed for measurement of a test device. These power plan values should also be used in the S-parameter calibration that may be performed using the Begin Cal key and menus. SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION Step 1. MENU APPL Press the Appl key. SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION E/O MEASUREMENTS . O/E MEASUREMENTS - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement MERGE CAL FILES PRESS TO SELECT Appl MENU GC3 Step 2. Move cursor to SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION and press Enter, when menu APPL (top left) appears. Step 3. When menu GC3 (bottom left) appears, follow the directions that appear adjacent to the menu, as described below: SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION NOMINAL OFFSET 0.00 dB CALIBRATE FOR FLATNESS (N0 CAL EXISTS) FLATNESS OFF CORRECTION CALIBRATE RECEIVER [NO CAL EXISTS) NORMALIZE S21 (NOT STORED) GAIN COMPRESSION POINT (0 dB REF) 1.00 dB TEST AUT EXIT APPLICATION 37XXXD OM Move the cursor to NOMINAL OFFSET, enter the value of any external device(s) connected between the front panel Input and Output connectors. Press the Enter key when done. Optionally, move the cursor to CALIBRATE FOR FLATNESS, press Enter and follow the instruction menu as described on the following page. If a calibration already exists, the menu choice will indicate CAL EXIST in blue letters. 8-51 GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS NOTE This step is not required for a successful gain compression measurement; however, calibrating the power from Port 1 (which is what this step does) provides increased accuracy. Prepare the power meter as described in the following instructions: a. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter. b. Set power meter offset, if required. c. Connect the power meter to the dedicated GPIB interface and the power sensor to the test port. d. Select . Connect the power sensor to Port 1. Set the number of power calibration points. MENU GC_SU8A CALIBRATE FOR FLAT PORT POWER FORWARD DIRECTION ONLY 101 POINTS MEASURE 1 PWR POINT EVERY 1 POINT(S) POWER TARGET –25.00 dBm START FLAT POWER CALIBRATION PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT TURN KNOW TO CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS 8-52 If, in a previous menu, data points had been set to 401 points, entering 8 provides 50 power points (every 8th point); entering 4 provides 100 power point (every 4th point)s, and entering 1 provides 401 power points. The VNA interpolates between power calibration frequencies. Enter a POWER TARGET value. Make this value the same as resulting Port 1 power value shown in Figure 8-28 (page 8-40). –25 dBm for the example. With START FLAT POWER CALIBRATION highlighted (bottom left), press Enter to begin the calibration. NOTE When the above calibration finishes, the source power will have been accurately calibrated. In the next step, this power calibration will be transferred via the through line to the receiver. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Step 4. MENU GC1 SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION Move cursor to CALIBRATE RECEIVER and follow the instructions, as follows: NOMINAL OFFSET -10.00 dB Connect a through line between Test Port 1 and Test Port 2. Be sure to include all components that are part of the measurement path. CALIBRATE FOR FLATNESS (]CAL EXISTS) Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then press Enter to store the calibration. FLATNESS CORRECTION AT -25.00 dBm NOTE It is likely that the trace will be off screen at the bottom of the display. If so, press Autoscale to obtain a discernable trace. If this trace shows vertical instability, CALIBRATE RECEIVER (CAL EXISTS) NORMALIZE S21 ([NOT]STORED) · Press Video IF BW and select REDUCED (100 Hz) from the menu GAIN COMPRESSION POINT (0 dB REF) 1.00 dB · Press Avg/Smooth Menu and select AVERAGING 100 MEAS. PER POINT from the menu TEST AUT EXIT APPLICATION · Press Average to turn averaging on Step 5. Press Appl to return to the gain compression menu, and follow the prompts to return to Menu GC1. Repeat Step 4. Step 6. Move the cursor to NORMALIZE S21 (top left), press Enter, and follow the menu instructions (bottom left): MENU GC_SU8A RECEIVER CALIBRATION CONNECT THROUGHLINE BETWEEN TEST PORTS Remove the through line and connect the amplifierunder-test (AUT) between Port 1 and Port 2. INCLUDE ANY COMPONENTS WHICH ARE PART OF THE MEASUREMENT PATH Apply bias to the AUT. Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then press Enter to store the normalization measurement. WAIT FOR ONE COMPLETE SWEEP BEFORE STORING PRESS TO STORE Step 7. Move the cursor to TEST AUT (top left) and press Enter. PRESS TO ABORT 37XXXD OM 8-53 GAIN COMPRESSION 8-54 MEASUREMENTS Step 8. Observe that the dual-trace display resembles that shown below. Step 9. Note that the top display (Channel 1), shows the power out from the AUT. For the example test device, the nominal output power is about 0 dBm with the input at –25 dBm. To better evaluate this device, turn on markers and set the Channel 1 reference to 0 dB, as shown below. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION . Step 10. Press the Ch1 key (top left) to make channel 1 active. Step 11. Press the Marker Menu key (middle left), turn on marker 1, and position it to a desired point on the trace (below). (Press the Readout Marker key for frequency and amplitude information.) Step 12. Press the Appl key to return to the TEST SIGNALS menu (Menu SU2, next page). - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Ch 1 . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Marker Menu . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Appl 37XXXD OM 8-55 GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS Step 13. . Press the Setup Menu key (top left), select POWER CONTROL (bottom left) and increase the value while observing compression in channel 3 (S21). - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement NOTE The rotary knob or the keypad can be used to set the POWER CONTROL value. In using the rotary knob, the displayed value does not change in real time with movement of the control. Change occurs after the rotation of the knob is complete. Setup Menu Step 14. Press the Marker Menu key again, and observe the displayed Ch 3 trace and the marker values from the displayed menu (below). MENU SU2 MENU SU2 TEST SIGNALS MARKER 1 ALL DISPLAYED CHANNELS POWER CONTROL 5.47 dB 0 TO –20.00 dB CH 1 - S11 USER 10.000000 GHz 12.06 dBm PORT 1 ATTN 0 * 10 dB (0 – 70) CH 2 - S12 PORT 1 POWER –1.53 dBm CH 3 - S21 10.000000 GHz -0.992 dB PORT 2 ATTN 0 * 10 dB (0 –40) CALIBRATE FOR FLATNESS (CAL EXISTS) CH 4 - S21 FLATNESS CORRECTION AT –11.53 dBm MARKER READOUT FUNCTIONS MARKER TO MAX MARKER TO MIN PRESS TO SELECT PORT 2 POWER 0.00 dBm EXIT APPLICATION PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Step 15. The power linearity calibration, receiver calibration, and DUT normalized data exists in volatile memory. At this time, the data can be stored for subsequent recall using the SAVE function. NOTE It is prudent to save this calibration; otherwise, it will be destroyed if you move anywhere in the program except between this calibration and the S-parameters menu. 8-56 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION Step 16. Move cursor to RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE and press Enter to exit the gain compression mode. Step 17. Press the Appl key to return to the TEST SIGNALS menu (left), highlight EXIT APPLICATION and press Enter to exit the gain compression measurement area. MENU SU2 TEST SIGNALS POWER CONTROL 5.47 dB 0 TO –20.00 dB PORT 1 ATTN 0 * 10 dB (0 – 70) PORT 1 POWER –1.53 dBm PORT 2 ATTN 0 * 10 dB (0 –40) CALIBRATE FOR FLATNESS (CAL EXISTS) CAUTION When exiting the Swept Frequency Power Gain Compression mode, the DUT should be turned off, unless the user has selected the proper attenuator settings for standard swept frequency (S-parameter) operation. FLATNESS CORRECTION AT –11.53 dBm PORT 2 POWER 0.00 dBm EXIT APPLICATION PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF 37XXXD OM 8-57 RECEIVER MODE 8-9 RECEIVER MODE MEASUREMENTS The Receiver Mode provides three distinct modes of operation: q Sweep/Source Lock mode, phase locks the internal source q Synthesizer/Tracking mode, lets the receiver track a 67XXB, 68XXXB, or 69XXXA synthesizer q Set-On mode, lets the VNA operate as a tuned receiver Source Lock Mode Tracking Mode The Source Lock mode enables the 37XXXD to phase lock to its internal source. In the Tracking Mode, the 37XXXD steers its second local oscillator frequency and phase signal so as to phase-lock itself to the reference signal. Typically the source is a synthesizer, since it must be accurate to better than ±10 MHz for the 37XXXD to achieve lock. Due to the inherent resolution of the 37XXXD, frequency resolution is limited to 1 kHz intervals. If Option 3 is installed frequency resolution is limited to 1 Hz. For receive frequencies outside the indicated test set range, the use of external mixers and a synthesizer is required. Dual Source Control is required in this case. Set-on Mode In the Set-On mode, the source lock circuitry of the 37XXXD is completely by-passed. Reference signals are no longer necessary for system operation. This allows all of the 37XXXD samplers to operate over their full dynamic range. As a result, the source and the 37XXXD must be locked to the same 10 MHz time base, otherwise coherent detection is not possible. Only synthesized sources may be used in this mode. Dual source control is required. Due to the inherent resolution of the 37XXXD local oscillators, frequency resolution is limited to 1 kHz intervals over the frequency range of the VNA. If Option 3 is installed, frequency resolution is limited to 1 Hz. 8-58 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS RECEIVER MODE Receiver Mode Block Diagram The block diagram shown in Figure 8-31 shows how the system is configured for all of the possible modes of operation. With the switches set as shown, the system operates in the Set-On mode. LO1 and LO2 are pre-set to allow only a prescribed signal to be detected by the synchronous detector. With the switch in SOURCE LOCK position the system is operating in the internal source-lock mode. With the switch in the TRACKING position, the system is in the synthesizer tracking mode. Receiver Mode Menus The menus associated with the Receiver Mode are described in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under their call sign: RCV1, RCV2, RCV3, etc. Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation SOURCE LOCK A detailed procedure for operation using the Receiver Mode option is provided in the following pages. ANALOG LOCK SIGNAL 2.5 MHz TRACKING SET ON 10 MHz SAMPLER RF MEASURE CIRCUIT SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR 10 MHz (SYNTHESIZER) TRACKING 1ST L.O. 2ND L.O. 3RD L.O. 2.42 MHz SOURCE LOCK/ SET ON 10 MHz Figure 8-31. 37XXXD OM PLL PLL 10 MHz 10 MHz REAL IMAGINARY 4TH L.O. 80 KHz 10 MHz 37XXXD Phase Lock Modes 8-59 RECEIVER MODE MENU OPTNS MEASUREMENTS Operating Procedure, Receiver Mode The three operational modes that comprise the Receiver Mode can be set up as follows: OPTIONS TRIGGERS Step 1. Press the Option Menu key (below). REAR PANEL OUTPUT DIAGNOSTICS . MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG RF ON/OFF DURING RETRACE PRESS TO SELECT Option Menu Step 2. When menu OPTNS (top left) appears, select RECEIVER MODE. Step 3. When menu RCV1 (middle left) appears, select either STANDARD (Step 4) or USER DEFINED (Step 5). Your selection depends on the application. Step 4. The Standard mode uses the Source Lock mode for operation with the internal source. The user has no control over selections within the Standard Mode. MENU RCV1 RECEIVER MODE STANDARD USER DEFINED SOURCE CONFIG SPUR REDUCTION NORMAL/OFF PRESS TO SELECT MENU RCV3 STANDARD RECEIVER MODE WARNING: CONTINUING MAY INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION PRESS TO CONTINUE Because entering the standard mode from the User Defined Mode erases the current stored calibration data, a warning menu (RCV3, bottom left) appears when STANDARD is selected. Press Enter to enter into the Standard mode or press Clear to abort. NOTE Spur Reduction: Normal/OFF: Spur Reduction Off may be selected when making non-ratioed measurements or using the Set-On Receiver mode. Under those measurement conditions, it may reduce high level noise. In normal S-parameter measurement mode, Spur Reduction should remain “Normal,” as the noise level is not affected. PRESS TO ABORT 8-60 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS RECEIVER MODE Step 5. MENU RCV1 RECEIVER MODE STANDARD Selecting USER DEFINED RECEIVER MODE in menu RCV1 brings menu RCV 2 to the screen. When menu RCV 2 appears, the last mode selected is highlighted in red. The default selection is SOURCE LOCK. USER DEFINED SOURCE CONFIG SPUR REDUCTION NORMAL/OFF PRESS TO SELECT Source Lock, Tracking or Set-On modes can be selected from this menu. When a mode is selected, information about that mode is displayed on the screen. This information describes the mode and the capabilities required of the RF source. MENU RCV2 USER DEFINED RECEIVER MODE SOURCE LOCK TRACKING SET ON PRESS ENTER TO SELECT MENU RCV4 USER DEFINED RECEIVER MODE WARNING: CONTINUING MAY INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION PRESS TO CONTINUE PRESS TO ABORT 37XXXD OM 8-61 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING 8-10 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING MEASUREMENTS In many S-parameter measurements, the measurement of the DUT may also include other set-up components that affect the overall measurement result. For example, there may be a test fixture required between the normal coaxial calibration planes and the DUT. It may be useful to see the DUT performance with a certain matching network in place or it may be desired to see what the subsystem performance would be when the given DUT is inserted, etc. The classical purposes of embedding and de-embedding are shown in Figure 8-32, below. De-embed DUT Fixture Fixture Calibration Planes DUT Effective New Measurement Planes Embed DUT Effective New Measurement Planes Figure 8-32. Matching Network Matching Network DUT Calibration Planes Classic Embedding and De-embedding One way of handling these chores within the instrument itself is through embedding and de-embedding: the process of mathematically adding or subtracting networks to or from the measured result. This feature is available in all 37XXXD VNAs as shown in the following paragraphs. 8-62 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS Embedding MENU DE8 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING Embedding of Matching Networks, or other components, can be done as follows: Step 1. EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE Press the APPL menu key on the instrument’s front panel. PORT 1/PORT 2 METHOD EMBED/DE-EMBED . SWAP PORTS OF S2P DATA OFF APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE DATA TO CAL FILE DATA - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE MENU DE9 Appl EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE ORIGINAL CAL FILE TO APPLY NETWORK Step 2. Select the VNA test port where the network will be embedded, then select the EMBED function under the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE8, top left). Step 3. Select APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE TO CAL FILE DATA. This will take you to the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9, middle left). Step 4. Select where to read the calibration file from. READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT The calibration file to be embedded can be stored on either the floppy or the hard disk. Once the calibration file is recalled, the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9A, bottom left) is displayed. MENU DE9A EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE S2P FILE DATA OF THE NETWORK READ S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK READ S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 37XXXD OM Step 5. Menu DE9A allows you to choose the .S2P file to be embedded from either the floppy or hard disk. Select the .S2P file to read. Once the .S2P file is selected, it is embedded with the calibration file. To embed additional files, save the calibration along with the embeded .S2P file onto the hard disk or floppy disk for later recall upon the next embedding operation. 8-63 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING De-embedding MENU DE8 EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE MEASUREMENTS De-embedding is a common technique for removing test fixture effects from a calibration, generally of microstrip or on-wafer devices. This is performed by the following: Step 1. Press the APPL key on the instrument’s front panel. PORT 1/PORT 2 METHOD EMBED/DE-EMBED . SWAP PORTS OF S2P DATA OFF APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE DATA TO CAL FILE DATA - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement PRESS TO SELECT OR CHANGE MENU DE9 Appl EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE ORIGINAL CAL FILE TO APPLY NETWORK Step 2. Select the VNA test port where the network will be embedded, then select the DE-EMBED function under the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE8, top left). Step 3. Select APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE TO CAL FILE DATA. This will take you to the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9, middle left). Step 4. Select where to read the calibration file from. READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT The calibration file to be embedded can be stored on either the floppy or the hard disk. Once the calibration file is recalled, the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9A, bottom left) is displayed. MENU DE9A EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE S2P FILE DATA OF THE NETWORK READ S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK READ S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 8-64 Step 5. Menu DE9A allows you to choose the .S2P file to be de-embedded from either the floppy or hard disk. Select the .S2P file to read. Once the .S2P file is selected, it is de-embedded with the calibration file. To de-embed additional files, save the calibration along with the de-embeded .S2P file onto the hard disk or floppy disk for later recall upon the next de-embedding operation. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS 8-11 OPTICAL APPLICATION OPTICAL APPLICATION Optical applications are divided into two measurement categories, electro-optical (E/O) and opto-electrical (O/E). E/O measurements can be performed with the 372XXD/373XXD series VNAs using the built-in E/O measurement application. On-screen menu-driven procedures guide you through the set-up and calibration required for E/O measurements of optical modulators such as bandwidth, flatness, and group delay. O/E measurements of a photo-diode or photo-receiver can be performed with the 372XXD/373XXD series VNAs by using the built-in O/E measurement application. On-screen-menu-driven procedures guide you through the set-up and calibration required for O/E measurements such as bandwidth, flatness, and group delay. E/O Measurements Optical modulators modulate digital data signals over a light wave carrier and send it over fiber optic networks. Since a VNA is only capable of generating and measuring electrical signals, a laser source is required to provide optical input to the modulator DUT and a photo-diode/photo-receiver is required to convert the modulator output back to an electrical signal that can be measured by the VNA. The MN4765A (65 GHz characterized photo-diode) is used with the following procedure. The equipment set up for an E/O measurement is shown in Figure 8-33, below. 372XXD/373XXD . Port 1 - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Port 2 RF In Laser Source Fiber RF Out Modulator Fiber Photo-diode Figure 8-33. E/O Measurement Setup The E/O measurement application de-embeds the response of the photo-diode/photo-receiver transfer standard from a 12-term calibration to enable measurements of a modulator DUT. 37XXXD OM 8-65 OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS E/O Measurement Procedure The following procedure will explain ways of using the MN4765A photo-diode to make an E/O measurement of a modulator DUT. The same set up can be used for a user characterized photo-diode as well. MENU APPL Step 1. Set-up the measurement as shown in Figure 8-33. Step 2. Perform a 12-term calibration on the VNA over the frequency range of interest with reference planes at the DUT input and the photo-diode output. (Refer to section 7-4 for the 12-term calibration steps.) Step 3. Press Save/Recall to save the calibration and set-up to the hard disk or a floppy disk. Step 4. Press the Appl key to display the applications menu (left). Step 5. Move the cursor to E/O MEASUREMENT and press Enter. APPLICATIONS ADAPTER REMOVAL SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION E/O MEASUREMENT O/E MEASUREMENT MERGE CAL FILES PRESS TO SELECT This brings up menu DE1 (left) and the step-by-step procedure, Figure 8-34, for making the measurement. MENU DE1 E/O MEASUREMENT MEASURE E/O DUT MODULATOR DE-EMBED TRANSFER FUNCTION OF A GENERIC NETWORK PRESS TO SELECT Figure 8-34. Step 6. 8-66 E/O Measurement Menu Select MEASURE E/O DUT (MODULATOR) and press Enter. 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION This brings up menu DE3 (top left). MENU DE3 E/O MEASUREMENT Step 7. ORIGINAL CAL FILE WITH FWD TRANS CORRECTION READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK Select READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK or READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK depending on where the 12-term calibration was saved in Step 3. This bring up menu DSK2 (middle left). READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK Step 8. Select the calibration file and press Enter. PRESS TO SELECT Step 9. Read the S2P file (characterization data file) for the photo-diode transfer standard. This will de-embed the photo-diode for an E/O measurement (menu DE3A, bottom left). PRESS TO ABORT NOTE If an S2P file is not available, it can be generated from the characterization data provided by the vendor. This is explained on page 8-74. MENU DSK2 SELECT FILE TO READ TESTCAL CAL The VNA now displays the measurement of the modulator DUT. An example measurement of a 40 Gb/s NRZ modulator is shown in Figure 8-35 below. PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT PRESS <1> FOR PREVIOUS PAGE PRESS <2> FOR NEXT PAGE MENU DE3A E/O MEASUREMENT TRANSFER STANDARD TO BE DE-EMBEDDED (DETECTOR STD) READ S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK READ S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 37XXXD OM Figure 8-35. E/O Measurement of a 40 Gb/s NRZ Modulator 8-67 OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS Step 10. Press Save/Recall and save this de-embedded calibration to the hard disk or the floppy disk. NOTE Observe that the S11 graph displays the electrical return loss (port match) of the modulator and S21 represents the transfer function of the modulator. The bandwidth of the modulator can be calculated from the S21 data by setting the delta markers or using the marker search function to find the 3 dB change in magnitude. The 3 dB bandwidth of the modulator measured in this example is 24 GHz. O/E Measurements Photo-diodes/photo-receivers convert an optical signal into an electrical signal. Bandwidth measurements can be made on a photo-diode/photo-receiver by stimulating its input with a modulated optical source and measuring the output signal. A laser and a characterized modulator are required, in addition to the VNA, to make O/E measurements. See Figure 8-36, below, for the equipment set-up. 372XXD/373XXD . Port 1 - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Port 2 RF In Laser Source Fiber Figure 8-36. RF Out Modulator Fiber Photo-diode O/E Measurement Set-up The O/E measurement application de-embeds the response of the modulator transfer standard from a 12-term calibration to enable measurements of the photo-diode DUT. O/E Measurement Procedure The following procedure will explain ways of obtaining characterization data for a modulator and then how to use it to make an O/E measurement of a photo-receiver. 8-68 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION Step 1. Set-up the measurement as shown in Figure 8-36, previous page. Step 2. Perform a 12-term calibration on the VNA over the frequency range of interest with reference planes at the modulator input and the photo-receiver DUT output. (Refer to section 7-4 for the 12-term calibration steps.) Step 3. Press Save/Recall to save the calibration and set up to the hard disk or a floppy disk. Step 4. Press the Appl key to display the applications menu (left). Step 5. Move the cursor to O/E MEASUREMENT and press Enter. MENU APPL APPLICATIONS ADAPTER REMOVAL SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION This brings up menu DE2 (bottom left) and the step-by-step procedure for making the measurement as shown in Figure 8-37, below. SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION E/O MEASUREMENT O/E MEASUREMENT MERGE CAL FILES PRESS TO SELECT MENU DE2 O/E MEASUREMENT DE-EMBED O/E S2P (DETECTOR STD) GENERATE E/O S2P CHARACTERIZATION (MODULATOR) MEASURE O/E DUT (DETECTOR) PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT Figure 8-37. 37XXXD OM O/E Measurement Menu 8-69 OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS The measurement of the photo-receiver DUT relies on a characterized modulator standard. If a characterized modulator is not available, an S2P file can be created by using a characterized photo-diode and de-embedding it from the 12-term calibration performed in Step 2. MENU DE5 DE-EMBED O/E S2P ORIGINAL CAL FILE WITH FWD TRANS CORRECTION READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK Step 6. READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT With the measurement set-up as shown in Figure 8-36, select DE-EMBED O/E S2P (DETECTOR STD) (menu DE2, previous page). This brings up menu DE5 (top left). Step 7. Select READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK or READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK depending on where the 12-term calibration was saved in Step 3. This brings up menu DSK2 (middle left). MENU DSK2 SELECT FILE TO READ TESTCAL CAL Step 8. Select the calibration file and press Enter. Step 9. Select READ THE S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK or READ THE S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK (menu DE5A, bottom left). This is the characterization data file for the photo-diode transfer standard. This will de-embed the photo-diode for an O/E measurement. Step 10. Press the Appl key, select O/E MEASUREMENT. Again, then press Enter. This recalls menu DE2 (left). PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT PRESS <1> FOR PREVIOUS PAGE PRESS <2> FOR NEXT PAGE MENU DE5A DE-EMBED E/O S2P TRANSFER STANDARD TO BE DE-EMBEDDED (DETECTOR STD) READ S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK READ S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 8-70 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION Step 11. MENU DE2 O/E MEASUREMENT DE-EMBED O/E S2P (DETECTOR STD) Move the cursor to GENERATE E/O S2P CHARACTERIZATION (MODULATOR STD) (menu DE2, left) and press Enter. This will generate an S2P characterization file for the modulator. Once the modulator characterization S2P file has been generated, it can be used as a transfer standard for the photo-receiver DUT measurement. GENERATE E/O S2P CHARACTERIZATION (MODULATOR) After the characterization file has been saved, the VNA returns to the O/E measurement menu shown in Figure 8-38, below. MEASURE O/E DUT (DETECTOR) PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT Figure 8-38. Step 12. 37XXXD OM O/E Measurement Menu Press the Appl key, select O/E MEASUREMENT. Again, then press Enter. This recalls menu DE2 (top left). 8-71 OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS Step 13. Move the cursor to MEASURE O/E DUT (DETECTOR) (menu DE2, top left) and press Enter. MENU DE2 This brings up menu DE7 (middle left). O/E MEASUREMENT DE-EMBED O/E S2P (DETECTOR STD) Step 14. GENERATE E/O S2P CHARACTERIZATION (MODULATOR) Select READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK or READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK depending on where the original 12-term calibration was saved in Step 3. MEASURE O/E DUT (DETECTOR) This brings up menu DSK2 (bottom left). PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT MENU DE7 O/E MEASUREMENT ORIGINAL CAL FILE WITH FWD TRANS CORRECTION READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT MENU DSK2 SELECT FILE TO READ TESTCAL CAL PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT PRESS <1> FOR PREVIOUS PAGE PRESS <2> FOR NEXT PAGE 8-72 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION Step 15. MENU DE7A O/E MEASUREMENT TRANSFER STANDARD TO BE DE-EMBEDDED (MODULATOR) NOTE If an S2P file is not available, it can be generated from the characterization data provided by the vendor. This is explained on page 8-74. READ S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK READ S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT Read the S2P file for the modulator that was generated in Step 10 from the hard drive or floppy drive (menu DE7A, left). This will de-embed the modulator response from the set-up for an O/E measurement. An O/E measurement of a photo-receiver is shown in Figure 8-39 below. The S21 measurement represents the transfer function of the photo-receiver and S22 represents the electrical return loss. PRESS TO ABORT Figure 8-39. 37XXXD OM O/E Measurement of a Photo-receiver 8-73 OPTICAL APPLICATION Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements MEASUREMENTS This section guides you through the process of creating an S2P file from vendor supplied characterization data. The S2P file can then be read into the VNA for de-embedding the response of the transfer standard used for either a modulator or photo-diode. Microsoft Excel is the recommended application for creating and storing the S2P file containing the characterization data. A sample S2P file is available for reference (contact Anritsu MMD Customer Service for a copy). The file format is the standard S2P format that includes the four S-parameters (see the section below for details on the S2P format). The transfer function data supplied by the vendor should be copied into the columns designated for S21 data and the frequencies into the FREQ column. Once the data has been entered, the file should be saved as an S2P file (as shown in Figure 8-40 below). Figure 8-40. Saving the S2P File in Excel S2P File Format S2P data files are ASCII text files in which data appears line by line, one line per data point, in increasing order of frequency. Each line of data consists of a frequency value and one or more pairs of values for the magnitude and phase of each S-parameter at that frequency. Values are separated by one or more spaces, tabs, or commands. Comments are preceded by an exclamation mark (!). Comments can appear on separate lines or after the data on any line. 8-74 37XXXD OM MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION The standard S2P file format consists of: q Option Lines q Data Lines q Comments The option line contains the specifications of the data, for example, the frequency units, the normalizing impedance, and the measured parameter (S, Y, Z, etc.). The option line format is: # where: # frequency unit The delimiter that tells the program you are specifying these parameters The set of units desired (GHz, MHz, KHz, Hz) parameter The parameter desired (S, Y or Z for S1P components; S, Y, Z, G, or H for S2P components; S for S3P or S4P components) format The format desired (DB for dB-angle, MA for magnitude-angle, or RI for real-imaginary) Rn The reference resistance in ohms, where n is a positive number of ohms (the real impedance to which the parameters are normalized) The default option line for a component data files is: # GHZ S MA R 50 For Y-parameters with real imaginary data, the option line header will change to: # GHz Y RI R 50 The data lines contain the data of interest. Data for all four S-parameters will be listed on a single line for a particular frequency point. The format is: 37XXXD OM 8-75 OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS Frequency S11 S21 S12 S22 Data Line Examples: Frequency S11 (magnitude) S11 (angle) 0.040000000 1.426492E-04 18.642 0.139900000 2.840961E-03 22.262 Finally, the comment lines begin with an exclamation point “ ! .” They can be inserted at any point in an S2P file and are ignored by the application program. An S2P file example appears in Figure 8-41 below. ! Anritsu Company ! DATE 04/11/2002 13:16 PAGE 1 ! Photo-diode receiver characterization – NRZ-40G # GHz S MA R 50.00 S11A S21M S21A S12M S12A S22M S22A 0.040000000 1.426492E-04 !FREQ 18.642 3.008963E-04 87.040 1.618370E-04 27.317 2.708149E-04 129.056 0.139900000 2.840961E-03 22.262 6.185992E-03 -114.026 2.539190E-03 125.940 5.977178E-03 -7.691 0.239800000 3.072268E-03 97.851 7.423908E-03 109.019 3.147963E-03 -88.205 7.634960E-03 -75.071 0.339700000 1.887820E-02 81.836 3.814256E-02 -135.753 1.632677E-02 -27.669 3.348942E-02 117.818 0.439600000 2.173782E-02 142.412 4.595363E-02 72.973 1.962434E-02 107.429 3.946349E-02 40.979 0.539500000 2.634556E-02 -62.971 5.206176E-02 31.589 2.257828E-02 -22.787 4.638838E-02 70.663 0.639400000 3.060178E-02 -103.325 6.416773E-02 120.463 2.732290E-02 5.656 5.685493E-02 -124.645 Figure 8-41. 8-76 S11M S2P File Example 37XXXD OM Chapter 9 Time Domain Table of Contents 9-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9-2 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9-3 OPERATING TIME DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9-4 WINDOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 9-5 GATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 9-6 ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 9-7 EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 9-8 TIME DOMAIN MENUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Chapter 9 Time Domain 9-1 9-2 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the optional Time Domain feature. TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS The Option 2, Time Domain feature provides a useful measurement tool for determining the location of impedance discontinuities. Some typical applications are identifying and analyzing circuit elements, isolating and analyzing a desired response, locating faults in cables, and measuring antennas. The relationship between the frequency-domain response and the time-domain response of a network is described mathematically by the Fourier transform. The 37XXXD makes measurements in the frequency domain then calculates the inverse Fourier transform to give the time-domain response. The time-domain response is displayed as a function of time (or distance). This computational technique benefits from the wide dynamic range and the error correction of the frequency-domain data. Let us examine the time-domain capabilities. Two measurement modes are available: lowpass and bandpass. We use the lowpass mode with devices that have a dc or low-frequency response. In the lowpass mode two responses to the device-under-test (DUT) are available: impulse or step response. The frequencies used for the test must be harmonically related (integer multiples) to the start frequency. The simplest way to calculate this relationship is to divide the highest frequency in the calibration by 1600 (the default number-of-points available); this is the start frequency. For example, if the highest frequency is 40 GHz, the calculated start frequency is 0.025 GHz (40/1600). If the highest frequency is 65 GHz, the calculated start frequency is 0.040625 GHz (65/1600). 37XXXD OM 9-3 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS TIME DOMAIN The lowpass impulse response displays the location of discontinuities as well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or C) of each discontinuity. The impulse response is a peak that goes positive for R>Z0 and negative for R Z R < Z S 1 1 R E A L O R - Z0 R + Z0 The impulse response for a shunt capacitance is a negative-thenpositive peak and for a series inductance is a positive-then-negative peak (Figure 9-1). An example of using an impulse response is a circuit impedance analysis. With an impulse response we can observe the circuit response of a passive device, such as a multi-element step attenuator (Figure 9-2), and make final, realtime adjustments during the test. O S H U N T C S E R IE S L S T E P A T T E N U A T O R Figure 9-1. Lowpass Impulse Response 0C 0 H . 0 1 0 0 - S p 1 s 1 d i y L P S 1 1 F O R W A R D R E F L E C T IO N L IN E A R M A G . R E F = 5 .0 0 0 m U w /G M 3 5A 6 1 R . 2 8 K . 9 2 E 0 9 R 1 m 1 p U s 7 .0 0 0 m U /D IV MM AA RR KK EE RR 1 TT OO MM IA N X 2 4 1 6 5 5 . 6 . 3 2 6 4 3 m p Us 6 3 3 1 7 5 5 . 0 . 4 2 1 0 9 m p Us 5 3 2 4 2 99 .3 5 . 92 3 9 6 m p U s 4 5 1 1 9 1 5 . 6 . 5 2 3 4 1 m p Us 6 1 2 5 7 2 . 5 . 5 3 1 4 4 m p Us 0 .0 0 0 p s Figure 9-2. 7 0 0 .0 0 0 p s Example of Lowpass Impulse Response In the above example, the connectors at each end have been gated out (page 9-12), which lets you better observe the internal circuit response. Each displayed marker has been manually set to the peak of the response at each adjustable circuit element. In this way, the data display lets you make the adjustment in realtime, while the marker menu shows the magnitude of the response at each marker. 9-4 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS The lowpass step response displays the location of discontinuities as well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or C) of each discontinuity. If you are familiar with time-domain reflectometry (TDR) you may feel more comfortable with step response, as the displays are similar. The lowpass step response for a resistive impedance is a positive level shift for R>Z0 and a negative level shift for R Z R < Z S 1 1 R E A L O R - Z0 R + Z0 The step response for a shunt capacitance is a negative peak, and for a series inductance it is a positive peak (Figure 9-3). An example of using the lowpass step response is cable-fault location. In the frequency domain a cable with a fault exhibits a much worse O S H U N T C Figure 9-3. O P E N C A B L E S E R IE S L Lowpass Step Response 3 1 2 0 .0 0 0 m m Figure 9-4. 4 0 .0 0 0 c m Example of Lowpass Step Response match than a good cable. Using lowpass step response, both the location of the discontinuity and the information about its type are available (Figure 9-4). In the above example, the dip in the display shows the shuntcapacitive response caused by a crimp in the cable. The response at the end of the cable shows the step-up that is typical of an open (Figure 9-3, left). The 37XXXD bandpass mode gives the response of the DUT to an RF-burst stimulus. Two types of response are available: impulse and phasor-impulse. An advantage of the bandpass mode is that any frequency range can be used. Use this mode with devices that do not have a dc or low-frequency path. 37XXXD OM 9-5 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS TIME DOMAIN Use the bandpass-impulse response to show the location of a discontinuity in time or distance, as indicated by changes in its magnitude. Unlike the lowpass mode, no information as to the type of the discontinuity is available. A typical use for this mode is to measure devices—such as, filters, waveguide, high-pass networks, bandpass networks—where a low-frequency response is not available. The bandpass-impulse response for various impedance discontinuities is shown in Figure 9-5. As we can see, no information about the type of discontinuity is available. C IR C U IT E L E M E N T S B a n d p a s s Im p u ls e R e s p o n s e IM P E D A N C E R > Z R < Z S 1 1 L O G M A G N IT U D E An example of using the bandpass-impulse response, is the pulse height, ringing, and pulse envelope of a bandpass filter (Figure 9-6).Use the phasor-impulse response with bandpass response to determine the type of an isolated impedance discontinuity. S 2 1 F O R W L O G A R D M A G . T R A N S M IS S IO N R E F = 2 0 .0 0 0 d B S 2 1 F O R W 2 0 .0 0 0 d B /D IV L O G M A G . A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N R E F = 3 0 .0 0 0 d B B P w /G 1 0 .0 0 0 d B /D IV O O S H U N T C S E R IE S L Figure 9-5. Bandpass Impulse Response 0 .5 0 0 0 Figure 9-6. G H z 4 .0 0 0 0 0 .5 0 0 0 G H z 4 .0 0 0 0 Example of Bandpass-Impulse Response After the bandpass-impulse response has been isolated, the phasor-impulse response for a resistive-impedance-level change is a peak that goes positive (R>Z0) for the real part of S11 and negative for R Z R < Z R E A L S 1 1 IM A G IN A R Y S O 5 0 9 2 0 9 5 0 9 1 1 Complex Impedances Next, let us look at a complex circuit. A resistive impedance change R TO SELECT Figure 9-11. Reference Delay Menu NOTE If you select distance, be sure to set the dielectric constant in the Reference Delay menu (Figure 9-11). DOMAIN FREQUENCY FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE TIME LOWPASS MODE TIME BANDPASS MODE DISPLAY TIME/DISTANCE SET RANGE SET GATE GATE ON/OFF HELP PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Figure 9-10. 9-8 DOMAIN FREQUENCY FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE TIME LOWPASS MODE TIME BANDPASS MODE DISPLAY TIME/DISTANCE SET RANGE SET GATE GATE ON/OFF HELP PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH DOMAIN FREQUENCY FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE TIME LOWPASS MODE TIME BANDPASS MODE DISPLAY TIME/DISTANCE SET RANGE SET GATE GATE ON/OFF HELP PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Domain Menu 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN OPERATING TIME DOMAIN Select SET RANGE and use the START/STOP or GATE/SPAN selections to set the range (Figure 9-12). DOMAIN FREQUENCY FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE TIME LOWPASS MODE TIME BANDPASS MODE DISPLAY TIME/DISTANCE SET RANGE SET GATE GATE ON/OFF HELP PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Figure 9-12. LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps MARKER RANGE RESPONSE IMPULSE/STEP MORE PRESS TO SELECT BANDPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps MARKER RANGE PHASOR ON/OFF IMPULSE HELP - PHASOR IMPULSE MORE Set Range Menu For the lowpass mode select either IMPULSE or STEP Response and set the DC term. The 37XXXDdefaults to the IMPULSE Response and the AUTO EXTRAPOLATE mode for the DC term (Figure 9-13). NOTE The bandpass mode displays Bandpass Impulse Response unless we select Phasor Impulse Response. 37XXXD OM 9-9 OPERATING TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps MARKER RANGE RESPONSE IMPULSE/STEP MORE PRESS TO SELECT Figure 9-13. SET D.C. TERM FOR LOWPASS PROCESSING AUTO EXTRAPOLATE LINE IMPEDANCE OPEN SHORT OTHER –XXX.XXX # ABOVE VALUE REPRESENTS A REFLECTION COEFF. OF XX.XXX mU PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT BANDPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps MARKER RANGE PHASOR ON/OFF IMPULSE HELP-PHASOR IMPULSE MORE PRESS TO SELECT Response Menus The Marker Range menu allows us to zoom in and display the range between two selected markers (Figure 9-14). LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps MARKER RANGE RESPONSE IMPULSE/STEP MORE PRESS TO SELECT Figure 9-14. 9-10 TIME MARKER SWEEP START TIME MARKER ( ) XXX.XXX nS STOP TIME MARKER ( ) XXX.XXX nS RESTORE ORIGINAL RANGE PREVIOUS MENU USE KEYPAD TO CHOOSE MARKER (1 - 6) OR PRESS TO SELECT Marker Range Menus 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN 9-4 WINDOWING Windowing is a frequency filter that we apply to the frequency-domain data when we convert it to time-domain data. This filtering rolls off the abrupt transition at F1 and F2. This effectively produces a timedomain response with lower sidelobes. Windowing allows a limited degree of control over the pulse shape, trading off ringing (sidelobes) for pulse width (Figure 9-15). WINDOWING W IN D O W IN G F R E Q U E N C Y D O M A IN 1 -T E R M F 1 T IM E D O M A IN W IN D O W F 2 2 -T E R M W IN D O W We select windowing from the Time Domain Setup menu. Four different windows are available: RECTANGLE, NOMINAL, LOW SIDELOBE, and MIN SIDELOBE. The RECTANGLE option provides the narrowest pulse width, while the MIN SIDELOBE option provides the least ringing (fewest sidelobes). The 37XXXD defaults to the NOMINAL option, which is acceptable for most measurements. Windowing menus are shown in Figure 9-16. N O T E : W id e r b u t n o r in g in g Figure 9-15. Windowing LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps MARKER RANGE LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP SET WINDOW NOMINAL SET GATE SET D.C. TERM XXX.XXX PREVIOUS MENU PRESS TO SELECT SHAPE RECTANGULAR NOMINAL LOW SIDELOBE MIN SIDELOBE HELP PRESS TO SELECT RESPONSE IMPULSE/STEP MORE PRESS TO SELECT Figure 9-16. 37XXXD OM Window Shape Menus 9-11 GATING 9-5 TIME DOMAIN GATING G A T IN G G A T E D IS T A N C E G A T E A P P L IE D Figure 9-17. Gating Gating is a time filter that allows for removing unwanted time-domain responses by gating the desired response. We can view the isolated response in both time domain—and in the frequency domain—using the FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE selection (Figure 9-17). There are four different gate shapes available: MINIMUM, NOMINAL, WIDE, and MAXIMUM (Figure 9-18). The 37XXXD defaults to the NOMINAL gate. To specify a different shape simply enter the Gate menu and select the desired gating shape. The MINIMUM has the sharpest rolloff and some frequency domain ripple, while MAXIMUM has the least rolloff and best residual ripple. Figures 9-18A through 9-18D, on the next page, show gating shapes. The combinations of gate/window shapes will be restricted. For the MINIMUM gate shape, the LOW and MIN SIDELOBE window shape will not be allowed. For the NOMINAL gate shape, the MIN SIDELOBE window will not be allowed. If the user has set the window shape to MIN or LOW SIDELOBE and changes the-gate shape to MINIMUM, the window will be reset to NOMINAL. If the user has set the window to MIN SIDELOBE and changes the gate shape to NOMINAL, the window will be reset to LOW SIDELOBE. Gate shapes will be adjusted in a similar manner. LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP START XXX.XXX ps STOP XXX.XXX ps CENTER XXX.XXX ps SPAN XXX.XXX ps LOWPASS TIME DOMAIN SETUP SELECT GATE SHAPE SET WINDOW NOMINAL MINIMUM NOMINAL SET GATE WIDE MARKER RANGE SET DC TERM XXX.XXX MAXIMUM RESPONSE IMPULSE/STEP PREVIOUS MENU HELP MORE PRESS TO SELECT Figure 9-18. 9-12 PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO SELECT Gating Menus 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN GATING An informational message will be displayed in the data area when the window or gate shape reset in this way. The message will last two sweeps and will say: “GATE SHAPE ADJUSTED” or “WINDOW SHAPE ADJUSTED” depending on which was changed by the software. Figure 9-18A. Minimum Gate Shape Figure 9-18B. Nominal Gate Shape Figure 9-18C. Wide Gate Shape Figure 9-18D. Maximum Gate Shape 37XXXD OM 9-13 ANTI-GATING 9-6 9-7 TIME DOMAIN ANTI-GATING Anti-gating is the opposite of gating. Whereby, gating provides for removing all but the desired response, anti-gating displays all but the desired response. To provide anti-gating, gate in the normal manner, except use a minus value for the SPAN width. EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING Examples of anti-gating are shown in Figures 9-19 through 9-24. The figures, all captured from an actual VNA display, show a sequence of measurements using gating and anti-gating to enhance measurement technique and accuracy. The examples use a dented length of semirigid cable having a connector on one end and a connector-DUT on the other end, as shown below. The DUT has a smoothly varying 15 dB return loss. 15 dB DUT Connector Dent 9-8 9-14 TIME DOMAIN MENUS A flow diagram of the menus associated with the Time Domain Option is shown in foldout Figure 9-25. The menu choices are described in Appendix A. They appear in alphabetical order by their call letters: TD1, TD2, TD2dl, etc. 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MENUS 37369A 37369A MODEL: DEVICE: START: STOP: STEP: DATE: OPERATOR: 4.000000000 40.000000000 0.090000000 GHz GHz GHz 03/27/96 15:10 GATE START: GATE STOP: GATE: WINDOW: ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1 AVERAGING: 1 PT IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz S11 FORWARDREFLECTION LOG MAGNITUDE REF= -40.000 dB 20.000 DOMAIN dB/DIV FREQUENCY FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE TIME LOWPASSMODE TIME BANDPASSMODE SETUP DISPLAY TIME/ DISTANCE SET RANGE SET GATE GATE OFF HELP 4.000000000 Figure 9-19. GHz 40.000000000 PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Frequency Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating Off 37XXXD OM 9-15 TIME DOMAIN MENUS TIME DOMAIN 37369A MODEL: DEVICE: START: STOP: STEP: DATE: OPERATOR: 4.000000000 40.000000000 0.090000000 GHz GHz GHz 03/27/96 GATE START: GATE STOP: GATE: WINDOW: 15:12 315.0000 165.0000 NOMINAL NOMINAL S11 FORWARDREFLECTION ps ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1 AVERAGING: 1 PT IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz BP LOG MAGNITUDE REF= -40.000 dB 20.000 dB/DIV MARKER3 240.0000 ps -16.260 dB Connector interface with VNA DUT Interface Dent 3 MARKERTO MAX MARKERTO MIN 2 1 -500.0000 Figure 9-20. 9-16 CH 1 - S11 REFERENCEPLANE 0.0000 mm ps 1.5000 ns 1 0.0000 ps -29.255 dB 2 705.0000 ps -18.001 dB MARKERREADOUT FUNCTIONS Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating Off 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MENUS 37369A MODEL: DEVICE: START: STOP: STEP: DATE: OPERATOR: 4.000000000 40.000000000 0.090000000 GHz GHz GHz GATE START: GATE STOP: GATE: WINDOW: 03/27/96 15:14 642.5000 767.5000 NOMINAL NOMINAL S11 FORWARDREFLECTION ps ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1 AVERAGING: 1 PT IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz BP w/GATE REF= -40.000 LOG MAGNITUDE dB 20.000 dB/DIV GATE DUT Interface gated for display Dent removed by gating 2 Connector interface with VNA removed by gating Flag 3 ps Figure 9-21. 37XXXD OM STOP 767.5000 ps CENTER 705.0000 ps SPAN 125.0000 ps GATE 1.5000 ON SET RANGE Note that gating is turned on and span is set to cover the discontinuity (125 ps down line from connection with VNA). Further note that the gating flags point inward. -500.0000 ps GATE SHAPE NOMINAL Flag 1 START 642.5000 PRESS TO SELECT ns Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On and Positioned Over DUT Interface Discontinuity. 9-17 TIME DOMAIN MENUS TIME DOMAIN 37369A MODEL: DEVICE: START: STOP: STEP: DATE: OPERATOR: 4.000000000 40.000000000 0.090000000 GHz GHz GHz GATE START: GATE STOP: GATE: WINDOW: S11 FORWARDREFLECTION LOG MAGNITUDE 03/27/96 15:16 642.5000 767.5000 NOMINAL NOMINAL ps ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1 AVERAGING: 1 PT IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz FGT REF= 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV SET SCALING OR PRESS -LOG MAGRESOLUTION 10.000 dB/DIV DUT Interface enlarged for evaluation REFERENCEVALUE 0.000 dB 12 3 REFERENCELINE 4 Note that the reference value is 0 dB and the resolution is 10 db per division. These values are optimum for viewing the smoothly varying return loss characteristics of the DUT interface - approximately 15 dB 4.000000000 Figure 9-22. 9-18 GHz 40.000000000 Frequency Domain Trace of DUT 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MENUS 37369A MODEL: DEVICE: START: STOP: STEP: DATE: OPERATOR: 4.000000000 40.000000000 0.090000000 GHz GHz GHz GATE START: GATE STOP: GATE: WINDOW: S11 FORWARDREFLECTION 03/27/96 15:19 315.0000 165.0000 NOMINAL NOMINAL ps ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1 AVERAGING: 1 PT IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz BP w/GATE REF= -87.348 LOG MAGNITUDE dB 20.000 dB/DIV GATE Dent removed by anti-gating 2 Flag 1Flag 3 START 315.0000 ps STOP 165.0000 ps CENTER 240.0000 ps SPAN -150.0000 ps GATE SHAPE NOMINAL Note that anti-gating is turned on by changing the polarity of the SPAN to negative and changing its value to cover the dent. Also, note that the flags point outward. GATE O SET RANGE PRESS TO SELECT -500.0000 Figure 9-23. ps 1.5000 ns Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On and Positioned Over Dent (Cable Fault) Interface Discontinuity. 37XXXD OM 9-19 TIME DOMAIN MENUS TIME DOMAIN 37369A MODEL: DEVICE: START: STOP: STEP: DATE: OPERATOR: 4.000000000 40.000000000 0.090000000 GHz GHz GHz GATE START: GATE STOP: GATE: WINDOW: 03/27/96 340.0000 140.0000 NOMINAL NOMINAL S11 FORWARDREFLECTION LOG MAGNITUDE 15:23 ps ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1 AVERAGING: 1 PT IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz FGT REF= 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV SET SCALING OR PRESS -LOG MAGRESOLUTION 10.000 dB/DIV REFERENCEVALUE 0.000 dB 12 3 REFERENCELINE 4 4.000000000 Figure 9-24. 9-20 GHz 40.000000000 Frequency Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On 37XXXD OM TIME DOMAIN MENU FLOWCHART N O T E M E N U 1 N O T E T D 2 d l M E N U M E N U p s D a ta P o in ts S T O P X X X .X X X m m D e v ic e ID C E N T E R X X X .X X X C E N T E R X X X .X X X m m S P A N X X X .X X X M A R K E R R A N G E R E S P O N S E m m IM P U L S E /S T E P M A R K E R R A N G E D O M A IN R E S P O N S E IM P U L S E /S T E P F R E Q U E N C Y M O R E F R E Q U E N C Y W IT H T IM E R E L . V E L O C IT Y X .X B P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T p s C E N T E R X X X .X X X C E N T E R X X X .X X X p s m m S P A N X X X .X X X S P A N X X X .X X X p s m m M A R K E R R A N G E M A R K E R R A N G E M O D E M E N U T D 3 l L O W P A S S T IM E D O M A IN S E T U P M O D E -D IS P L A Y - S E T W IN D O W X X X X X X X S E T R A N G E S E T G A T E S E T G A T E H E L P P R E V IO U S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R S W IT C H A M O D E ." " a n d S E T G A T E M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T B M O D E ." " a n d T D 3 b P R E V IO U S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F S E T D .C . T E R M X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O N /O F F M O D E ." " M O D E ."" S E T W IN D O W N O M IN A L P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F R E L . V E L O C IT Y X .X P A S S P A S S B A N D P A S S T IM E D O M A IN S E T U P M O R E M O R E = "T IM E " a n d " T IM E , L O W M E N U H E L P - P H A S O R IM P U L S E H E L P - P H A S O R IM P U L S E = "D IS T A N C E " a n d "T IM E , L O W 2 : F o r "D IS P L A Y A P H A S O R O N /O F F IM P U L S E P H A S O R O N /O F F IM P U L S E 1 : F o r "D IS P L A Y N O T E N O T E 4 : F o r " D IS P L A Y = " T IM E " a n d " T IM E ,B A N D P A S S "F R E Q U E N C Y " o r "F R E Q U E N C Y W IT H T IM E G A T E " m m A N O T E N O T E 3 : F o r " D IS P L A Y = " D IS T A N C E " a n d " T IM E ,B A N D P A S S "F R E Q U E N C Y " o r "F R E Q U E N C Y W IT H T IM E G A T E " B A N D P A S S T IM E D O M A IN S E T U P S T O P X X X .X X X p s 4 T D 2 tb m m S T O P X X X .X X X T IM E /D IS T A N C E G A T E M E N U T D 2 d b p s p s M O R E B N O T E S T A R T X X X .X X X S T A R T X X X .X X X P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T G A T E T IM E B A N D P A S S S T A R T X X X .X X X 3 B A N D P A S S D IS T A N C E D IS P L A Y S E T U P S T O P X X X .X X X T D 1 T IM E L O W P A S S M E N U m m S e tu p M e n u D o m a in T D 2 tl S T A R T X X X .X X X M e a s u re m e n t N O T E L O W P A S S T IM E D O M A IN S E T U P L O W P A S S D IS T A N C E D IS P L A Y S E T U P H o ld 2 T D 6 S E T D .C . T E R M F O R L O W P A S S P R O C E S S IN G A U T O E X T R A P O L A T E M E N U T D 7 t T IM E M A R K E R S W E E P M E N U T D 7 d D IS T A N C E M A R K E R S W E E P S T A R T T IM E M A R K E R () X X X .X X X n s S T A R T D IS T M A R K E R () X X .X X X X c m S T O P T IM E M A R K E R () X X X .X X X n s S T O P D IS T M A R K E R () X .X X X X m R E S T O R E O R IG IN A L R A N G E P R E V IO U S U S E K E Y T O C H O M A R K E R O R P R E S S < E T O S E L P A D O S E (1 - 6 ) N T E R > E C T S H O R T H E X .X O V P R F L E F X X R X X E E S E C F . p V A L U E E N T S A T IO N O F U P R E V IO U S P R E V IO U S U S E K E Y T O C H O M A R K E R O R P R E S S < E T O S E L O P E N O T X X A B R E R E C O X .X R E S T O R E O R IG IN A L R A N G E M E N U L IN E IM P E D A N C E M E N U P A D O S E (1 - 6 ) M E N U P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U T D 4 d /t G A T E S T A R T X X X .X X X x x S T O P X X X .X X X x x C E N T E R X X X .X X X x x S P A N X X X .X X X x x M E N U S E T S H A P E X X X X X X X X X G A T E O N /O F F S E T R A N G E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M E N U T D 5 w S E T G A T E S H A P E S E T W IN D O W S H A P E M IN IM U M R E C T A N G U L A R N O M IN A L N O M IN A L L O W M IN S ID E L O B E W ID E M A X IM U M S ID E L O B E H E L P H E L P P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T N T E R > E C T Figure 9-25. 37XXXD OM T D 5 g Time Domain Menu Flow 9-21/9-22 Chapter 10 AutoCal Table of Contents 10-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-3 CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 10-4 DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 10-6 CHARACTERIZATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 10-7 USING AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 10-8 PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 10-9 AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Power Supply AutoCal O T U A L A C LE T F K 1K 58 36 LE U Hz D 0G O -2 M MH z 40 P ow er F T ra te AutoCal Module, Power Supply, and Calibration Coefficients Disk H pe Figure 10-1. IG R O Calibration Coefficients Disk Chapter 10 AutoCal 10-1 10-2 INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION This chapter provides a general description of the AutoCal calibrators, including specifications, setup, and the use of the associated software and on-line documentation. This series has three models, as shown below. Throughout this manual, the term AutoCal will refer to the series. Individual models will be referred to by model number. Figure 10-1 shows the AutoCal module and all of its attaching parts. Model Switch Freq. Range Connector 36581NNF Electronic 40MHz-18 GHz N (Male)-N(Fem) 36581KKF Electronic 40MHz-20 GHz K(Male)-K(Fem) 36582KKF Mechanical 40MHz-40 GHz K(Male)-K(Fem) The AutoCal module provides an automatic system for fast, repeatable high-quality calibrations of a Vector Network Analyzer (VNA). The AutoCal module is connected between the VNA's test ports 1 and 2 to perform the calibration. Refer to Figure 10-2 for a diagram of the AutoCal connections. The electronic AutoCal modules use solid state electronic switches to exchange the internal calibration standards. Note that these units have a lower frequency limit (18 and 20 GHz). The mechanical module uses electro-mechanical actuators to exchange the standards and has the highest frequency limit, but has a small non-repeatability error. The mechanical module contains internal standards used to measure port isolation; the electronic module does NOT contain isolation standards and requires a manual operation to perform this measurement. A standard serial RS-232 interface cable is used to connect the AutoCal module to the 37XXXD. Power is supplied by a connecting cable from a universal power supply (+5V, +15V, –15V for the electronic modules; +5V, +24V for the mechanical modules). A power on-off switch is not provided. Test Port Cable Converters (Anritsu series 36583) are used during and after the calibration process to establish the desired test port connector type and sex. 37XXXD OM 10-3 CALIBRATIONS 10-3 CALIBRATIONS AUTOCAL Four types of calibration can be performed using AutoCal: One-Port: S11 1-Port and S22 1-Port are 1-port calibrations performed on the indicated port of the VNA and are equivalent to the traditional Open-Short-Load calibrations. Full 2-Port: This type is equivalent to the traditional Open-Short-Load-Thru (OSLT) calibration. Thru Update: This type is a new form of calibration which is used to update an existing 12-term calibration in the VNA. This calibration could have been performed using any method of calibration which yields 12 terms (LRL, LRM, AutoCal, or OSLT). Due to cable movement and aging, the calibration may have degraded over time. The Thru Update refreshes the calibration by measuring a Thru connection and updating the Transmission Tracking and Load Match calibration coefficients. Adapter Removal: This calibration measures the characteristics of male-male or female-female test port cables for subsequent measurement of non-insertable devices. An adapter is required for this calibration. Adapter Removal requires two calibration procedures in order to calculate the parameters and electrical length of the adapter. 10-4 DEFINITIONS The following terms are used in explaining the calibration procedure using the AutoCal module: Thru: A thru is a connection of the two test ports. Two kinds of thru connections are defined for the AutoCal calibration: (1) a Calibrator thru is an internal path through the calibrator. (2) a True thru is a direct cable connection between the test ports, with no intervening connectors. The calibrator thru is not as accurate as a true thru, so the you have the option during a calibration to use the more accurate method, if necessary. Switch Averaging: The mechanical AutoCal module uses electro-mechanical switches to select calibration standards. These switches have a small amount of non-repeatability (typically less than –55 dB). For most calibrations, this is more than adequate because it is below connector repeatability error. If desired, you can choose to reduce the effect of this non-repeatability in the mechanical module by using Switch Averaging, which causes additional calibration measurements. By setting a Switch Averaging factor larger than 1, switch repeatability error will be reduced. The tradeoff is that calibration time will be proportionally increased. 10-4 37XXXD OM AUTOCAL DEFINITIONS Isolation: For certain measurements which require accurate S21 or S12 readings for very small values of those parameters, an isolation step is required to characterize the leakage of the VNA and test setup. The isolation step can be performed automatically as part of a “Full 2-Port” calibration when using the mechanical module. The isolation step requires a manual operation for the electronic module. In order to achieve high accuracy for the characterization of the leakage, a high averaging factor is needed. VNA Measurement Averaging Factor: This is the number of measurements taken at a given data point (frequency) and may be adjusted to meet the measurement requirements. The average of all the measurements will become the measured data. For example, if 256 averages is selected, each data point is measured 256 times and the average of these measurements is displayed, then the VNA moves to the next data point. VNA Video IF Bandwidth: The bandwidth of the receiver may be changed to enhance the measurement accuracy or, conversely, to increase the measurement speed. Selecting the minimum IF bandwidth results in the greatest accuracy for low-signal-level measurements and the slowest measurement speed. Selecting the maximum IF bandwidth results in the greatest measurement speed and reduced accuracy on low-signal-level measurements.This can be set by using the Video IF BW key and selecting the desired IFBW. Characterization File: Each calibrator module has a file containing data which characterizes each standard in the calibrator. This file also contains information (identification number, start and stop frequencies) concerning the capabilities of the calibrator. Each characterization file has the extension “.acd.” When modules are changed, you must install the appropriate new characterization file. This file can be installed using the Util key (AutoCal Utilities) to recall the characterization file from a disk. In addition, each AutoCal module can be re-characterized using the VNA. A valid 12-term calibration must be active, which is used to characterize the standards within the module. 37XXXD OM 10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP 10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP AUTOCAL See Figure 10-2 for an illustration of the connections necessary to perform an automatic calibration using the AutoCal module. Note that the connection is very simple. Different power cable connectors are used with the mechanical modules and the electronic modules to prevent connecting the wrong power supply in error. There is no on-off switch. When power is connected to the AutoCal module, the LED labeled POWER should come on immediately. The second LED, labeled OPERATE, should come on in about five minutes, after the internal temperature control oven has stabilized. The internal temperature is held within a 5 oC window. 37XXXD . AUTOCAL POWER SUPPLY SERIAL PORT - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement SERIAL CABLE AUTOCAL MODULE 36581KKF 40 MHz - 20 GHz LEFT RIGHT Power Operate AUTOCAL Figure 10-2. 10-6 AutoCal Equipment Setup 37XXXD OM AUTOCAL 10-6 CHARACTERIZATION FILES CHARACTERIZATION FILES . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Before performing an AutoCal on a 37XXXD, the Characterization File for the AutoCal Module has to be loaded. This file may be recalled from the floppy disk accompanying the Module. It may also be recalled from one generated using the user's specialized manual calibration. Insert the AutoCal Module Characterization Disk into the floppy drive. Press the Utility Menu key (left), then select the following menu options, in turn: AUTOCAL UTILITIES, RECALL FROM FLOPPY DISK. Select the file “Lxxxxxx.ACD“. If a copy of the Characterization File is in the hard-disk, you can recall it by choosing RECALL FROM HARD DISK instead. Select the same file “Lxxxxxx.ACD”. Utility Menu NOTE The “xxxxxx” in the above paragraphs correspond to the serial number of the AutoCal module. MENU UTIL SELECT UTILITY FUNCTION OPTIONS GPIB ADDRESSES Should you desire to re-characterize the module, which is recommended every six months of usage, perform the following procedure: Step 1. DISPLAY INSTRUMENT STATE PARAMS GENERAL DISK UTILITIES NOTE Any calibration method may be used (Standard, Offset Short, LRL/LRM, or TRM) along with either the Coaxial or Waveguide line types. CAL COMPONENT UTILITIES AUTOCAL UTILITIES COLOR CONFIGURATION Using a 365x or 375x Calibration Kit, perform a 12-Term calibration over the desired frequency range of characterization, but within the range of the AutoCal module and the VNA. Step 2. Upon completion of the calibration, press the Utility Menu key. DATA ON (OFF) DRAWING BLANKING FREQUENCY INFORMATION SET DATE/TIME PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF 37XXXD OM 10-7 CHARACTERIZATION FILES Step 3. AUTOCAL Select AUTOCAL UTILITIES then AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION, from the next menu to appear. AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION AUTOCAL UTILITIES SWITCH AVERAGING XXXX AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION PORT CONFIG L=1, R=2 R=1, L=2 SAVE TO HARD DISK NUMBER OF AVERAGES SAVE TO FLOPPY DISK REFLECTION XXXX RECALL FROM HARD DISK LOAD XXXX RECALL FROM FLOPPY DISK THRU XXXX PRESS TO SELECT ISOLATION XXXX START AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION Step 4. Select an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING (recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the electro-mechanical modules). Step 5. Ensure the Module Configuration is correct (L=1, R=2 or R=1, L=2). Step 6. If desired, you may change the amount of averaging during characterization of each standard, by entering the NUMBER OF AVERAGES. Step 7. Ensure the Autocal Module is connected between the Test Ports, power is applied, and the serial cable is connected to the VNA. Verify that both the “Power” and “Operate” LED’s are ON. Step 8. Select START AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION. The VNA will proceed through a characterization of the attached Autocal Module. Step 9. When the calibration is complete, press the Save/Recall key. Step 10. Select SAVE then FRONT PANEL SETUP AND CAL DATA TO HARD DISK (middle and bottom left). PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH 10-8 37XXXD OM AUTOCAL USING AUTOCAL Step 11. Select a file or CREATE NEW FILE and press Enter. If you are creating a new file, enter the filename and select DONE when finished. 10-7 USING AUTOCAL . Begin Cal - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement An example procedure for using the AutoCal module is given below. This example assumes a frequency range of 40 MHz to 40 GHz, a power level of -7 dBm, and use of a Series 36582 AutoCal module. Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key (top left). Step 2. Select AUTOCAL from the displayed menu (C11, left). Apply Cal MENU C11 BEGIN CALIBRATION KEEP EXISTING CAL DATA REPEAT PREVIOUS CAL AUTOCAL CAL METHOD XXXXXXXXX TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE: XXXXXXXXX CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 10-9 USING AUTOCAL AUTOCAL Step 3. MENU ACAL AUTOCAL AUTOCAL TYPE: XXXXXXXX CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP START AUTOCAL THRU UPDATE CONNECT THROUGH LINE BETWEEN PORTS 1 AND 2 NUMBER OF AVGS XXX START THRU UPDATE The selections in the next menu to appear, MENU ACAL, will depend on current instrument conditions, as follows: a. THRU UPDATE lets you update the Thru calibration of an active 12-term Calibration. This updates the transmission frequency response and load match coefficients. b. START AUTOCAL lets you start a calibration using the current setup. c. CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP lets you set up a new calibration, which is what we will do for this example. This example also assumes that you have selected the transmission medium and, if waveguide, identified the cutoff frequency. USE PREVIOUS AUTOCAL SETUP PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH 10-10 37XXXD OM AUTOCAL MENU ACAL_SETUP USING AUTOCAL Step 4. Select CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP. This causes MENU ACAL_SETUP (left) to appear. Step 5. Enter a SWITCH AVERAGING value of 8. AUTOCAL SETUP LINE TYPE COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE To improve the effect of switch repeatability error with the 36582 series (mechanical switch), you can change the switch averaging. Note, however, that switch averaging will have no affect on the 36581 series (electronic switch). WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF XX.XXXXXX GHz SWITCH AVERAGING 8 NUMBER OF AVGS REFLECTION XXXX Step 6. LOAD XXXX You could have also selected S11 1-PORT, S22 1-PORT, or ADAPTER REMOVAL. The last of these lets you remove the effects of an adapter used in the calibration. THRU XXXX ISOLATION XXXX AUTOCAL TYPE Step 7. SII 1 PORT S22 1 PORT FULL 2 PORT ADAPTER REMOVAL MENU ACAL_FULL AUTOCAL FULL 2-PORT OMIT Step 9. AVERAGING FACTOR XXXX PORT CONFIG L=1, R=2 R=1, L=2 37XXXD OM Observe that OMIT is shown for the ISOLATION AVERAGING. Isolation may be omitted (default). You may also select DEFAULT to use the default value during the isolation step. You may also use your own AVERAGING FACTOR. Including isolation involves a manual step for the 36581 models. THRU TYPE CALIBRATOR/TRUE PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Select the THRU TYPE to be either CALIBRATOR or TRUE. By default, the CALIBRATOR (internal) thru standard is used for the Thru Calibration. The transmission response of the calibration may be improved by selecting the TRUE thru standard. This will result in an added manual step. ISOLATION AVERAGING START AUTOCAL Select the PORT CONFIG setting that matches the physical setup (R-1, L=2 or L=1, R=2). It is critical to ensure the correct module orientation is established. Each side (left) and right) of the module is labeled. Step 8. DEFAULT Select FULL 2 PORT. This displays a menu (MENU ACAL_FULL) that lets you set up the calibration (bottom left). Step 10. Ensure the AutoCal module is properly connected between Ports 1 and 2, then select START AUTOCAL. 10-11 USING AUTOCAL AUTOCAL . Follow the on-screen instructions and do not disturb the setup during the calibration. Please note that you should not start a calibration until both LED's on the AutoCal module are lit. This will ensure accurate calibration of the VNA. - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Step 11. When the calibration is complete, press the Save/Recall key. Step 12. Select SAVE then FRONT PANEL SETUP AND CAL DATA TO HARD DISK (middle and bottom left). Step 13. Select a file or CREATE NEW FILE and press Enter. Save/ Recall Menu MENU SR1 SAVE/RECALL FRONT PANEL AND CAL DATA If you are creating a new file, enter the filename and select DONE when finished. SAVE RECALL PRESS TO SELECT FUNCTION MENU SR2 SAVE FRONT PANEL SETUP IN INTERNAL MEMORY FRONT PANEL SETUP AND CAL DATA TO HARD DISK FRONT PANEL SETUP AND CAL DATA TO FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT 10-12 37XXXD OM AUTOCAL 10-8 PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS Table 10-1. The depth of the center pin on connectors is a critical specification, which if not met, can cause damage to mating connectors. Table 10-1 provides pin depth examples and Table 10-2 provides pin-depth specifications for associated AutoCal connectors. Checking Connector Pin Depth (Example) Example 1: FEMALE MASTER GAUGE BLOCK (protrusion) Desired nominal value: Case1 Actual value of master gauge Gauge should be set to indicate: Case2 Actual value of master gauge Gauge should be set to indicate: 0.2070 0.2071 (protrusions 0.0001 more than desired) +0.0001 0.2069 (protrusions 0.0001 less than desired) -0.0001 Example 2: MALE MASTER GAUGE BLOCK (cavity) Desired nominal value: Case1 Actual value of master gauge Gauge should be set to indicate: Case2 Actual value of master gauge Gauge should be set to indicate: 0.2070 0.2071 (cavity 0.0001 deeper than desired) -0.0001 0.2069 (cavity 0.0001 shallower than desired) +0.0001 Table 10-2. AutoCal Module Connector Pin Depth Specifications Device Connector Pin Depth (inches) 3658XXX K-Female +0.0000 to -0.005 3658XXX K-Male +0.0000 to -0.005 3658XXX N-Female *[0.207](+0.000, -0.005) 3658XXX K-Female *[0.207](+0.000, -0.005) 32K50 32KF50 K-Male (cable side) **Negative Indication K-Female +0.0000 to -0.0005 K-Male (DUT side) +0.0000 to -0.0005 K-Male (cable side) **Negative Indication 3.5mm-Female (DUT side) +0.006 to -0.008 3.5mm-Male (DUT side) +0.006 to -0.008 K-Male (cable side) **Negative Indication SMA-Female (DUT side) +0.0005 to -0.0015 SMA-Male (DUT side) +0.0005 to -0.0015 32L50 32LF50 32S50 32SF50 *Gauging Type N Connectors: The actual value of a Type N master gauge block will always vary to some degree from the desired nominal value. The recorded measured value of the master gauge must be observed when calibrating the Pin Depth Gauge to the desired nominal value. Although the AutoCal Module Pin Depths are not critical, this information may be helpful in the measurement of Type N mating components. Examples are shown in Table 10-1, on the preceding page. 37XXXD OM 10-13 AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM 10-9 AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM AUTOCAL A flow diagram for the AutoCal menus is provided in Figure 10-3. Menu ACAL_S11 AUTOCAL S11 1 PORT Menu C11 Begin Cal BEGIN CALIBRATION KEEP EXISTING CAL DATA REPEAT PREVIOUS CAL AUTOCAL CAL METHOD XXXXXXXX TRANSMISSION LINE TYPE: XXXXXXXX CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE TYPE NEXT CAL STEP PRESS TO SELECT Menu ACAL AUTOCAL AUTOCAL TYPE XXXXXXXX CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP START AUTOCAL PORT 1 CONNECTION LEFT/RIGHT Menu ACAL_SETUP TEST SIGNALS AUTOCAL SETUP START AUTOCAL LINE TYPE COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE THRU UPDATE PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF XX.XXXXXX GHz CONNECT THROUGH LINE BETWEEN PORTS 1 AND 2 SWITCH AVERAGING XXXX Menu ACAL_S22 AUTOCAL S22 1 PORT NUMBER OF AVGS REFLECTION XXXX NUMBER OF AVGS XXX START THRU UPDATE PORT 1 CONNECTION LEFT/RIGHT LOAD XXXX PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH TEST SIGNALS START AUTOCAL THRU XXXX PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH ISOLATION XXXX Cal Sequence Menus, Page 4-18 AUTOCAL TYPE S11 1 PORT S22 1 PORT Menu ACAL_FULL AUTOCAL FULL 2 PORT FULL 2 PORT ADAPTER REMOVAL ISOLATION AVERAGING OMIT DEFAULT AVERAGING FACTOR XXXX THRU TYPE CALIBRATOR/TRUE PORT CONFIG L=1, R=2 R=1, L=2 TEST SIGNALS START AUTOCAL PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Menu ACAL_AR Menu U1 Utility Menu UTILITY GPIB ADDRESSES DISPLAY INSTRUMENT PARAMETERS GENERAL DISK UTILITIES CAL COMPONENT UTILITIES AUTOCAL UTILITIES COLOR CONFIGURATION DATA ON(OFF) DRAWING BLANK(ING) FREQUENCY INFORMATION SET DATE/TIME AUTOCAL ADAPTER REMOVAL ISOLATION AVERAGING OMIT DEFAULT Menu ACAL_UTIL AUTOCAL UTILITIES AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION SAVE TO HARD DISK SAVE TO FLOPPY DISK RECALL FROM HARD DISK RECALL FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF Menu ACAL_CHAR AVERAGING FACTOR XXXX AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION PORT CONFIG ADAPT&L=1, R=2 L=1, ADAPT&R=2 ADAPT&R=1, L=2 R=1, ADAPT&L=2 SWITCH AVERAGING XXXX PORT CONFIG L=1, R=2 R=1, L=2K NUMBER OF AVGS REFLECTION XXXX TEST SIGNALS START AUTOCAL PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH LOAD XXXX THRU XXXX ISOLATION XXXX START AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION Cal Sequence Menus, Page 4-18 Cal Sequence Menus, Page 4-18 PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Figure 10-3. 10-14 AutoCal Menus Flow Diagram 37XXXD OM Chapter 11 Operational Checkout Procedures Table of Contents 11-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-2 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-3 INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-4 SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-5 NON-RATIO POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 11-6 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 WARNING Repair This equipment can not be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to remove the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components. Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire and shock hazards should service this equipment. There are high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk of damage to precision components. Chapter 11 Operational Checkout Procedures 11-1 11-2 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides quick operational checkout procedures that may be used by incoming inspectors to ensure that the Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer is operational. This is a quick-check procedure. For the full performance verification procedure, refer to the Series 37XXXD Maintenance Manual, Anritsu Part Number 10410-00264. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT The following equipment is required for the procedures in this chapter: q Flexible microwave cable (through line) q Short 11-3 Before starting the performance tests, press the Power key (left) to On. INITIAL SETUP . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement NOTE Allow the system to warm up for at least 60 minutes to ensure operation to performance specifications. Power 11-4 SELF TEST 37XXXD OM Perform an instrument self test to ensure that the VNA is operating properly. To start a self test, Press the Option Menu key and make the menu choices shown in Figure 11-1. 11-3 NON-RATIO POWER OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT OPTIONS TRIGGERS REAR PANEL OUTPUT DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS START SELF TEST MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL READ SERVICE LOG INSTALLED OPTIONS RECEIVER MODE PERIPHERAL TESTS SOURCE CONFIG TROUBLESHOOTING (FOR SERVICE USE ONLY) PRESS < ENTER> TO SELECT H/W CALIBRATIONS (FOR SERVICE USE ONLY) PRESS < Enter> Figure 11-1. 11-5 NON-RATIO POWER Performing a Self Test This test verifies that each individual receiver channel operates properly. Measurement calibration of the system is not required for this test. This test requires that you press specified front panel keys and make choices from the displayed menu(s). The keys used in this test are shown below. . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Channels Channel Menu Channel Menu Measurement Ch 1 Ch 2 Setup Menu Ch 3 Ch 4 Hold Display Graph Type S Params 11-4 Data Points Domain Appl Setup Menu Enhancement Graph Type Set Scale Auto Scale Option Menu S Params Ref Plane Trace Memory Avg/ Smooth Menu Video IF BW Trace Smooth Graph Type Average 37XXXD OM OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT Test Procedure Menu Choice Options Menu Non-Ratioed Parameters, see Figure 11-2 Setup Menu START: 1 GHz STOP: High-End Frequency Channel Menu FOUR CHANNELS Graph Type LOG MAGNITUDE (All channels) S-PARAMS SET SCALE Perform test as described below. Step 1. Key NON-RATIO POWER Connect Test Ports 1 and 2 together using a high-quality through line (below). PORT 1 PORT 2 TEST PORT 1 TEST PORT 2 USER 1: (Channel 3) Parameter: Ra/1 Phase Lock: Ra USER 2: (Channel 1) Parameter: Ta/1 Phase Lock: Ra USER 3: (Channel 2) Parameter: Tb/1 Phase Lock: Ra USER 4: (Channel 4) Parameter: Rb/1 Phase Lock: Rb RESOLUTION: 20 dB/DIV REF VALUE: 0 dB (All four channels) Step 2. Reset the VNA using the Default Program key. Step 3. Set up the VNA as shown in table at left. Step 4. Observe the sweep indicators and allow at least one complete sweep to occur on all four channels. Step 5. Verify that the minimum amplitude meets the specifications shown below. Model 37217C . Channels Display Marker Menu 37XXXD OM Readout Marker - Test Channel >-28 dB Reference Channel >-35 dB 37317C >-28 dB >-35 dB 37225C >-25 dB >-34 dB 37325C >-30 dB >-32 dB 37247C >-26 dB >-35 dB 37347C >-31 dB >-33 dB 37269C >-40 dB >-40 dB 37369C >-34 dB >-34 dB Measurement Enhancement 37277C >-45 dB >-45 dB 37377C >-45 dB >-45 dB 37297C >-60 dB >-55 dB 37397C >-60 dB >-55 dB NOTE Use the Marker Menu and Readout Marker keys ( left) and menus to obtain precise frequency and amplitude values. 11-5 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST 11-6 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT The following test verifies that the high-level signal noise in the VNA will not significantly affect the accuracy of subsequent measurements. Calibration of the system is not required for this test. This test requires that you press specified front panel keys and make choices from the displayed menu(s). The keys used in this test are highlighted below. . Key Menu Choice Setup Menu START: 40 MHz STOP: High-end frequency Channel Menu Measurement Display Enhancement DUAL CHANNELS 1-3 Graph Type LOG MAGNITUDE (Both channels) Set Scale RESOLUTION: 0.020 dB/DIV REF VALUE: 0.0 dB (Both channels) S-Params Limits - Channels Channel 1 – S12 Channel 3 – S21 Data Points 201 Video IF BW NORMAL (1 kHz) Limits UPPER LIMIT ON 0.015 if less than 40 GHz 0.04 if 40 GHz 0.14 if above 40 GHz Channels Channel Menu Channel Menu Set Scale Graph Type S Params Setup Menu Measurement Ch 1 Ch 2 Setup Menu Ch 3 Ch 4 Hold Display Data Points Domain Data Points Appl Enhancement Graph Type Set Scale Auto Scale Option Menu S Params Ref Plane Trace Memory Avg/ Smooth Menu Video IF BW Trace Smooth Average Video IF BW Average Avg/Smooth Menu Setup the VNA as described in the table at the left. LOWER LIMIT ON -0.015 if less than 40 GHz -0.04 if 40 GHz -0.14 if above 40 GHz DISPLAY LIMITS ON 11-6 37XXXD OM OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST Perform the test as described below: PORT 1 PORT 2 Step 1. Reset the VNA using the Default Program key. Step 2. Connect Test Port 1 and Test Port 2 (top left) together. Step 3. Press the Ch 1 key. Step 4. Press the Trace Memory key. Step 5. Choose VIEW DATA from the menu and press the Enter key. Step 6. While observing the sweep indicators, allow at least two complete sweeps to occur. Step 7. Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from the menu and press the Enter key. Step 8. Choose VIEW DATA / MEMORY from the menu and press the Enter key. Step 9. While observing the sweep indicators, allow at least two complete sweeps to occur. Step 10. Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls within the area between the two limit lines (Figure 11-2, following page). Step 11. Press the Ch 3 key. Step 12. Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3. Step 13. Press the S Params key; set Ch 1 for S11 and Ch 3 for S22. Step 14. Connect a Short to Test Port 1 and an Open to Test Port 2 (left). Step 15. Repeat Steps 2 through 9. TEST PORT 1 TEST PORT 2 PORT 1 TEST PORT 1 SHORT TEST PORT 2 OPEN 37XXXD OM PORT 2 11-7 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION LOG MAG. REF= 0.040000000 0.000 dB GHz 0.020 dB/DIV 20.000000000 S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION LOG MAG. 0.040000000 Figure 11-2. 11-8 REF= 0.000 dB GHz 0.020 dB/DIV 20.000000000 High Level Noise Test Waveform 37XXXD OM Chapter 12 Calibration Kits Table of Contents 12-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12-2 PURPOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12-3 KIT CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Model 3650 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Model 3651 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Model 3652 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Model 3653 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Model 3654/ 3654B Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Model 3656 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 12-4 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Pin Depth Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Over Torquing Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Teflon Tuning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Mechanical Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 12-5 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Chapter 12 Calibration Kits 12-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides illustrations and contents for the Models 3650, 3651, 3652, 3653, 3654/3654B, 36550 and 36552 Calibration Kits. 12-2 PURPOSE The calibration kits contain all of the precision components and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer System for a 12-term error-corrected measurement. 12-3 KIT CONTENTS The contents and illustrations of the calibration kits are listed on the following pages. 37XXXD OM 12-3 KIT CONTENTS Model 3650 Calibration Kit CALIBRATION KITS Table 12-1. Index Model 3650 (SMA/3.5 mm) Calibration Kit Contents Anritsu Part Number 1 01-212 2 3 Description Qty. Female Flush Short (Option 1) 1 01-211 Male Flush Short (Option 1) 1 17SF50 Female Sliding Termination 1 4 17S50 Male Sliding Termination (Option 1) 1 5 34ASF50-2 Female Adapter 2 6 Calibration Software Diskette 1 7 33FSF50 Female-Female Adapter 2 8 33SS50 Male-Male Adapter* 1 9 28S50-2 Male Termination 2 10 28SF50-2 Broadband Female Termination 2 11 33SSF50 Male-Female Adapter* 2 12 24S50 Male Open 1 13 23SF50 Female Open 1 14 23S50 Male Short 1 15 23SF50 Female Short 1 16 34AS50-2 Male Adapter 2 17 Connector Thumb Wheel 4 18 01-201 Torque Wrench 1 19 01-210 Reference Flat 1 20 01-222 Pin Depth Gauge 1 21 01-223 Pin Depth Gauge 1 5 W IL T R O N M O D E L 3 6 5 0 4 3 2 2 1 1 6 * 7 * 2 2 8 1 9 1 8 1 7 Figure 12-1. 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 * 1 0 9 Model 3650 (SMA/3.5 mm) Calibration Kit Components * Phase Equal Adapters 12-4 37XXXD OM CALIBRATION KITS Model 3651 Calibration Kit KIT CONTENTS Table 12-2. Index Model 3651 (GPC-7) Calibration Kit Contents Anritsu Part Number Description Qty. 1 01-221 Collet and Extractor Tool 1 2 28A50-2 Broadband Termination 2 3 24A50 Open 1 4 23A50 Short 1 Calibration Software Diskettet 1 5 6 17A50 Sliding Termination (Option 1) 1 7 01-200 Torque Wrench 1 8 01-210 Reference Flat 1 9 01-220 Pin Depth Gauge 1 1 WILTRON 2 3 4 MODEL 3651 5 9 8 6 7 Figure 12-2. 37XXXD OM Model 3651 (GPC-7) Calibration Kit Components 12-5 KIT CONTENTS Model 3652 Calibration Kit CALIBRATION KITS Table 12-3. Index Model 3652 (K-Connector) Calibration Kit Contents Anritsu Part Number 1 01-212 2 3 Description Qty. Female Flush Short (Option 1) 1 01-211 Male Flush Short (Option 1) 1 17KF50 Female Sliding Termination 1 4 17K50 Male Sliding Termination (Option 1) 1 5 34AKF50-2 Female Adapter 2 6 Calibration Software Diskette 1 7 33FKF50 Female-Female Adapter 2 8 33KK50 Male-Male Adapter* 1 9 28K50-2 Male Termination 2 10 28KF50-2 Broadband Female Termination 2 11 33KKF50 Male-Female Adapter* 2 12 24K50 Male Open 1 13 23KF50 Female Open 1 14 23K50 Male Short 1 15 23KF50 Female Short 1 16 34AK50-2 Male Adapter 2 17 Connector Thumb Wheel 4 18 01-201 Torque Wrench 1 19 01-210 Reference Flat 1 20 01-222 Pin Depth Gauge 1 21 01-223 Pin Depth Gauge 1 5 W IL T R O N M O D E L 3 6 5 2 4 3 2 1 2 1 6 * 7 * 2 2 8 1 9 1 8 1 7 Figure 12-3. 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 * 1 0 9 Model 3652 (K-Connector) Calibration Kit Components * Phase Equal Adapters 12-6 37XXXD OM CALIBRATION KITS Model 3653 Calibration Kit KIT CONTENTS Table 12-4. Index Model 3653 (Type N) Calibration Kit Contents Anritsu Part Number Description 1 28N50-2 Broadband Male Termination 2 34AN50-2 Male Adapter 2 Calibration Software Diskette 1 3 2 4 34ANF50-2 Female Adapter 2 5 28NF50-2B Braodband Female Termination 2 6 24NF50 Female Open 1 7 24N50 Male Open 1 8 23NF50 Female Short 1 9 23N50 Male Short 1 10 01-213 Reference Gauge 1 11 01-224 Pin Depth Gauge 1 1 WILTRON 2 MODEL 3653 11 3 10 Figure 12-4. 37XXXD OM Qty. 9 8 7 6 5 4 Model 3653 (Type N) Calibration Kit Components 12-7 KIT CONTENTS Model 3654/ 3654B Calibration Kit CALIBRATION KITS Table 12-5. Index Model 3654 (V-Connector) Calibration Kit Contents Anritsu Part Number 1 17VF50B 2 3 Description Qty. Female Sliding Termination 1 17V50B Male Sliding Termination 1 33VVF50 Male-Female Adapter 2 4 2360-54B Calibration Software Diskette 1 5 28V50B Male Broadband Termination 2 6 28VF50B Female Broadband Termination 2 7 24V50B Male Open 1 8 24VF50B Female Open 1 9 23V50B-5.1 Male Short, 5.1 mm 1 10 23VF50B-5.1 Female Short, 5.1 mm 1 11 33VV50 Male-Male Adapter 1 12 33VFVF50 Female-Female Adapter 2 Connector Thumb Wheel 4 14 01-201 Torque Wrench 1 15 01-323 Female Adapter For Pin Gauge 1 16 01-322 Pin Depth Gauge 1 17 01-210 Reference Flat 1 18 01-204 Adapter Wrench 1 19 01-312 Male Flush Short 1 20 01-311 Female Flush Short 1 13 1 WILTRON 2 MODEL 3654 3 20 19 18 17 4 16 15 5 14 13 Figure 12-5. 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Model 3654 (V-Connector) Calibration Kit Components * Phase Equal Adapters 12-8 37XXXD OM CALIBRATION KITS Model 3656 Calibration Kit KIT CONTENTS Table 12-6. Index Anritsu Part Number Description Qty. 1 23W50-1 23W50-2 23W50-3 Male Offset Short 1 (2.02 mm) Male Offset Short 2 (2.65 mm) Male Offset Short 3 (3.180 mm) 2 24W50 Male Open (1.510 mm) 1 3 28W50 Male Broadband Termination 1 4 23WF50-1 23WF50-2 23WF50-3 Female Offset Short 1 (2.02 mm) Female Offset Short 2 (2.65 mm) Female Offset Short 3 (3.180 mm) 1 1 1 5 28WF50 Female Broadband Termination 1 6 24WF50 Female Open (1.930 mm) 1 7 33WSC50 Fixed Male SC Connector 1 8 33WFSC50 Fixed Female SC Connector 1 1 1 1 9 Interchangeable Sliders, SC Connectors 1 10 Locking Keys, SC Connectors 1 11 01-402 Interchangeable Adapter Fixed Male 1 12 33WWF50 Male-Female Adapter 1 13 33WW50 Male-Male Adapter 1 14 33WFWF50 Female-Female Adapter 1 15 01-504 6 mm Torque Wrench 1 16 01-505 6x7 mm End Wrench 1 17 18-WWF50-1B Stepped Impedance Thruline (Verification Device) 1 18 18-WWF50-1 50W Matched Thruline (Verification Device) 1 19 Figure 12-6. 37XXXD OM Model 3656 (W1-Connector) Calibration Kit Contents Calibration/Verification Software Model 3656 (W1-Connector) Calibration Kit Components 12-9 PRECAUTIONS 12-4 PRECAUTIONS Pin Depth CALIBRATION KITS The following are precautionary notes related to the use of connectors. For specific information on setting pin depths on sliding terminations, refer to the 37XXXD Operation Manual, Chapter 7. Before mating, measure the pin depth (Figure 12-7) of the device that will mate with the RF component, using an Anritsu Pin Depth Gauge or equivalent (Figure 12-8). Based on RF components returned for repair, destructive pin depth of mating connectors is the major cause of failure in the field. When an RF component is mated with a connector having a destructive pin depth, damage will likely occur to the RF component connector. (A destructive pin depth has a center pin that is too long in respect to the connector’s reference plane.) REFERENCE PLANE REFERENCE PLANE PIN DEPTH (INCHES) FEMALE Figure 12-7. 12-10 PIN DEPTH (INCHES) MALE N-Connector Pin Depth 37XXXD OM CALIBRATION KITS Pin Depth Tolerance PRECAUTIONS The center pin of RF component connectors has a precision tolerance measured in mils (1/1000 inch). Connectors on test devices that mate with RF components may not be precision types and may not have the proper depth. They must be measured before mating to ensure suitability. When gauging pin depth, if the test device connector measures out of tolerance (Table 12-7) in the “+” region of the gauge (Figure 12-8), the center pin is too long. Mating under this condition will likely damage the termination connector. On the other hand, if the test device connector measures out of tolerance in the “–” region, the center pin is too short. While this will not cause any damage, it will result in a poor connection and a consequent degradation in performance. Table 12-7. Pin Depth Tolerances Port/Connector Type GPC 7 1 0 .207 2 2 1 1 3 4 5 N Female WSMA Male 2 3 +0.000 to –0.003 N Male 1 2 Pin Depth (mils) 4 WSMA Male +0.003 -0.003 Anritsu Gauge Setting Same as pin depth Same as pin depth –0.0025 –0.0035 Same as pin depth +0.000 to –0.003 Same as pin depth K Male K Female V Male +0.000 to –0.001 V Female +0.000 to –0.001 Same as pin depth Figure 12-8. Pin Depth Gauge Over Torquing Connectors Over torquing connectors is destructive; it may damage the connector center pin. Finger-tight is usually sufficient, especially on Type N connectors. Never use pliers to tighten connectors. Teflon Tuning Washers The center conductor on most RF components contains a small teflon tuning washer located near the point of mating (interface). This washer compensates for minor impedance discontinuities at the interface. The washer’s location is critical to the RF component’s performance. Do not disturb it. Mechanical Shock RF components are designed to withstand years of normal bench handling. However, do not drop or otherwise treat them roughly. They are laboratory-quality devices, and like other such devices, they require careful handling. 37XXXD OM 12-11 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS 12-5 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS CALIBRATION KITS Connector interfaces—especially the outer conductors on the GPC 7 and SMA connectors—should be kept clean and free of dirt and other debris. Denatured alcohol applied with a cotton swab applicator is recommended for cleaning connector interfaces. NOTE Most cotton swabs are too large to fit in the smaller connector types. It is necessary to remove most of the cotton and then twist the remaining cotton tight. Be sure that the remaining cotton does not get stuck in the connector. The following are some important tips on cleaning connectors: q Use only denatured alcohol as a solvent q Always use an appropriate size of cotton swab q Gently move the cotton swab around the center conductor q Never put lateral pressure on the connector’s center pin q Verify that no cotton or other foreign material remains in the connector after cleaning q Only dampen the cotton swab. Do NOT saturate it q Compressed air can be used to remove foreign particles and to dry the connector q Verify that the center pin has not been bent or damaged Figure 12-9, following page, illustrates how to clean connectors. 12-12 37XXXD OM CALIBRATION KITS CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS D E N A T U R E D A L C O H O L W A T E R IN D U S T R IA L S O L V E N T S D o N O T u s e In d u s tr ia l S o lv e n ts o r W a te r o n c o n n e c to r . U s e o n ly D e n a tu r e d A lc o h o l. U s e o n ly d e n a tu r e d a lc o h o l a n d th e p r o p e r s iz e o f c o tto n s w a b . G e n tly r o ta te th e s w a b a r o u n d th e c e n te r p in b e in g c a r e fu l n o t to s tr e s s o r b e n d th e p in o r y o u w ill d a m a g e th e c o n n e c to r. D o N O T p u t c o tto n s w a b s in a t a n a n g le , o r y o u w ill d a m a g e th e c o n n e c to r s . D o N O T u s e to o la r g e o f c o tto n s w a b , o r y o u w ill d a m a g e th e c o n n e c to r s . Figure 12-9. 37XXXD OM How to Clean Connectors 12-13/12-14 Chapter 13 Millimeter Wave System Table of Contents 13-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13-3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Test Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Measurement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 13-4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 13-5 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 13-6 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Entering/ Leaving Millimeter Wave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Changing Bands/Modules While in Millimeter Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Allowable Millimeter Wave Module Configurations, Measurements and Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Effect of Default Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Redefinition of Band Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Use of Normal Multiple Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Stored Setups and Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 External Source and Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 13-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 13-8 REMOTE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 13-9 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 13-10 OPERATION CHECKOUT—IF POWER LEVEL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Table of Contents (Continued) 13-11 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— TRANSMISSION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 13-12 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— REFLECTION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30 Chapter 13 Millimeter Wave System 13-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the ME7808B Millimeter Wave System, its operation, and its measurement capabilities. For information on ME7808B Broadband System, refer to Chapter 14. 13-2 DESCRIPTION The ME7808B Millimeter Wave System can be constructed upon any 37XXXD VNA, 37247D being the most economical choice. It also requires two 680XXC or MG369XA Frequency Synthesizers, and a 3735B Millimeter Test Set having two 374X Millimeter Wave Modules. There are 14 different 374X modules available (below) to accommodate different measurement types and frequency ranges. q 3741A-V 50 to 75 GHz Transmission Module q 3741A-E 60 to 90 GHz Transmission Module q 3741A-EE56 to 94 GHz Transmission Module q 3741A-W 75 to 110 GHz Transmission Module q 3741A-EW 65 to 110 GHz Transmission Module q 3740A-V 50 to 75 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module q 3740A-E 60 to 90 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module q 3740A-EE 56 to 94 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module q 3740A-W 75 to 110 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module q 3740A-EW 65 to 110 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module 37XXXC OM 13-3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 13-3 Performance specifications are given below in Table 13-1. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS System Performance Table 13-1. MILLIMETER WAVE “Receiver Dynamic Range” is defined as the ratio of the maximum signal level at Port 2 for 0.1 dB compression to the noise floor at Port 2. "System Dynamic Range" is defined as the ratio of the power incident on Port 2 in a through line connection (reference) to the noise floor at Port 2 (forward measurements only). The "Noise Floor" is the maximum measured signal with the test ports terminated using 10 Hz IF bandwidth and 512 averages. Performance Specifications, Millimeter Wave Modules Model Specification V Band (WR-15) E Band (WR-12) Extended E Band W Band (WR-10) Extended W Band Frequency Range (GHz) 50–75 60– 90 56–60 60–85 85–94 75–100 100–110 65–75 75–100 100–110 Frequency Resolution 3 Hz 6 Hz 6 Hz 6 Hz 6 Hz Max Signal Into Port 2 +8 dBm +8 dBm +8 dBm +6 dBm +6 dBm Noise Floor –90 dBm –90 dBm –85 dBm –90 dBm –76 dBm –90 dBm –90 dBm –90 dBm –89 dBm –87 dBm Receiver Dynamic Range 98 dB 98 dB 93 dB 98 dB 84 dB 96 dB 96 dB 96 dB 95 dB 93 dB High Level Noise (typical) 0.05 dB 0.06 dB 0.08 dB 0.06 dB 0.08 dB Power Out (typical) +7 dBm +6 dBm +5 dBm +6 dBm +4 dBm +5 dBm +2 dBm –5 dBm +5 dBm +2 dBm System Dynamic Range 97 dB 96 dB 90 dB 96 dB 80 dB 95 dB 92 dB 85 dB 94 dB 89 dB 13-4 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Test Port Characteristics Table 13-2. Test port characteristics for the waveguide connector used on the various modules are given in Table 13-2. Test Port Characteristics Waveguide Designation Offset Short Calibration Specification WR-15 WR-12 WR-12 Ext. WR-10 LRL Calibration WR-10 Ext. WR-15 WR12 WR-12 Ext. WR10 WR-10 Ext. Frequency (GHz) 50–75 60–90 56–94 75–110 65–110 50–75 60–90 56–94 75–110 65–110 Directivity (dB) >46 >46 >44 >46 >40 >46 >46 >44 >46 >40 Source Match (dB) >37 >36 >33 >36 >30 >46 >46 >43 >46 >40 Load Match (dB) >46 >46 >44 >46 >40 >46 >46 >44 >46 >40 Reflection Frequency Tracking (dB) ±0.030 ±0.040 ±0.080 ±0.040 ±0.080 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.06 ±0.02 ±0.06 Transmission Frequency Tracking (dB) ±0.060 ±0.060 ±0.100 ±0.070 ±0.100 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.06 ±0.02 ±0.06 Isolation (dB) >90 >80 >90 >80 >90 >90 >80 >90 >80 >90 Measurement Capabilities Measurement capabilities are the same as the standard 37XXXD. That is: Four Channels, Standard S-parameters as well as User Defined Parameters, Auto-Reversing, Data Points 1601, 801, 201, 51, N Discrete, and CW (see Appendix D). NOTE When a 37XXXD is configured as a Millimeter Wave System, the frequency range is extended per the specifications of the Millimeter Wave Modules and the system will be limited to operate with only two external sources. That is, the internal source is removed or disabled. 37XXXD OM 13-5 INSTALLATION 13-4 INSTALLATION MILLIMETER WAVE This section describes installation and system check-out. For instructions on installation of the wafer probe test station, refer to section 14-5. IMPORTANT NOTES · The empty console weighs approximately 66kg (145 pounds). Use two people to remove the console from the pallet. · Many of the instruments are quite heavy and require two people to lift them. · Instruments should be loaded into the bottom sections of the console first, to prevent tipping of the console. · The VNA instrument has fragile RF cables connected to both the front and rear panels. Be careful not to bend these cables when handling the instrument. · If the synthesizers are not installed precisely as described below, the system will be non-functional. · We suggest using an 8 in/lb torque wrench to tighten SMA connectors (available in most Anritsu VNA Calibration kits) Do not tighten any connectors over 8 in/lbs. 13-6 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE Console and Table Setup INSTALLATION Set up the console and table as described below. Step 1. Remove the shipping container and all packaging and accessories from around the console. Set the table aside. Instructions for table installation appear later. Step 2. Lift or roll the console off the pallet (to lift: insert two sections of lumber through the console top and lift it, using one person on each side). Step 3. Cut the tie wraps which are securing the table mounting rails at the console rear door. Cut the tie wraps which are securing the power cords and wrist strap ground wire. Step 4. Attach the mounting rails to the table as shown in Figure 13-1. 1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H # 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R IN S T A L L IN 6 P L A C E S 1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H # 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R # 1 0 F L A T W A S H E R IN S T A L L IN T W O P L A C E S A F T E R P L A C IN G T H E W R IT IN G S U R F A C E IN T O T H E C O N S O L E . Figure 13-1. 37XXXD OM Console Table 13-7 INSTALLATION Instrument Installation into Console 13-8 MILLIMETER WAVE Refer to Figures 13-2, 13-3, and 13-4 for installation of major instruments and cables. Step 1. Check the rear panel serial number labels of the synthesizers. The instrument without Option 15 belongs in the bottom compartment (“RF” synthesizer). Step 2. Install the synthesizer with Option 15 in the second opening from the bottom. Step 3. Install the VNA into the top compartment. Ensure the three small RF cables are installed onto the front and rear panels (one in front, and two in back). Step 4. Install the 3738A Test Set into the compartment below the VNA. Step 5. Secure all instruments in the console using the screws provided. Step 6. On the left front of the console, move the black ground wire away from the guide of the table-mounting rail, and install the table by sliding the table rails into the guides. Step 7. Secure the table rails at the rear of the console using the screws provided. 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE Figure 13-2. 37XXXD OM INSTALLATION ME7808B Console Showing Major Components 13-9 INSTALLATION Figure 13-3. 13-10 MILLIMETER WAVE Step 8. Lay the static-safe mat on the table and attach the ground cable. Step 9. Unpack the millimeter-wave modules and set them on the table. ME7808B Console Showing Table and Module Setup 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE System Cabling 37XXXD OM INSTALLATION Connect ME7808B system cables as described below and shown in Figure 13-4 on the following page. Step 1. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between the upper synthesizer and the 3738A LO IN connector. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and tightened securely. Step 2. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between the bottom synthesizer and the 3738A RF IN connector. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and tightened securely. Step 3. From the front, install the two RF cable sets between the 3738A and the mmW modules. Connect exactly as the labels indicate. Step 4. From the rear, unscrew the four small chain-mounted terminations from on VNA (let them hang loose) and install the Cable Set. Connect individual cables as indicated on the labels . Step 5. Connect one GPIB cable from the lower (Dedicated) GPIB connector of the VNA to the upper synthesizer. Connect the second GPIB cable between the two synthesizers. Step 6. Insert the power cords into all 4 instruments and turn all the instruments on. Step 7. Ensure that the two synthesizers' GPIB addresses are set correctly. The top unit should be set to address 4 and the bottom unit should be set to address 5. This can be verified or changed by pressing SYSTEM |CONFIG |GPIB ADDRESS and entering the appropriate GPIB address. 13-11 INSTALLATION GPIB Cable MILLIMETER WAVE Cable Set. Install individual cables as marked GPIB Cable GPIB Cable Power Cords Figure 13-4. 13-12 ME7808B Console Rear Panel Cabling 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE 13-5 CALIBRATION CALIBRATION Calibration for millimeter wave measurements is accomplished using a waveguide offset-short method. Anritsu provides the Series 3655X, 3655X-1, 3755X, and 3755X-1 Calibration Kits, which contain all required precision calibration components. For optimum calibration and measurement results, the following apply to modules that are not provided with precision waveguide extensions. (Refer to Figure 13-5 below, for a supporting illustration.) q Use the precision waveguide extension from the calibration kit to connect to the waveguide module q During calibration connect the highly polished (non-beveled) side of the short toward the module Waveguide Extension from Calibration Kit MODULE New reference plane Reference Plane MODULE OFFSET SHORT Beveled side Highly Polished Side Figure 13-5. 37XXXD OM Waveguide Connections for Optimum Measurement and Calibration Results 13-13 OPERATION 13-6 OPERATION MILLIMETER WAVE The ME7808B Millimeter Wave System is menu driven and the millimeter wave operation is entered into via the Enhancement Key-Group’s Options Menu key. Selecting Millimeter Wave BAND DEFINITION in that menu provides for defining measurement parameters; selecting TEST SET CONFIG provides for configuring the 3735B Test Set parameters (Figure 13-6, next page). The menu options shown in Figure 13-6, Millimeter Wave System Menu Flow, are described in Appendix A, along with all of the other ME7808B menus. Additional operating instructions are provided below. Entering/ Leaving Millimeter Wave Operation MENU OPTNS OPTIONS TRIGGERS REAR PANEL OUTPUT Millimeter Wave BAND DEFINITION RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG TEST SET CONFIG MENU OTS1 TEST SET CONFIGURATION INTERNAL MILLIMETER WAVE 13-14 Before entering the Millimeter Wave mode, users should have completed all of the steps in the “Installation” section of this manual. The system should be ready for operation, with all connections properly made to the Millimeter Wave test set, modules, and frequency synthesizers. The system should then be powered up, and the procedure below followed. NOTE Until the Millimeter Wave configuration is activated, the system will not operate and it will fail to lock. CAUTION The transition to or from Millimeter Wave operation is a major setup change that does NOT preserve the previous setup. All current set up and RF calibration information will be lost on entering or leaving the Millimeter Wave mode configuration. If the existing setup needs to be saved, this should be done before the system is reconfigured for Millimeter Wave mode operation. When the millimeter wave band is selected, the system automatically reconfigures itself to measure at that frequency range. The lower and upper limits of the displayed sweep frequencies will change to the band selected. The frequency resolution changes to account for multiplier factors. However, users will (1) have access to the multiple source control definitions and (2) be able to change the sweep frequencies as desired. Procedure The first step is to press the Options button on the front panel. This brings up the menu OPTNS (top left). Select TEST SET CONFIG. This causes the menu OTS1 (bottom left) to appear. 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Option Menu MENU OPTNS OPTIONS REAR PANEL OUTPUT DIAGNOSTICS MILLIMETER WAVE BAND DEFINITION RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG PLOT OPTIONS TEST SET CONFIG MENU MMW4 TO SELECT PRESS Mm WAVE BAND BAND START FREQ XX.XXXXXX XX.XXXXXX BAND STOP FREQ MENU OTS1 TEST SET CONFIGURATION INTERNAL EQUATION TO EDIT SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 RECEIVER MILLIMETER WAVE EQUATION SUMMARY PRESS TO SELECT MENU OTS2 MENU MMW1 MILLIMETER WAVE TEST SET BAND WR-22 (33 - 50 GHz) WR-15 (50 - 75 GHz) WR-12 (60 - 90 GHz) WR-12 EXTENDED (56 - 94 GHz) TEST SET CONFIGURATION WARNING CONTINUING WILL INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION PRESS TO SELECT C.W. ON/OFF MULTIPLIER XXX DIVISOR XXX OFFSET FREQ XXXXXXXX DEFAULT EQUATIONS ACCEPT EQUATIONS TO MENU SU1/SU2 WR-10 (75 - 110 GHz) WR-10 EXTENDED (65 - 110 GHz) MENU MMW3 TEST SET CONFIGURATION WR-8 90- 140 GHz) PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT mm WAVE BAND: XXXXXXXXXX MENU MMW2 MILLIMETER WAVE TEST SET MODULES PORT 1 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE PORT 2 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE ACCEPT CONFIG PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT Figure 13-6. 37XXXD OM PORT 1 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE PORT 2 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE WARNING CONTINUING WILL INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION PRESS TO SELECT Millimeter Wave System Menu Flow 13-15 OPERATION MENU MMW1 MILLIMETER WAVE TEST SET BAND WR-22 (33 - 50 GHz) WR-15 (50 - 75 GHz) WR-12 (60 - 90 GHz) WR-12 EXTENDED (56 - 94 GHz) MILLIMETER WAVE If the system is not already configured for Millimeter Wave operation, select Millimeter Wave to call menu MMW1 (top left). In menu MMW1, select the millimeter wave band for which modules have been installed. CAUTION A band other than the one for which hardware is installed can be selected. In this case, the system may appear to operate normally, but it will not make accurate measurements. Upon completing the selection in the menu MMW1, menu MMW2 (bottom left), appears. WR-10 (75 - 110 GHz) WR-10 EXTENDED (65 - 110 GHz) MENU MMW2 MILLIMETER WAVE TEST SET MODULES PORT 1 MODULE 3740/41/42/NONE PORT 2 MODULE 3740/41/42/NONE ACCEPT CONFIG PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 13-16 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE MENU MMW3 TEST SET CONFIGURATION mmWAVE BAND XXXXXXXX PORT 1 MODULE 3740 OPERATION In this menu, select which module is Transmission-Reflection and which is Transmission Only. Do this carefully, as an incorrect selection causes the wrong S-parameters to be displayed. Once the selection is made in this menu, MMW3 (left) appears. At this point, users have one last opportunity to abort the change in configuration, by pressing the Clear key. If the Enter key is pressed, the old configuration is lost. The system is reconfigured for millimeter wave operation. PORT 2 MODULE 3740 WARNING CONTINIUING MAY INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT 37XXXD OM 13-17 OPERATION MILLIMETER WAVE Changing Bands/Modules While in Millimeter Wave The effect of changing millimeter wave bands while in Millimeter Wave mode operation will be to (1) change the sweep frequency range to the default range for the new band and (2) delete any current RF calibrations. Therefore, the Caution on page 13-14 applies. Actually, it is unlikely that any calibration would be valid if the modules are changed. (This is because of manufacturing variations from module to module.) To configure the system for a different band or for one or more different modules, follow the exact same steps as described on pages 13-14 through 13-16, except that only the new band or module types are changed. The S-parameter measurements and RF calibrations allowed are a function of the type of millimeter wave module users have selected in menu MMW2. Note that one could actually have only one module and still make reflection-only measurements. The criteria in Table 13-4 applies. Allowable Millimeter Wave Module Configurations, Measurements and Calibrations Table 13-4. Calibration Criteria MMW Modules Allowed S-parameters Port 1 Port 2 S11 3740 3740 X 3740 3741 X 3741 3740 3741 3740 13-18 S12 S21 S22 X X X X X b1/1 Allowed RF Calibrations 12 Term Forward 1 Path 2 Port Reverse 1 Path 2 Port Reflection P1 Reflection P2 X X X X X X X b2/1 b2/1 b1/1 X Forward Reverse Trans Trans X X X X X X X X X 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION Effect of Default Program Because the system is reconfigured for Millimeter Wave mode operation, the effects of performing a “Default Program” are somewhat different. Performing a default program operation, either from the front panel or via the GPIB will have the following results: q Pressing the Default Program key twice: The Millimeter Wave operating band, its associated frequency range, multipliers, and millimeter wave module types will remain unchanged. If the frequency range has been modified from the default values for the band, the modified values will remain in force. The current sweep range will be set to the band frequency range. This is consistent with other similar setup parameters, such as GPIB addresses q Pressing the Default Program key, then the 1 data entry key: Except for clearing the internal setup memories, the effect will be the same as for pressing the Default Program key twice q Pressing the Default Program key, then the 0 data entry key: The system resets to its default, non-millimeter wave configuration; that is, internal source active, no multiple source equations, normal default system frequency range, and internal test set configuration. If the “delete source” option is active, the system will attempt to use an external source for source 1 The restrictions stated in the above “Allowable Microwave Modules Configurations, Measurements, and Calibrations” section (previous page) will impact the display resulting from a “Default - Default” action. S-parameters displayed will be as indicated above, while the channel configuration will be as shown in Table 13-5. Table 13-5. Channel Configuration MMW Modules Port 1 Default Channel Configuration Port 2 S-parameters Assigned Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 3740 3740 All Four Channels S11 S12 S21 S22 3740 3741 Dual, Channels 1 and 3 S11 S21 S21 S11 3741 3740 Dual, Channels 2 and 4 S22 S12 S12 S22 3741 3741 All Four Channels b1/1 b2/1 b2/1 b1/1 Note: In the case of two 3741’s, the system will be put into SET ON mode. If users provide a phase-lock signal, they may set the “user-defined” receiver mode to TRACKING. 37XXXD OM 13-19 OPERATION Redefinition of Band Frequency Ranges MENU OPTNS OPTIONS TRIGGERS REAR PANEL OUTPUT Millimeter Wave BAND DEFINITION RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG TEST SET CONFIG MENU MMW4 mmWAVE BAND BAND START FREQ 65.000000 MILLIMETER WAVE It is possible to modify the Millimeter Wave band equations to a range different than the default range for the band currently installed. This is done by pressing the Options key to display menu OPTNS (top left). In this menu, select Millimeter Wave BAND DEFINITION and cause menu MMW4 (bottom left) to appear. The receiver equation or either of the sources may be edited. New values for the multiplier, the divisor, or the offset may be entered. To apply the selections, select ACCEPT EQUATIONS. Or select DEFAULT EQUATIONS to return selections or edits to the standard default values. The EXT_MILLIMETER WAVE 4 menu (Figure 13-7) appears next to menu Millimeter Wave 4 to provide the current or proposed band information. CAUTION It is possible for the equations to be set to values that may prevent normal operation of the system, due to excessive frequency range beyond the capabilities of the system hardware. The only way of restoring the system to its known default settings is by selecting DEFAULT EQUATIONS then ACCEPT EQUATIONS in menu MMW 4. Using the DEFAULT-DEFAULT method will not reset the equations. If the frequency range of a millimeter wave band is changed to a range where some or all of the frequencies are outside of the default range for that band, or if the frequency multipliers are altered, the change will be allowed, but upon selecting ACCEPT EQUATIONS in menu MMW4, a warning message will be issued in the data area: “CAUTION: NON-STD BAND DEFINITION.” If the frequency range of a Millimeter Wave band is changed to a range that is a subset of the default range for that band, no warning message will be issued. BAND STOP FREQ 110.000000 13-20 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION - MILLIMETER WAVE BAND DEFINITION SUMMARY BAND FREQUENCY RANGE BAND START F BAND STOP F XXX,XXXXXX XXX XXX.XXXXXX XXX FREQUENCY = (MULTIPLIER/DIVISOR) * F + OFFSET FREQ) SOURCE 1 = (1/ 8) * (F– 0.270000 GHz) SOURCE 2 = (1/ 6) * (F + 0.000000 GHz) RECEIVER = (1/ 1) * (0.270000 GHz C.W.) - NOTES 1. SELECT TO OVERWRITE DEFINITION WITH VALUES SUITABLE FOR THE MILLIMETER WAVE BAND. 2. SELECT TO CONFIRM ANY CHANGES. 3. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ARE VALID ONLY WHILE USING THE DEFAULT EQUATIONS OVER THE DEFAULT BAND FREQUENCY RANGE. 4. DEVIATING FROM THE DEFAULT MAY CAUSE LOCK FAILURES. Figure 13-7. Menu EXT_MMW4 Use of Normal Multiple Source Mode While the millimeter wave feature is active, the normal multiple source mode will not be available. Access to the menus OM0 through OM2 will not be allowed. If the system is in multiple source mode when switched to millimeter wave, all multiple source information will be lost, and the unit will return to normal (single source) operation when millimeter wave operation is ended. In Millimeter Wave mode, users may change the default values of the current waveguide band frequency range, multipliers, and offset (CW-IF) frequency, by using menu MMW4. Stored Setups and Calibrations The Millimeter Wave band definition and module information is stored with a stored setup in internal memory, and with the setup and RF CAL on disk. When a setup is recalled, first the band and module types will be compared with the current settings. If different, the setup will be rejected, and a message “ABORTED: HARDWARE DIFFERENT” will be posted. If the hardware settings are compatible, the frequency range of the stored setup will be compared with the current system low and high frequency limits, in case the user has employed a customized-band definition. If the recalled setup is within the current frequency range of the system, it will be recalled with no warning—even if the current range is customized. If the recalled setup is outside the normal frequency range, or if it has changed equations (been customized) it will be recalled. However, a time-out warning message will be issued in the data area: “CAUTION: NON-STD BAND DEFINITION.” 37XXXD OM 13-21 OPERATION External Source and Power Levels 13-22 MILLIMETER WAVE When MILLIMETER WAVE has been selected in menu OTS1, the system checks for the existence of two external sources. If either source is not connected and operating, a warning message is posted to the screen. On entering Millimeter Wave mode operation, the system will automatically be configured to use the two external sources. The Millimeter Wave mode will not function properly with low source-power levels. Therefore, on entering this mode the source-power levels will be adjusted to a predefined level. However the Source Config and Test Signals menus will still be available to users, to change power settings and source configuration if so desired. 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE 13-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE MENU MMW1 MILLIMETER WAVE TEST SET BAND WR-22 (33 - 50 GHz) MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE The measurement of a Device Under Test (DUT) using the Millimeter Wave mode is quite similar to one using a coaxial measurement technique. However, due to the more complex nature of the Millimeter Wave System equipment, additional care must be taken to ensure that everything is set up properly. Depending upon the type of measurement being performed, the setup may vary. The following is a description of a typical measurement procedure for a passive two-port DUT. Step 1. Verify Correct Band Definition Use menu MMW1 (top left) to examine the current millimeter wave band selection, and menu MMW2 (bottom left) to examine the current module selections to be sure that they match the installed hardware. Examine menuMMW4 (next page) to verify that the band equations are set correctly. If there is any doubt whether the setting are correct, use the DEFAULT EQUATIONS selection to reset them. Step 2. Verify Correct Setup for the System The safest way to do this is to press the Default key twice. This returns the system to the proper frequency range and power settings for the current millimeter wave hardware configuration. It is very important that the RF sources be set to the correct power levels. Set Source 1 (LO) to +17 dBm and Source 2 (RF) to +13 dBm. Step 3. Perform and Verify an RF Calibration The system may now be calibrated using an appropriate Anritsu Calibration Kit. Be sure to load the calibration kit information from the provided floppy disk into the instrument first. The default calibration type is Offset-Short, but an LRL/LRM calibration may also be used. See Chapters 4 and 7 for help with RF Calibration details. Consult Table 13-4 for limitations on which calibrations may be performed as a function of the module types installed. Step 4. Attach the DUT Use the calibrated torque wrench provided with the Calibration Kit to tighten the waveguide flange retaining screws on the DUT. This results in more reproducible measurements. Step 5. Select the S-parameter(s) and Graph Type(s) to Be Used for the Measurement The selection may be limited due to the types of millimeter wave modules installed. Consult Table 13-4 on page 13-18 for further information. WR-15 (50 - 75 GHz) WR-12 (60 - 90 GHz) WR-12 EXTENDED (56 - 94 GHz) WR-10 (75 - 110 GHz) WR-10 EXTENDED (65 - 110 GHz) WR-8 (90 - 140 GHz) PRESS TO SELECT MENU MMW2 MILLIMETER WAVE TEST SET MODULES PORT 1 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE PORT 2 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE ACCEPT CONFIG PRESS TO SELECT 37XXXD OM 13-23 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT Step 6. Set the Display Scale This may be done most quickly by selecting each active channel, and pressing the Autoscale key. The scale and reference values may then be set to a desired value using the appropriate SET SCALE menu for the graph type selected. Step 7. Observe the Measured Data It should not vary from sweep to sweep, and should be within the range expected for the type of measurement. Re-check tightness of the flange retaining screws if data appears abnormal. Step 8. Save the Calibration and Setup On the Hard Disk Press the Save/Recall key to initiate the saving of the current setup. An instrument setup in the millimeter wave configuration may be saved exactly like any other VNA setup and RF calibration. MENU MMW4 mmWAVE BAND BAND START FREQ 65.000000 BAND STOP FREQ 110.000000 EQUATION TO EDIT SOURCE 1 SOURCE 2 RECEIVER EQUATION SUMMARY CW OFF MULTIPLIER 1 DIVISOR 8 MILLIMETER WAVE NOTE Anritsu strongly recommends that any setup and calibration used for measurement be saved. DEFAULT EQUATIONS 13-8 13-24 REMOTE OPERATION All functions of the ME7808Bmm can be controlled remotely, via the IEEE 488 Bus (GPIB). The remote operation and controlling commands are provided in the 37XXX Programming Manual (PN: 10410-00262). 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE 13-9 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— GENERAL OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT The Operational Checkout subsection provides for checking that the ME7808B Millimeter Wave System is functioning properly. Required Equipment The following equipment is required to perform the verification tests. MENU OPTNS Model Description Anritsu 3655 Series Waveguide Calibration Kit, with Option 1: Sliding Termination Quantity 1 OPTIONS TRIGGERS REAR PANEL OUTPUT Step 1. Remove the silver straight waveguide sections from the modules, if installed. Step 2. Install the precision-straight waveguide sections that are contained in the calibration kit on the waveguide output connector of each millimeter module. Millimeter Wave BAND DEFINITION NOTE These waveguide sections (test port adapters) use high precision flanges to improve connection repeatability and calibration quality. They must be used to ensure specified system performance. RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG TEST SET CONFIG 37XXXD OM Step 3. Apply power to both system Sources and allow them to complete self test. Step 4. Apply power to the network analyzer. Step 5. Press the Option Menu key, select TEST SET CONFIG to configure the system for the types of millimeter modules used. Step 6. Allow the system to warm up for at least 60 minutes to ensure operation to performance specifications. 13-25 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT 13-10 Key OPERATION CHECKOUT—IF POWER LEVEL TEST Menu Choice SETUP MENU START: Low-end Frequency STOP: High-end Frequency CHANNEL MENU DUAL CHANNELS 1&3 GRAPH TYPE LOG MAGNITUDE (both channels) S-PARAMS Channel 1 User Ratio: a1/1 User Phase Lock: a1 Channel 3 User Ratio: b1/1 User Phase Lock: a1 SET SCALE Key RESOLUTION: 10.0 dB/DIV REF VALUE: -10.0 dB (both channels) DUAL CHANNELS 2&4 S-PARAMS Channel 2 User Ratio: a2/1 User Phase Lock: a2 Channel 4 User Ratio: b2/1 User Phase Lock: a2 Key Menu Choice CHANNEL MENU SINGLE CHANNEL S-PARAMS Channel 3 User Ratio: b2/1 User Phase Lock: a1 13-26 This test verifies that each individual receiver channel operates properly. Measurement calibration of the system is not required for this test. Test Setup Set up test equipment as described below: Step 1. Install a flush short on the output of the 3740A-X module connected to Port 1. Step 2. Set up the network analyzer controls as shown at left. NOTE For 3741A Series, use limit settings for b1/1 (b2/1). Test Procedure The test procedure is described below: Step 1. Observe sweep indicator and allow at least one complete sweep to occur. Step 2. Verify that the measurement traces fall within the limit lines (Table 13-6). Step 3. If the second module connected to Port 2 is also a Model 3740A-X Transmission/Reflection module, change the setup to that shown at the top left and perform Step 4. Otherwise, skip to Step 7. Step 4. Install a flush short to the output of the 3740A-X module on Port 2. Step 5. Verify that the measurement traces fall within the limit lines. Step 6. If the second module to be tested is a Model 3741A-X, connect the two modules together and change the setup to that shown at the bottom left. Step 7. Verify that the measurement trace falls within the limit lines. Menu Choice CHANNEL MENU MILLIMETER WAVE 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE Table 13-6. OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT Limit Line Settings Limit Type Model and Frequency Range (GHz) 3740A-Q 33-50 3740A-V 50-75 3740A-E 60-90 a1/1 (a2/1) UPPER LIMIT dB –5 –5 –5 a1/1 (a2/1) LOWER LIMIT dB –29 –27 b1/1 (b2/1) UPPER LIMIT dB –2 –2 37XXXD OM 3740A-EE 60-85 85-94 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –29 –34 –29 –39 –39 –24 –34 –39 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 56-60 3740A-W and 3740A-EW 65-75 75-100 100-110 3740A-F 90-140 13-27 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT 13-11 Key OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— TRANSMISSION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST START: Low-end Frequency STOP: High-end Frequency CHANNEL MENU DUAL CHANNELS 1 &3 (two 3740A-X’s) SINGLE CHANNEL 3 (one 3740A-X and one 3741A-X) GRAPH TYPE LOG MAGNITUDE (both channels) SET SCALE RESOLUTION: 0.050 dB/DIV REF VALUE: 0.0 dB (both channels) S-PARA MS Channel 1 S12 Channel 3 S21 DATA POINT 401 VIDEO IF BW 1 KHz 13-28 The following test verifies that the transmission high-level noise in the ME7808B Millimeter VNA System will not significantly affect the accuracy of subsequent measurements. High-level noise is the random noise that exists in the ME7808B Millimeter VNA System. Because it is non-systematic, it cannot be accurately predicted or measured. Thus, it cannot be removed using conventional error-correction techniques. Measurement calibration is not required for this test. Menu Choice SETUP MENU MILLIMETER WAVE NOTE This test is not applicable if you are only using a single 3740A-X module on Port 1. Test Setup Set up the ME7808B Millimeter VNA System controls as shown at left. Test Procedure The test procedure is described below. Step 1. Connect the two modules together. Step 2. If using two 3740A-X’s, press the Ch 1 key and perform Steps 3 through 9. Otherwise, go to Step 10. Step 3. Press the Trace Memory key. 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT Step 4. Choose VIEW DATA from the menu (left) and press the Enter key. Step 5. While observing the sweep indicator, allow at least two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if using single channel display.) Step 6. Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from menu and press the Enter key. Step 7. Choose VIEW DATA / MEMORY from the menu and press the Enter key. Step 8. While observing the sweep indicator, allow at least two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if using single channel display.) Step 9. Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls within the area between the two limit lines. MENU NO1 TRACE MEMORY FUNCTIONS VIEW DATA VIEW MEMORY VIEW DATA AND MEMORY VIEW DATA (/) MEMORY SELECT TRACE MATH STORE DATA TO MEMORY DISK OPERATIONS NOTE Displayed data is only valid for the first few sweeps. 37XXXD OM Step 10. Press the Ch 3 key. Step 11. Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3. 13-29 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT 13-12 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— REFLECTION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST Key Menu Choice SETUP MENU START: Low-end Frequency STOP: High-end Frequency CHANNEL MENU DUAL CHANNELS 1 & 3 (two 3740A-X’s) SINGLE CHANNEL 3 (one 3740A-X and one 3741A-X) GRAPH TYPE LOG MAGNITUDE (both channels) SET SCALE RESOLUTION: 0.050 dB/DIV REF VALUE: 0.0 dB (both channels) S-PARA MS Channel 1 S11 Channel 3 S22 DATA POINT 401 VIDEO IF BW 1 KHz 13-30 MILLIMETER WAVE The following test verifies that the reflection high-level noise in the ME7808B Millimeter VNA System will not significantly affect the accuracy of subsequent measurements. High-level noise is the random noise that exists in the ME7808B Millimeter VNA System. Because it is non-systematic, it cannot be accurately predicted or measured. Thus, it cannot be removed using conventional error-correction techniques. Measurement calibration is not required for this test. Test Setup Set up the ME7808B Millimeter VNA System controls as shown at left. Test Procedure The test procedure is described below: Step 1. Attach the flush short to the waveguide port on the 3740A-X on Port 1 (and Port 2, if two are used); leave the waveguide port on 3741A-X unterminated. Step 2. Press the Ch 1 key. Step 3. Press the Trace Memory key. 37XXXD OM MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT Step 4. Choose VIEW DATA from the menu (left) and press the Enter key. Step 5. While observing the sweep indicator, allow at least two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if using single channel display.) Step 6. Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from the menu and press the Enter key. Step 7. Choose VIEW DATA (/) MEMORY from the menu and press the Enter key. Step 8. While observing sweep indicator, allow at least two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if using single channel display.) Step 9. Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls within the area between the two limit lines. MENU NO1 TRACE MEMORY FUNCTIONS VIEW DATA VIEW MEMORY VIEW DATA AND MEMORY VIEW DATA (/) MEMORY SELECT TRACE MATH STORE DATA TO MEMORY NOTE Displayed data is only valid for the first few sweeps. Step 10. 37XXXC OM If two 3740A-X’s are used, press the Ch 3 key and repeat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3. 13-31/13-32 Chapter 14 ME7808B Broadband Measurement System Table of Contents 14-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14-2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Measurement Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Console and Associated Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 14-3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 14-4 INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Millimeter Module Checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 14-5 WAFER PROBE STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 14-6 BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 14-7 BROADBAND CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Merging Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Chapter 14 ME7808B Broadband Measurement System 14-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the ME7808B Broadband Measurement System and the broadband mode of operation (40 MHz to 110 GHz). For other setup modes, refer to Chapter 13 (Millimeter Wave System), or other pertinent chapters in this manual. Model 3742A-EW modules (65 to 110 GHz) are assumed to be installed on the system, even though other modules are available. The W1 Calibration Kit (P/N 3656) is designed for the purpose of performing coaxial calibrations with the ME7808B Vector Network Analyzer up to 110 GHz. The calibration kit comprises of Open, Short, and Load standards to enable two sets of calibrations—a Short Open Load Thru (SOLT) calibration from 40 MHz to 65 GHz, and a Triple Offset Short (SSST) calibration from 65 to 110 GHz (refer to Chapter 7, Measurement Calibration for these calibration procedures). The ME7808B firmware supports concatenation to allow merging of the two calibrations for broadband corrected measurements from 40 MHz to 110 GHz (discussed later in this chapter). In addition, the calibration kit includes fixed and interchangeable adapters, which may be used as test port connector savers. The interchangeable adapters have one fixed end and one interchangeable end that can be changed to a male or female for non-insertable device measurements. 14-2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ME7808B Broadband system is normally composed of the following Anritsu instruments and accessories (your system may vary depending on your application): Measurement Instruments q 37397D Vector Network Analyzer with Option 12 q 68037D or MG3692A Synthesized Signal Generator with Option 15A q 68037C or MG3692A Synthesized Signal Generator (no options necessary) q 3738A Millimeter Test Set q 3742A-EW Millimeter Module (quantity 2) q 57215 (left) and 57216 (right) Coupler (quantity 1) 37XXXD OM 14-3 INSTALLATION BROADBAND SYSTEM Console and Associated Hardware q Console q Table q Mounting rails for Table (quantity 2) q Static Dissipative Mat for Table q Wrist Strap Cables q Rigid RF Cable (Upper synthesizer to 3738A) q Rigid RF Cable (Lower synthesizer to 3738A) q Cable Assembly (3742A to 3738A front panel) (quantity 2) q Cable Assembly (3738A rear panel to VNA rear panel) (quantity 1) q Flexible RF Cable (coupler to VNA) (quantity 2) q GPIB Cable (VNA to Synthesizer) (quantity 2) q Power Cord (quantity 4) 14-3 INSTALLATION This section describes installation and system check-out without making use of a wafer-probe test station. For instructions on installation of the wafer probe test station, refer to section 14-5. IMPORTANT NOTES · The empty console weighs approximately 66kg (145 pounds). Use two people to remove the console from the pallet. · Many of the instruments are quite heavy and require two people to lift them. · Instruments should be loaded into the bottom sections of the console first, to prevent tipping of the console. · The VNA instrument has fragile RF cables connected to both the front and rear panels. Be careful not to bend these cables when handling the instrument. · If the synthesizers are not installed precisely as described below, the system will be non-functional. · We suggest using an 8 in/lb torque wrench to tighten SMA connectors (available in most Anritsu VNA Calibration kits) Do not tighten any connectors over 8 in/lbs. Console and Table Setup 14-4 Set up the console and table as described below. 37XXXD OM BROADBAND SYSTEM INSTALLATION Step 1. Remove the shipping container and all packaging and accessories from around the console. Set the table aside. Instructions for table installation appear later. Step 2. Lift or roll the console off the pallet (to lift: insert two sections of lumber through the console top and lift it, using one person on each side). Step 3. Cut the tie wraps which are securing the table mounting rails at the console rear door. Cut the tie wraps which are securing the power cords and wrist strap ground wire. Step 4. Attach the mounting rails to the table as shown in Figure 14-1. 1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H # 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R IN S T A L L IN 6 P L A C E S 1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H # 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R # 1 0 F L A T W A S H E R IN S T A L L IN T W O P L A C E S A F T E R P L A C IN G T H E W R IT IN G S U R F A C E IN T O T H E C O N S O L E . Figure 14-1. 37XXXD OM Console Table 14-5 INSTALLATION Instrument Installation into Console 14-6 BROADBAND SYSTEM Refer to Figures 14-2, 14-3, and 14-4 for installation of major instruments and cables. Step 1. Check the rear panel serial number labels of the synthesizers. The instrument without Option 15 belongs in the bottom compartment (“RF” synthesizer). Step 2. Install the synthesizer with Option 15 in the second opening from the bottom. Step 3. Install the VNA into the top compartment. Ensure the three small RF cables are installed onto the front and rear panels (one in front, and two in back). Step 4. Install the 3738A Test Set into the compartment below the VNA. Step 5. Secure all instruments in the console using the screws provided. Step 6. On the left front of the console, move the black ground wire away from the guide of the table-mounting rail, and install the table by sliding the table rails into the guides. Step 7. Secure the table rails at the rear of the console using the screws provided. 37XXXD OM BROADBAND SYSTEM INSTALLATION 37397D Vector Network Analyzer 3738A Millimeter Test Set Coupler Coupler 3742A-EW Millimeter Module 3742A-EW Millimeter Module Table 68037C or MG3692A Synthesized Signal Generator Not Option 15 GPIB Address: 5 Figure 14-2. 37XXXD OM 68037C or MG3692A Synthesized Signal Generator Option 15 GPIB Address: 4 ME7808B Console Showing Major Components 14-7 INSTALLATION 3742A-EW Module BROADBAND SYSTEM Step 8. Lay the static-safe mat on the table and attach the ground cable. Step 9. Unpack the 3742A-EW modules and set them on the table. Do not attach the couplers to the module test ports - they will not be tested at this time. (To test the couplers requires a W1 (1 mm) Male-Male adapter for mating of Port 1 to Port 2, or a full installation on a wafer probe station.) Coupler (Do not install, initially) Coupler (Do not install, initially) 3742A-EW Module Devices Under Test (DUT) Grounded, Static-safe mat Figure 14-3. 14-8 ME7808B Console Showing Table and Module Setup 37XXXD OM BROADBAND SYSTEM INSTALLATION System Cabling Connect ME7808B system cables as described below and shown in Figure 14-4 on the following page. 37XXXD OM Step 1. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between the upper synthesizer and the 3738A LO IN connector. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and tightened securely. Step 2. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between the bottom synthesizer and the 3738A RF IN connector. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and tightened securely. Step 3. From the front, install the two RF cable sets between the 3738A and the 3742A-EW modules. Connect exactly as the labels indicate. Step 4. From the rear, unscrew the four small chain-mounted terminations from on VNA (let them hang loose) and install the Cable Set. Connect individual cables as indicated on the labels . Step 5. Connect one GPIB cable from the lower (Dedicated) GPIB connector of the VNA to the upper synthesizer. Connect the second GPIB cable between the two synthesizers. Step 6. Insert the power cords into all 4 instruments and turn all the instruments on. Step 7. Ensure that the two synthesizers' GPIB addresses are set correctly. The top unit should be set to address 4 and the bottom unit should be set to address 5. This can be verified or changed by pressing SYSTEM |CONFIG |GPIB ADDRESS and entering the appropriate GPIB address. 14-9 INSTALLATION GPIB Cable BROADBAND SYSTEM Cable Set. Install individual cables as marked GPIB Cable GPIB Cable Power Cords Figure 14-4. 14-10 ME7808B Console Rear Panel Cabling 37XXXD OM BROADBAND SYSTEM 14-4 INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS Millimeter Module Checkout 37XXXD OM INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS Perform electrical tests as described below: Check out the Millimeter Modules as described below: Step 1. Ensure the VNA displays “Self-Test Passed”. If self-test fails, contact your Anritsu Representative. Step 2. To put the system into the “Millimeter” mode, press the Option Menu key, and select TEST SET CONFIG / MILLIMETER WAVE, then press Enter. Select the correct WR modules for your system. Step 3. Connect the Port 1 and Port 2 3742A-EW waveguide test ports tightly together. Step 4. If error messages appear, or the system does not sweep: · Look for error messages displayed on the synthesizers’ front panels (“ovn cold” is not an error) · Double-check all cable connections · Verify the synthesizers’ GPIB addresses are set correctly · Verify the power control verniers on top of the 3742A-EW modules are set to maximum power (fully CW) Step 5. Ensure the system is set to default settings (press the Default Program key twice to reset the system). Step 6. Set the VNA display as follows: a. Press the Channel Menu key and select SINGLE CHANNEL from the display menu. b. Press the Ch3 key c. Press the Graph Type key and select LOG MAGNITUDE from the displayed menu. Step 7. Ensure the display is similar to Figure 14-5 (next page). Step 8. Press the Ch2 key. Step 9. Press the Graph Type key and select LOG MAGNITUDE from the displayed menu. 14-11 INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS Step 10. Figure 14-5. Ensure the display resembles Figure 14-5. Normal S21 Display of MM Module Uncalibrated Transmission 40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout 14-12 BROADBAND SYSTEM Checkout the 40 MHz to 65 GHz range as described below. Step 1. Install a throughline between the test ports on the VNA. Step 2. Disconnect the cables from the rear panel of the VNA that connect to the Test Set. Install the four small terminations, which are hanging from the chains, to the VNA. Step 3. Press the Option Menu key and select TEST SET CONFIG / INTERNAL from the displayed menu. Step 4. View single channel S21 and S12 as described above and verify that the traces are similar in appearance to Figure 14-6 on the following page. 37XXXD OM BROADBAND SYSTEM Figure 14-6. WAFER PROBE STATION S21 or S12 Forward Transmission The preliminary checkout is complete. (Coupler operation can be checked using the wafer probe station). You are now ready to install the system to the wafer probe station or configure it to your needs. To activate the full 40 GHz to 110 GHz sweep, press the Option Menu key, and select BROADBAND. 14-5 WAFER PROBE STATION The ME7808B VNA can be integrated with any standard probe station (manual or semi-automatic) for making on-wafer measurements of active or passive components to 110 GHz. However, there are some considerations for set-up that will ensure accurate and repeatable measurements. Figure 14-7 (following page) shows integration of the ME7808B VNA with a probe station. The primary connection is from the W1 (1.00 mm) coaxial output on the multiplexing coupler to the wafer probes. If losses through the probes and cables are excessive, the result can be a poor calibration. Therefore, it is recommended that the distance between the couplers and the probes be kept as small as possible. This can be achieved by mounting the millimeter wave modules (3742A-EW) on top of the positioners, as shown in the following figure. 37XXXD OM 14-13 WAFER PROBE STATION BROADBAND SYSTEM 0.7m Flex Cables Coupler Scope Coupler 37397D (W/Option 12) 3742A-EW 3738A 68037D (w/Option15) GPIB Address 4 3742A-EW Positioner Positioner 68037C (w/o Option15) GPIB Address 5 110 GHz Probes HF Chuck 3700C3 1.5m Cable Table 14-7. 14-14 Note: The probe station is positioned in front of the equipment rack such that the 65 GHz flex cables from the VNA are kept equal and as short as possible in length. Probe Station Interconnection 37XXXD OM BROADBAND SYSTEM BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW This results in increased output power and hence, enhanced system dynamic range. This concern also applies for the V-connector cables that connect the 37397D VNA to the multiplexing couplers. Placing the probe station directly in front of the ME7808B can minimize these cable lengths. Note that the probe station is shown on the side of the rack simply for clarity purposes. For more information on wafer probe station integration, please contact Anritsu at 1-800-ANRITSU. 14-6 The menus associated with the broadband system are shown in Figure 14-8. BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW . - Channels Measurement Display Enhancement Option Menu MENU OPTNS OPTIONS REAR PANEL OUTPUT DIAGNOSTICS BROADBAND DEFINITION RECEIVER MODE SOURCE CONFIG TEST SET CONFIG MENU BB4 RF ON/OFF DURING RETRACE BROADBAND BAND 2 TO SELECT PRESS BAND 2 START FREQ 65.000000000 GHz BAND 2 ST0PT FREQ 110.000000000 GHz DEFAULT RANGE ACCEPT RANGE MENU BB2 MENU BB3 BROADBAND TEST SET MODULES BROADBAND TEST SET PORT 1 MODULE 3740/41/42/NONE 3740/41/42/NONE PORT 2 MODULE ACCEPT CONFIG PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH PRESS TO ABORT PRESS TO SELECT BROADBAND BAND 2 WR10 EXTENDED PRESS TO ABORT PORT 1 MODULE 3742 PORT 2 MODULE 3742 WARNING CONTINUING MAY INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION PRESS TO CONTINUE TO MENU SU1/SU2 PRESS TO ABORT Table 14-8. 37XXXD OM Broadband System Menu Flow 14-15 BROADBAND CALIBRATION 14-7 BROADBAND CALIBRATION Merging Calibrations MENU MRG1 BROADBAND SYSTEM Broadband coaxial calibrations on the ME7808B are performed using the W1 calibration kit (3656). The most accurate calibration can be achieved during two separate calibrations, an SOLT from 40 MHz to 65 GHz and an SSST from 65 GHz to 110 GHz. Once the SOLT and SSST calibrations have been performed and saved, they can be merged for a continuous, single sweep broadband calibration. (Refer to Chapter 7, Measurement Calibration for SOLT and SSST calibration procedures.) Alternatively, the user may perform an SOLT over the entire band, 40 MHz to 110 GHz, which will result in degraded performance, compared to the previously mentioned routine. Procced as follows: Step 1. Press the Appl key. Step 2. Select MERGE CAL FILES to open menu MRG1 (left). Step 3. Select MERGE CAL FILES again to open menu MRG2 (below left). Step 4. Select READ CAL FILE 1 FROM HARD DISK or READ CAL FILE 1 FROM FLOPPY DISK to select the SOLT calibration file. Step 5. After loading the SOLT cal file, select READ CAL FILE 2 FROM HARD DISK or READ CAL FILE 2 FROM FLOPPY DISK from menu MRG3 (below right) and select the SSST calibration file. This step merges the calibration files together. MERGE CAL FILES CAL FILES MUST EXIST IN THE CURRENT DIRECTORY MERGE CAL FILES PRESS TO SELECT Step 6. 14-16 MENU MRG2 MENU MRG3 MERGE CAL FILES MERGE CAL FILES READ CAL FILE 1 FROM HARD DISK READ CAL FILE 2 FROM HARD DISK READ CAL FILE 1 FROM FLOPPY DISK READ CAL FILE 2 FROM FLOPPY DISK PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO SELECT PRESS TO ABORT PRESS TO ABORT The system is now ready for calibrated measurements over the 40 MHz to 110 GHz frequency range. 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS Appendix A Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing Contents Menu ACAL, AutoCal Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 Menu ACAL_SETUP, AutoCal Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Menu ACAL_S11 1 PORT, AutoCal S11 1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 Menu ACAL_S22 1 PORT, AutoCal S22 1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 Menu ACAL_FULL, AutoCal Full Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 Menu ACAL_AR, AutoCal Adapter Removal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17 Menu ACAL_UTILS, AutoCal Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18 Menu ACAL_CHAR, AutoCal Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19 Menu APPL, Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20 Menu BB2, Broadband Select Menu1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 Menu BB3, Broadband Select Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 Menu BB4, Broadband Select Menu3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23 Menu BW1 or CAL_BW1, Select Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Menu C1, Select Calibration Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Menu C2, Frequency Range of Calibration (Start/Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26 Menu C2_CENTER, Frequency Range of Calibration (Center/Span) . . . . . A-27 Menu C2A, Insert Individual Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 Menu C2C, Calibration Range—Harmonic Cal for Time Domain . . . . . . . A-29 Menu C2B, Single Point Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 Menu C2D, Fill Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30 Menu C3, Confirm Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31 Menu C3A, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32 Menu C3B, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33 Menu C3C, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34 37XXXD OM A-1 CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING Menu C3D, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 Menu C3E, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36 Menu C3F, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37 Menu C3G, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Menu C3H, Confirm Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Menu C3I, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40 Menu C3J, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41 Menu C4_P1/C4_P2, Select Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42 Menu C4A_P1/C4A_P2, Select Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43 Menu C4B, Select Open and Short Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44 Menu C5, Select Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45 Menu C5A, Select 1 Path 2 Port Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46 Menu C5B, Select Transmission Freq Response Calibration Type . . . . . . A-46 Menu C5C, Select Reflection Only Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47 Menu C5D, Select Use of Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47 Menu C6, Select Load Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48 Menu C6A, Enter Broadband Load Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48 Menu C6B, Enter Broadband Load Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48 Menu C7-Series, Begin Calibration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49 Menu C8, Slide Load to Position X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49 Menu C9A, Connect Device 1, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50 Menu C9, Connect Throughline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50 Menu C9C, Connect Device 2, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51 Menu C9B, Connect Device 2, Line/Lowband. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51 Menu C11, Begin Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52 Menu C11A, Select Calibration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53 Menu C12_P1/C12_P2, Enter the Capacitance Coefficients for Open Devices A-54 Menu C12A_P1/C12A_P2, Enter the Offset Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55 Menu C13, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56 Menu C13A, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57 Menu C13B, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57 Menu C14, Select Port X Offset Short Connecotr Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58 Menu C14A, Select Port X Offset Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58 A-2 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS Menu C15, Select Waveguide Kit to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59 Menu C15A, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60 Menu C15B, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60 Menu C15C, Select Waveguide Kit to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61 Menu C15D, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62 Menu C16A, Enter Microstrip Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63 Menu C16, Select Microstrip Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63 Menu C17, Enter Line Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64 Menu C18, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64 Menu C18A, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65 Menu C18B, Change LRL/LRM Parameters—Two Band Calibration . . . . . A-66 Menu C19, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67 Menu C20, Change Through Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68 Menu C21A, Port X Offset Short 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69 Menu C21B, Port X Offset Short 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70 Menu C21C, Port X Offset Short 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71 Menu Cal_Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72 Menu Cal_Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73 Menu Cal_EM, Enhancement Menu for Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74 Menu CAR1, Adapter Removal 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75 Menu CAR2, Adapter Removal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75 Menu EXT_CAR, Adapter Removal Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76 Menu CAR3, Adapter Removal 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77 Menu CAR4, Adapter Removal 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77 Menu CM, Select Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78 Menu DE1, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79 Menu EXT_DE1, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79 Menu DE2, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80 Menu EXT_DE2, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80 Menu DE3, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81 Menu DE3A, E/O Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81 Menu DE4, De-embed Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82 Menu DE4A, De-embed Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82 37XXXD OM A-3 CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING Menu DE5, De-embed O/E S2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83 Menu DE5A, De-embed O/E S2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83 Menu DE6, Generate E/O S2P Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84 Menu DE7, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85 Menu DE7A, O/E Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85 Menu DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86 Menu EXT_DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87 Menu DE9, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88 Menu DE9A, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89 Menu DF1, Discrete Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90 Menu DF2, Insert Individual Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91 Menu DFLT, Default Program Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92 Menu DG1, Diagnostics 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93 Menu DG3, Diagnostics 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94 Menu DG2, Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94 Menu DSK_FD, Floppy Disk Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95 Menu DSK_HD, Hard Disk Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96 Menu DSK2, Select File to Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97 Menu DSK3, Select File to Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98 Menu DSK6, Type of Files to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99 Menu DSK7, Select File to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100 Menu DSK8, Type of Files to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101 Menu DSK9, Select File to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102 Menu DSK10, Capture Tabular Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103 Menu DSK11, Format Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103 Menu DSK12, Format Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103 Menu EM, Enhancement Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104 Menu GC1, Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105 Menu EXT_GC1, Gain Compression Help Menu 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106 Menu GC2, Swept Power Gain Compression 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107 Menu EXT_GC2, Gain Compression Help Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108 Menu GC3, Swept Power Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109 Menu EXT_GC3, Gain Compression Help Menu 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110 A-4 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS Menu GC4, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . A-111 Menu GC4_ABORT, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . A-111 Menu EXT_GC4, Gain Compression Help Menu 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112 Menu GC_DF2, Swept Power Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-113 Menu EXT_GC_DF2, Gain Compression Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114 Menu GC_NORM, Normalize S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114 Menu GC_RCVR, Receiver Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-115 Menu GC_SU2, Swept Power Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-116 Menu GC_SU8A, Calibrate for Linear Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-117 Menu GC_SU8A-ABORT, Abort Calibrate for Linear Power . . . . . . . . . A-118 Menu EXT_GC_SU8A, Gain Compression Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-118 Menu GC_S21OPT, S21 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119 Menu GP5, Select Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120 Menu GP7, Display GPIB Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121 Menu GP8, Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122 Menu GT1/CAL_GT1, Select Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123 Menu GT2/CAL_GT2, Select Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124 Menu L1, Set Limits—Magnitude and Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125 Menu L2, Set Limits—Linear Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126 Menu L3, Set Limits—Linear Polar/Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127 Menu L4, Set Limits—Log Magnitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-128 Menu L5, Set Limits—Phase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-129 Menu L6, Set Limits—Log Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-130 Menu L7, Set Limits—Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131 Menu L8, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132 Menu L9, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude and Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . A-133 Menu L10, Set Limits—Real Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-134 Menu L11, Set Limits—Imaginary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135 Menu L12, Set Limits—Real and Imaginary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136 Menu L13, Set Limits—SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137 Menu L14, Set Limits—Power Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138 Menu LD1, Define Upper Limit Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-139 Menu LD2, Define Lower Limit Segmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140 37XXXD OM A-5 CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING Menu LF1, Set Limit Frequencies—Log Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-141 Menu LF2, Set Limit Frequencies—Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142 Menu LF3, Set Limit Frequencies—Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143 Menu LF4, Set Limit Frequencies—Linear Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144 Menu LF5, Set Limit Frequencies—SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145 Menu LF6, Set Limit Frequencies—Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146 Menu LF7, Set Limit Frequencies—Imaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147 Menu LF8, Set Limit Frequencies—Power Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148 Menu LSX, Segmented Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-149 Menu LTST, Test Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-150 Menu M1, Set Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-151 Menu M2, Select DREF Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-152 Menu M3, Select Readout Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-153 Menu M4, Readout Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154 Menu M5, Set DREF Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-155 Menu M6, Marker X All Displayed Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156 Menu M7, Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157 Menu M8, Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-158 Menu M8A, Filter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-159 Menu M9, Marker Readout Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-160 Menu MMW1, Millimeter Wave Test Set Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-161 Menu MMW2, Millimeter Wave Test Set Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-162 Menu MMW3, Millimeter Wave Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-163 Menu MMW4, mm Wave Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-164 Menu EXT_MMW4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165 Menu MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166 Menu EXT_MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166 Menu MRG2, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167 Menu MRG3, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167 Menu NO1, Trace Memory Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-168 Menu NO2, Select Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169 Menu NO3, Trace Memory Disk Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169 Menu NXN, NxN Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170 A-6 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS Menu EXT_NXN, NxN Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171 Menu OM1, Multiple Source Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-172 Menu OM1A, Source Lock Polarity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-173 Menu OM2, Define Bands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-174 Menu OM3, Edit System Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-175 Menu OPTNS, Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-176 Menu ORP1, Rear Panel Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-177 Menu ORP2, Select Output Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-178 Menu OTS1, Test Set Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-178 Menu OTS2, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-179 Menu PC1, Select Polar Chart Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-180 Menu PD1, Parameter Definition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-181 Menu PD2, Parameter Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-182 Menu PD3, Parameter Definition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-183 Menu PL1, Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-184 Menu PL2, Select Plot Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-185 Menu PL3, Select Pen Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-186 Menu PM1, Select Data Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-187 Menu PM2, Data Output Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-188 Menu PM2A, Data Output Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-189 Menu PM3, Tabular Printer Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-190 Menu PM3A, Graphical Printer Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-191 Menu PM4, Disk Output Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-192 Menu PM4A, Disk File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-193 Menu PM5, Printer Type, Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-194 Menu RCV1, Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-195 Menu RCV1_WARN, Standard Receiver Mode Warning . . . . . . . . . . . A-195 Menu RCV2, User Defined Receiver Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-196 Menu RCV2_WARN, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning . . . . . . . . . A-197 Menu RCV3, Standard Receiver Mode Warning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-198 Menu RCV4, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning Menu . . . . . . . . . . A-199 Menu RD1, Set Reference Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-200 Menu RD2, Set Dielectric Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-201 37XXXD OM A-7 CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING Menu SC, Source Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-202 Menu SP, Select S Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-203 Menu SR1, Save/Recall Front Panel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-204 Menu SR2, Recall or Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205 Menu SR3, Save to Internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-206 Menu SS1 or CAL_SS1, Set Scaling 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-207 Menu SS2 or CAL_SS2, Set Scaling 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-208 Menu SS3Z/SS3Y or CAL_SS3Z/CALSS3Y, Set Scaling 3 . . . . . . . . . . A-209 Menu SS4 or CAL_SS4, Set Scaling 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-210 Menu SS5 or CAL_SS5, Set Scaling 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-211 Menu SS6 or CAL_SS6, Set Scaling 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212 Menu SS7 or CAL_SS7, Set Scaling 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-213 Menu SS8 or CAL_SS8, Set Scaling 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-214 Menu SS9 or CAL_SS9, Set Scaling 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-215 Menu SS10 or CAL_SS10, Set Scaling 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-216 Menu SS11 or CAL_SS11, Set Scaling 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-217 Menu SS12 or CAL_SS12, Set Scaling 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-218 Menu SS13 or CAL_SS13, Set Scaling 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-219 Menu SS14, Set Scaling 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-220 Menu SU1, Sweep Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221 Menu SU1_CENTER, Sweep Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-222 Menu SU2 or CAL_SU2, Sweep Setup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-223 Menu SU2A or CAL_SU2A, Sweep Setup 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-224 Menu SU3, Single-Point Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-225 Menu SU3A, Swept-Power Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-226 Menu SU4, Select Function for Hold Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-227 Menu SU5, Frequency Marker Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-228 Menu SU6, Frequency Marker C.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-229 Menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, Calibrate For Flat Test Port Power. . . . . . . . . A-230 Menu EXT_SU8 Flat Power Calibration Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . A-231 Menu SU9, Number of Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-232 Menu SU9A, Number of Data Points 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-233 Menu TD1, Domain (Frequency/Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-234 A-8 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS Menu TD2_LP_TIME, Lowpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . A-235 Menu TD2_LP_DIST, Lowpass Distance Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . A-236 Menu TD2_BP_TIME, Bandpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . A-237 Menu TD2_BP_DIST, Bandpass Distance Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . A-238 Menu TD3_BP, Bandpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-239 Menu TD3_LP, Lowpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-239 Menu TD4_TIME & TD4_DIST, Gate (Distance/Time) . . . . . . . . . . . A-240 Menu TD5_WINDOW, Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-241 Menu TD5_GATE, Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-241 Menu TD6, Set D.C. Term for Low Pass Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-242 Menu TD7_TIME, Time Marker Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-243 Menu TD7_DIST, Distance Marker Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-244 Menu TRIG, Triggers Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-245 Menu U1, Utility Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-246 Menu U2, Display Instrument State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-247 Menu U3, Calibration Component Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-249 Menu EXT_U3, SSLT and SSST Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . A-249 Menu U4, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 1 . . . . A-250 Menu EXT_U4, SOLT Calibration Kit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-251 Menu U4A, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 2 . . . A-252 Menu U4B, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 3. . . . A-253 Menu EXT_U4B, SSLT and SSST Calibration Kit Information . . . . . . . A-254 Menu U5, Color Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-255 Menu U5, Color Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-256 Menu U6, Set Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-257 372XXD, 373XXD Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Pinout Diagram, GPIB and Dedicated GPIB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Pinout Diagram, Printer Connector (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Pinout Diagram, VGA IN/OUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Pinout Diagram, Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Pinout Diagram, Test Set Control Out Connector (Option 12) . . . . . . . . B-12 37XXXD OM A-9 CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING Pinout Diagram, External SCSI-2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 A-10 37XXXD OM Appendix A Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing A-1 INTRODUCTION This appendix provides descriptions for all menu choices. Menus are arranged in alphabetical order by their name (C1, SU2, DSK1, etc.). A-2 MENUS A listing of all of the menus contained in this appendix is provided in the contents section at the beginning of this appendix. This listing gives the menu's call sign, name, and page number. 37XXXD OM A-11 A ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL GPIB COMMAND None AUTOCAL TYPE XXXXXXXX Indicates the current type of AutoCal setup. ACF2P? CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP Calls menu ACAL_SETUP, which lets you change the AutoCal setup. None START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration sequencing immediately using the current AutoCal setup. None THRU UPDATE None CONNECT THROUGH LINE BETWEEN PORTS 1 AND 2 Instruction for connecting the AutoCal to the VNA for Thru None Update. NUMBER OF AVGS XXX Enter the number of averages to be used during the Thru ACTUAVG; Update process (default 4 averages). ACTUAVG? START THRU UPDATE Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the Thru calibration update. BEGTU Press the Enter key to select or switch. None PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Menu ACAL, AutoCal Menu A-12 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING A MENU DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL SETUP GPIB COMMAND None LINE TYPE COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE Switch between the line type used with the AutoCal module. LTC; LTW; LTX? WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF XX.XXXXXX GHz Enter the Waveguide Cutoff frequency if the Waveguide Line Type is selected. WCO; WCO? SWITCH AVERAGING XXXX Enter an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING (recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the electromechanical modules). ACSW; ACSW? NUMBER OF AVGS None REFLECTION XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the reflection ACRFL; ACRFL? standards in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages). LOAD XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the load standard in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages). ACLO; ACLO? THRU XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the thru standard (default 4 averages). ACTU; ACTU? ISOLATION XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the isolation ACISO; ACISO?; standard in the AutoCal module (default 32 averages). ACIAF?; ACIAX? AUTOCAL TYPES Select the type of AutoCal calibration to perform. S11 1 PORT S22 1 PORT FULL 2 PORT ADAPTER REMOVAL Calls Calls Calls Calls menu menu menu menu ACAL_S11, for more setup. ACAL_S22, for more setup. ACAL_FULL, for more setup. ACAL_AR, for more setup. ACS11; ACX? ACS22; ACX? ACSF2P; ACX? ACADR; ACX? Menu ACAL_SETUP, AutoCal Setup Menu 37XXXD OM A-13 A ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL S11 1 PORT GPIB COMMAND None PORT 1 CONNECTION LEFT/RIGHT Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is connected to Port 1 (default LEFT). TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator settings. START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None sequencing. PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Press the Enter key to select or switch. ACL1R2; ACR1L2 None Menu ACAL_S11 1 PORT, AutoCal S11 1 Port Menu A-14 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU A DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL S22 1 PORT GPIB COMMAND None PORT 2 CONNECTION LEFT/RIGHT Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is connected to Port 2 (default RIGHT). TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator settings. START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None sequencing. PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Press the Enter key to select or switch. ACR1L2; ACL1R2 None Menu ACAL_S22 1 PORT, AutoCal S22 1 Port Menu 37XXXD OM A-15 A ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL FULL 2 PORTS GPIB COMMAND None ISOLATION AVERAGING None OMIT Select to omit the isolation step. ACOMIT DEFAULT Select to use the Default value during the isolation step. ACDEF AVERAGING FACTOR XXXX Select for user defined averaging factor during the isolation ACIAF; ACIAF? step. THRU TYPE CALIBRATION/TRUE Switch between the Thru in the AutoCal module ACF2TT; (CALIBRATOR) and your own port-to-port Thru (TRUE) to ACF2TC; be use in the Thru Update (default CALIBRATOR). ACF2TX? PORT CONFIG L=1, R=2 R=1, L=2 Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is ACL1R2; ACRIL2 connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2). TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator settings. START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None sequencing. PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Press the Enter key to select or switch. None Menu ACAL_FULL, AutoCal Full Menu A-16 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU A DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL ADAPTER REMOVAL GPIB COMMAND None ISOLATION AVERAGING None OMIT Select to omit the isolation step. ACOMIT DEFAULT Select to use the Default value during the isolation step. ACDEF AVERAGING FACTOR XXXX Select for user defined averaging factor during the isolation ACIAF step. PORT CONFIG ADAPT & L=1, R=2 L=1, ADAPT&R=2 ADAPT&R=1, L=2 R=1, ADAPT & L=2 Switch between the side of the AutoCal module and adapter which is connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to Adapter which is then connected to Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2). ACAL1R2; ACL1AR2; ACAR1L2; ACR1AL2; ACARP? TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator settings. START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None sequencing. PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Press the Enter key to select or switch. None Menu ACAL_AR, AutoCal Adapter Removal Menu 37XXXD OM A-17 A ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL UTILITIES GPIB COMMAND None AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION Calls menu ACAL_CHAR, which lets you set characterization values. None SAVE TO HARD DISK Saves file to the hard disk. SAVE SAVE TO FLOPPY DISK Saves file to the floppy disk. SAVE RECALL FROM HARD DISK Recalls a file from the hard disk. RECALL RECALL FROM FLOPPY DISK Recalls a file from the floppy disk. RECALL Press the Enter key to select. None PRESS TO SELECT Menu ACAL_UTILS, AutoCal Utilities Menu A-18 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU A DESCRIPTION AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION GPIB COMMAND None SWITCH AVERAGING XXXX Enter an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING (recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the electromechanical modules). PORT CONFIG L=1, R=2 R=1, L=2 Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is ACL1R2; connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to ACR1L2; Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2). ACARP? NUMBER OF AVGS ACSW; ACSW? None REFLECTION XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the reflection ACRFL; ACRFL? standards in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages). LOAD XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the load standard in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages). ACLO; ACLO? THRU XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the thru standard (default 4 averages). ACTUAVG; ACTUAVG? ISOLATION XXXX Enter the number of averages to be used with the isolation ACISO; ACISO? standard in the AutoCal module (default 32 averages). START AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal characterization sequencing. None Press the Enter key to select or switch. None Menu ACAL_CHAR, AutoCal Characterization Menu 37XXXD OM A-19 A ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION APPLICATIONS GPIB COMMAND None ADAPTER REMOVAL Calls menu CAR1, which provides options for removing an None adapter. SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION Calls menu GC1, which provides options for gain compression. None SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION Calls menu GC2, which provides options for gain compression. None NxN SOLUTION Calls menu NXN, which lets users select between three None pairs of devices. They can then solve for the characteristics of one of the pairs using the NxN simultaneous equation technique. E/O MEASUREMENT Calls menu DE1 and EXT_DE1, which provide information and options for the E/O measurement application. None O/E MEASUREMENT Calls menu DE2 and EXT_DE2, which provide information and options for the O/E measurement application. None EMBED/DE-EMBED Calls menu DE8, which lets users select files to embed. None MERGE CAL FILES Calls menu MRG1. None Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. None PRESS TO SELECT Menu APPL, Applications Menu A-20 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU B DESCRIPTION BROADBAND TEST SET MODULES GPIB COMMAND BDMM PORT 1 MODULE 3740/41/42/NONE Switch selection for port 1 module. The 3742 is standard for Broadband systems. P1MMT; P1MMR; P1MMA;P1MMN; P1MMX? PORT 2 MODULE 3740/41/42/NONE Switch selection for port 2 module. The 3742 is standard for Broadband systems. P2MMT; P2MMR; P2MMA;P2MMN; P2MMX? ACCEPT CONFIG Calls menu BB3. None PRESS TO SELECT OR SWITCH Press the Enter key to select or switch. None PRESS TO ABORT Press the Clear key to abort the selection. None Menu BB2, Broadband Select Menu1 37XXXD OM A-21 B ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION BROADBAND TEST SET BROADBAND BAND 2 WR10 EXTENDED GPIB COMMAND SELBB Provides information for selections made in menu BB2 (previous menu). None PORT 1 MODULE 3742 P1MMT; P1MMR; P1MMA;P1MMN; P1MMX? PORT 2 MODULE 3742 P2MMT; P2MMR; P2MMA;P2MMN; P2MMX? WARNING CONTINUING MAY INVALIDATE CURRENT SETUP AND CALIBRATION None PRESS TO CONTINUE Implements your broadband selection and calls menu SU1 None or SU3. PRESS TO ABORT Pressing the Clear key aborts your broadband system selection and calls menu OST1. None Menu BB3, Broadband Select Menu 2 A-22 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU B DESCRIPTION BROADBAND BAND 2 GPIB COMMAND None BAND 2 START FREQ 65.000000000 GHz Displays the band 2 start frequency (fixed value). BST? BAND 2 STOP FREQ 110.000000000 GHz Displays the band 2 stop frequency. BSP; BSP? DEFAULT RANGE Restores the broadband band 2 frequency range to default. None ACCEPT RANGE Accepts the new broadband band 2 frequency range. SVBMM PRESS TO SELECT Implements your broadband selection. None PRESS TO ABORT Aborts your broadband selection and calls menu SU1 or SU3. None Menu BB4, Broadband Select Menu3 37XXXD OM A-23 B ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU DESCRIPTION SELECT VIDEO BANDWIDTH GPIB COMMAND None MAXIMUM (10 kHz) Selects video bandwidth to be 10 kHz. IF4; IFX? NORMAL (1 kHz) Selects video bandwidth to be 1 kHz. IF3; IFN; IFX? REDUCED (100 Hz) Selects video bandwidth to be 100 Hz. IF2; IFR; IFX? MINIMUM (10 Hz) Selects video bandwidth to be 10 Hz. IF1; IFM; IFX? PRESS TO SELECT AND RESUME CAL Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. The None “AND RESUME CAL” text appears when menu is accessed during calibration. Menu BW1 or CAL_BW1, Select Video Bandwidth A-24 37XXXD OM ALPHABETICAL LISTING MENU C DESCRIPTION SELECT CALIBRATION DATA POINTS NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) GPIB COMMAND None Selects the standard calibration from a start to a stop frequency that provides for up to 1601 equally spaced (except the last) points of data for the defined frequency range. NOC C.W. (1 POINT) Selects the single frequency (C.W.) calibration sequence that provides for 1 data point at a selected frequency. CWC N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES (2 TO 1601 POINTS) Selects the discrete frequency calibration mode that lets you input a list of 2 to 1601 individual data point frequencies. DFC TIME DOMAIN (HARMONIC) Selects the calibration mode for low-pass time-domain processing. TDC Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. None PRESS